JP7613455B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a play area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the play area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the play area, the player is given a privilege, such as the payment of a predetermined number of game balls (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

In the above-mentioned types of gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in their configuration in order to increase the attention paid to the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention relates to
A gaming machine comprising a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a ball entry means for allowing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area,
A detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means;
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information when the game ball is detected by the detection means;
A storage means capable of storing the predetermined information;
A means for executing a determination as to whether to grant a privilege to a player based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means;
a destination specifying means for specifying information when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes the subject of the grant determination before the predetermined information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
a specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification based on a result of the identification by the previous identification means;
An operation means operated by a player;
a means for executing a specific notification in a first manner regarding predetermined information acquired based on the detection when a gaming ball is detected by the detection means and a predetermined operation of the operation means is not performed during a predetermined period before the detection of the gaming ball;
a means for executing a specific notification in a second manner different from the first manner regarding predetermined information acquired based on the detection of a gaming ball when the detection means detects the gaming ball and the predetermined operation is performed during the predetermined period before the detection of the gaming ball;
Equipped with
The present invention is characterized in that when the specified operation of the operating means is performed after the game ball is detected by the detection means, a specific notification regarding the specified information obtained based on the detection is executed in a manner similar to when the specified operation of the operating means is not performed .

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, and FIG. 2B is a front view of the main display unit. A front view of the upper variable winning device. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball entry unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port. FIG. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a second operating port. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for a first operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process for the first operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for a second operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the second operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 11 is a flowchart showing a first opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for electric utility support. 13 is a flowchart showing an electric utility switching process. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable display time table switching process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process for the first operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process for the second operating port. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. (a) A schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the second operating port in the fourth normal gaming state, (b) A schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the first operating port in the fourth normal gaming state. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot result and the combination of the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal gaming state; FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the display of the remaining time. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the fourth normal gaming state. 13 is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease of balls held as the game progresses. A front view showing the configuration of a game board in a second embodiment. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution structure of game balls. A schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the first ball scoring section. A schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the second ball entry section. (a) A schematic diagram showing an allocation table for the first ball entry section, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for the second ball entry section. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram comparing a low-frequency support mode with a high-frequency support mode, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the allocation result and various modes. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing display contents on a display screen. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for the first ball entry section. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for the second ball entry section. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. A schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and confirmed display time for each variable display mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. 1 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A schematic diagram showing a win/lose table in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a display flow in the fourth embodiment. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing an allocation table in a fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between allocation results and various modes. A front view showing the configuration of a game board in a sixth embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device and the display control device. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a setting value and an advantageous degree. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of presentation in the opening and closing execution mode. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing the control processing for the first special game state executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the processing for the opening part. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a lottery table for setting suggestions, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between setting values and ending images. 13 is a flowchart showing a main part process. 13 is a flowchart showing a round process. 13 is a flowchart showing an interval process. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the display during a round, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the display during an interval. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the display in the battle part, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the display in the ending part. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a display in the seventh embodiment. FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing various counters etc. in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device and the display control device. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable start processing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for controlling hold display by the MPU of the display control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the state of the hold display. 13 is a flowchart showing confirmation processing for hold notice by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a hold command by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the on-hold notice performance by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of hold icons, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the preview performance. (a) A schematic diagram showing an overview of a first type preview performance, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an overview of a second type preview performance. (c) A schematic diagram showing an overview of a special change. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for operation-responsive reach display executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 23A is a partially enlarged view of a game board in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line A-A. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining special operations executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the acceptance time for special operations. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for operation-responsive hold change executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A schematic diagram showing how a hold icon is displayed based on a special operation. A schematic diagram showing how a hold icon is displayed based on a special operation. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the movement of a game ball; FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the correspondence between special operations and winning in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a passage structure in a tenth embodiment. A partial cross-sectional view of a game board in an eleventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the timing of winning and the timing of additional display of a pending icon. 13 is a flowchart showing a special operation determination process. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the waiting time for winning. 23A to 23C are schematic diagrams showing the movement of operation buttons in the twelfth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special operation determination process. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the interval time between winnings and the determination of special operations. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the pending display addition process. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the timing of winning and the timing of adding a pending icon. A partial cross-sectional view of a game board in a thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the winning determination process executed by the MPU of the main control unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing how winning is detected. 13 is a flowchart showing a special operation determination process. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of HI level detections and the reference range. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a first reference range, a second reference range, and a third reference range.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is made of plate material connected on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front (see Figure 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20 so that substantially the entire play area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and both glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

As shown in FIG. 1, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a circular illumination section (hereinafter referred to as the lamp section 26) incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The lamp section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up in the event of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the lamp section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up while prize balls are being paid out are provided on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects according to the game state are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 34 also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

At a position on the upper bulge 31 closer to the player than the upper tray 33, an operation button 42 for effects that is manually operated by the player is disposed. The operation button 35 comprises a button member disposed so that the operation surface that is the object of the pressing operation faces upward, a holder that holds the button member so that it can be displaced up and down (from the standby position to the maximum pressing position), and a biasing member that biases the button member to the standby position. When the player presses the button member, the button member displaces from the standby position to the maximum pressing position against the biasing force of the biasing member. When the player releases the button member upon completion of the operation, the biasing force of the biasing member causes the button member to return to the standby position. The operation button 35 constitutes an operation device that allows the player to give predetermined instructions during the progress of the game, for the purpose of performing a predetermined effect on the display screen of the pattern display device described later, etc.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude forward. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to define an entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and an entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. Game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the rear side of the pivot base end. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hooks 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the pivot tip end side. These hooks 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 2 and Fig. 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape similar to that of the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is disposed close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A fascia is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end portion), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the fascia.

Support brackets 51, 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the resin base 50 on the rotation base side. Axle holes are formed in the support brackets 51, 52, and the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these axle holes, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

The front of the resin base 50 has insertion holes at the tip of the rotation for inserting the hooks 49 provided on the back of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. 3, in this pachinko machine 10, the locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden on the back side of the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hooks 49 are engaged with the locking device 55 (more specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 is locked so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. The locking device 55 also has inner frame hook members 57 that extend rearward from the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook members 57 are hooked onto the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, so that the main part 12 of the gaming machine is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and the locking device 55 is configured so that when a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A roughly elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is blocked from the rear by the game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 is made of wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers the front surface of the plywood, and its front surface is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE where game balls flow down is formed in this exposed area, i.e., the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game Board 60)
A plurality of openings of various sizes are formed in the game board 60, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board. A general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. are disposed in each opening. When a ball enters an entry section such as the general winning opening 61, the operational winning sections 62, 63, or the variable winning devices 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player based on the detection result.

Specifically, if a ball enters the general winning port 61, 10 game balls are paid out, if a ball enters the first operating ball entry section 62, 4 game balls are paid out, if a ball enters the second operating ball entry section 63, 1 game ball is paid out, if a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64, 14 game balls are paid out, and if a ball enters the lower variable winning device 65, 10 game balls are paid out.

At the bottom of the game board 60, an outlet 68 is provided, and game balls that do not enter the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "entering" means that the game ball passes through a specified opening position, and includes not only the situation in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position, but also the situation in which the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 68, balls entering the general winning port 61, the operating winning sections 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66 are also referred to as "winning".

The game board 60 is also provided with numerous game pins 69 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These game pins 69, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the probability of winning the general winning hole 61 and the like described above is appropriate.

The variable display unit 67 is disposed in the center of the game board 60, and the above-mentioned operating ball entrance sections 62, 63, etc. are disposed around the variable display unit 67. The first operating ball entrance section 62 is broadly divided into a first operating ball entrance section 62L (lower operating port 62aL) disposed below the variable display unit 67, and a right-side operating ball entrance section 62R (right operating port 62aR) disposed to the right of the variable display unit 67. In the following description, when the lower operating port 62aL and the right operating port 62aR are not particularly distinguished from each other, the lower operating port 62aL and the right operating port 62aR are referred to as the "first operating port 62a."

The second operating ball entry section 63 is provided with an electric device 71 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 71 has a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter can be changed by the drive unit to switch between an open state (accepting state) in which the ball can be entered into the second operating ball entry section 63 (second operating port 63a) and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the ball cannot be entered. The electric device 71 attached to the second operating ball entry section 63 may be switchable between a state in which it is easy to enter the second operating port 63a and a state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 66 is disposed in the game area PE (the right route described later in detail) upstream of the second operating ball entrance section 63, more specifically, to the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass in the vertical direction, and game balls that enter the through gate 66 flow downstream in the game area PE without being ejected from the game area PE. If a lottery is won, triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 66, the electric device 71 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

The right route is provided with a right-side operational ball entry section 62R, which is one of the first operational ball entry sections 62, and the above-mentioned upper variable entry device 64 is provided between the right-side operational ball entry section 62R and the second operational ball entry section 63. The upper variable entry device 64 is provided with an upper large entry port through which multiple game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the upper large entry port. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large entry port. The shutter can be switched between an open state (assistance state or acceptance state) in which game balls can enter or are easy to enter, and a closed state (non-assistance state or non-acceptance state) in which game balls cannot enter or are difficult to enter. The shutter is also connected to a variable prize drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and normally the shutter is kept closed, but is switched to an open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to an open/close execution mode (special game state or open/close execution state).

The lower variable winning device 65 is disposed at a position downstream of the second operating ball entry section 63 on the right route. The lower variable winning device 65 is formed with a lower large winning opening into which multiple game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the lower large winning opening. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (accepting state) in which game balls can enter and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which game balls cannot enter. The shutter is also connected to a variable winning drive section (more specifically, a solenoid), and is normally maintained in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to an opening/closing execution mode (special game state or opening/closing execution state).

The open/close execution mode is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot or special prize is awarded in a lottery based on balls entering the operational ball entry sections 62, 63, as described below. The opening manner of the lower variable prize-winning device 65 in the open/close execution mode is set so that the shutter opens up to a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 6, 8, or 16 rounds in this embodiment), with one round being defined as a predetermined period of time (30 sec or 0.8 sec in this embodiment) or a predetermined number of prizes (9 in this embodiment).

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a pattern display device 75 that variably displays (changes in) patterns when a winning ball enters the working ball entry sections 62, 63 as a trigger.

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display contents on the display screen 75a are controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, patterns are displayed, for example, lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns are displayed in a variable manner by scrolling vertically. When a jackpot or special win occurs, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode. Note that the pattern display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

In addition, a center frame 76 is disposed in the variable display unit 67 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the front side of the game board 60, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the game board 60, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into the right route that bypasses the variable display unit 67 (more specifically, the center frame 76) from the right side, and the left route that bypasses it from the left side.

The above-mentioned right-side actuated ball entry section 62R, second actuated ball entry section 63, variable entry devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from entering the right-side actuated ball entry section 62R, second actuated ball entry section 63, variable entry devices 64, 65, and through gate 66. On the other hand, the lower actuated ball entry section 62L, which is one of the first actuated ball entry sections 62, is arranged on the left route, and game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from entering the lower actuated ball entry section 62L. By selecting the right route or the left route as the launch destination of the game ball (path of game ball flow) depending on the game situation, the player can play advantageously.

A main display unit 81 is disposed on the protective member for the guide rail 100 disposed outside the play area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the play area PE to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the facing portion is provided with a main display section D on which a predetermined image or the like is displayed. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is configured to be controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D has a first actuation port display unit D1 that displays the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 62 (first actuation port 62a), and a second actuation port display unit D2 that displays the lottery results based on winning at the second actuation port 63 (second actuation port 63a).

In the first operating port display unit D1, a winning entry into the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a) triggers a changing display of a pattern, and the result of the changing display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the first operating ball entry unit 62. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the first operating ball entry unit 62 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the changing display in the first operating port display unit D1 stops, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made.

In the second operating port display section D2, a winning entry into the second operating ball entry section 63 is used as a trigger to display a varying pattern, and the result of the varying display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the second operating ball entry section 63 (second operating port 63a). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the second operating ball entry section 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot or special win, the varying display in the second operating port display section D2 is stopped, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is entered depending on the result.

Here, based on a win in any of the operating entry sections 62, 63, a variable display is started in the corresponding operating entry display section D1, D2, and a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped, which corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a win occurs in any of the operating entry sections 62, 63, a variable display is started in that single display area, and one game round is considered to be a period until the variable display is stopped with the predetermined stop result displayed.

The main display section D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a first actuation port reserved number display section S1 and a second actuation port reserved number display section S2. The first actuation port reserved number display section S1 corresponds to the first actuation port 62a, and the number of times that a game ball has entered the first actuation port 62a is reserved up to four times, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on/off the light-emitting element (LED) that constitutes the first actuation port reserved number display section S1. The second actuation port reserved number display section S2 corresponds to the second actuation port 63a, and the number of times that a game ball has entered the second actuation port 63a is reserved up to four times, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on/off the light-emitting element (LED) that constitutes the second actuation port reserved number display section S2.

In addition to the various display sections mentioned above, the main display section of the main display unit 81 is also provided with a through gate display section DS that displays the lottery results based on winning the through gate 66. The through gate display section DS displays the changing patterns triggered by winning the through gate 66, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, the predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through gate display section DS, the changing display is stopped, and then the transition to the electric role opening state takes place. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 71 attached to the second operating ball entry section 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate reserved number display section SS that displays the number of reserved balls.

Referring again to FIG. 2, the configuration of the inner frame 13 is described. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41. The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, thereby integrating it with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board 60. A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is disposed near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is disposed further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board 60, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board 60.

The guide rail 100 defines the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the play ball, and a guide passage 103 is defined by the two rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the area to the left of the variable display unit 67 in the play area PE or the area to the right of the variable display unit 67 in the play area PE.

In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, thereby preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the tip of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the bottom edge of the game board 60. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the tip of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the bottom edge of the game board 60. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the bottom edge of the game board 60, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns as a foul ball through the guide passage 103, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage 46 through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage 46 is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50, and has a main body side upper dish passage and a main body side lower dish passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage lead to the game ball distribution section described below. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 fits in below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side upper dish passage, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, and a biasing member is provided to bias the opening/closing member to a forward position where the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side are closed. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front door frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage on the main body side is connected to the upper tray passage on the front door side, and the lower tray passage on the main body side is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to Figure 3.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides of the rotation base end on the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing fittings 132 are formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

The back surface of the resin base 50 is provided with multiple locking fittings 135, and as described above, the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking fittings 135. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be explained.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67, which is located in the center of the game board 60, so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification/performance control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification/performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a notification/performance control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the notification/performance control device 143 is attached to the mounting base 144.

The notification/performance control device 143 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls the audio and lamp displays, as well as the display control device, in accordance with instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. The notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, a collection plate 150 is provided on the back of the game board 60 below the variable display unit 67. The collection plate 150 is provided with a game ball recovery mechanism that recovers game balls that have entered the various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into the various winning holes, etc.

Regarding the game ball recovery mechanism, the collecting board 150 is provided with recovery passages corresponding to the various ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61. These recovery passages run down from the ball entry sections along the back of the game board 60, and define the path along which the game balls fall. The recovery passages join near the bottom end of the game board 60, and all game balls that pass through the ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61 are collected at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery passages. The outlets of each recovery passage are open downward, and at the end of the outlets (more specifically, below the game board 60) there is a discharge passage, which will be described later. The game balls that have collected below the game board 60 through the recovery passages are led out to the discharge passage. The outlet 68 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are also led out to the discharge passage via the outlet 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with detection sensors that correspond to each of the various ball entry sections, such as the general winning opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged at intermediate positions in each recovery passage leading to the ball entry section, such as the general winning opening 61, and detect the passage of the game ball when the falling path of the game ball is specified in the recovery passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into a ball entry port, such as the general winning opening 61, when the game ball passes through a detection area provided at an intermediate position in each recovery passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor is used that detects the change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the rear side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are output to the main control device. The main control device unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly board 150 from the rear, and is composed of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected by a sealing part that serves as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected to each other in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the sealing part. The sealing process using the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it is possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the multiple sealing parts. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing parts is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

One short side of the board box 163 has multiple connecting pieces that protrude out to the side. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one to the multiple connectable pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the connecting pieces and the connectable pieces seal between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, has a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover part 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 has an external terminal board 213 at its upper right. The external terminal board 213 has various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. In addition, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower hook pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the hook pins into the bearing fittings 132 (more specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastener for fastening to a fastening hole provided on the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating tip of the base portion 211, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by fitting the fastener into the fastening hole.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the bottom of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to a game ball distribution section provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that the inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage and front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and front door side lower tray passage.

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel 203 has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which the payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 181 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board that controls the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a status return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when the status return switch is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, which generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. The power supply and launch control device 191 is also provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and holding various types of data, so that in the event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be retained, and when the power is restored, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, for example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power outage is stored and held, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

Now, with reference to Figures 5 and 6, we will provide additional explanations about the second operating ball entry section 63 and the variable entry devices 64, 65 arranged on the right route. Figure 5 is a front view of the upper variable entry device 64, and Figure 6 is a front view of the ball entry unit.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
5, the upper variable winning device 64 has a housing 310 with a ball passage 312 formed therein through which the game balls pass, and this housing 310 is attached to the game board 60 so as to bulge out from the front of the game board 60 toward the front of the game machine. The housing 310 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the game balls flowing down the ball passage 312 can be seen through the outer periphery of the housing 310.

The portion of the housing 310 that bulges out toward the front of the game board 60 is formed with an upper large winning opening 311 that constitutes the entrance portion of the ball passage 312. The upper large winning opening 311 faces the midstream portion of the right route (the portion that extends vertically) from the side (right) of the game machine, and a shutter 315 is disposed so as to cover the upper large winning opening 311 from the side (right) of the game ball flow area on the right route.

The shutter 315 is supported on a shaft so that it can rotate parallel to the front surface of the game board 60, and is configured to be displaced by rotation about the shaft support point between a closed position that prevents game balls from flowing into the upper large winning opening 311 and an open position that allows game balls to flow into the upper large winning opening 311.

The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162. The shutter 315 is configured to wait in the closed position when no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 (non-excited state).

When the shutter 315 is in the open position (open state), approximately half of the flow area (flow path) in the midstream part of the right route is cut off by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper large winning port 311.

The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at a midpoint. A flow path switching member 316 is provided at this branch point, which can switch the flow destination of the game balls to the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314. The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main control device 162, and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 316 is configured to wait in a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 312 when no drive signal is output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

When the flow path switching member 316 is in the protruding position, the inlet of the second branch passage 314 is blocked by the flow path switching member 316. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 314, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 313.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316, the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position that avoids protruding into the ball passage 312, and the entrance portion of the second branch passage 314 is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 313, and these game balls flow into the second branch passage 314.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is predefined depending on the type of jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot result described below, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 returns to the protruding position immediately thereafter. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for a game ball that has flowed into the upper large winning opening 311 to reach the branching portion. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot result, flow into the second branch passage 314 is essentially avoided.

In contrast, in the event of a guaranteed jackpot result, which will be described later, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but it is then set to wait in the protruding position until the shutter 315 returns to the closed position. Therefore, in the event of a guaranteed jackpot result, most of the game balls that flow into the upper large winning opening 311 will flow into the second branch passage 314.

An upstream detection sensor 317 is provided in the ball passage 312 upstream of the branching portion, and downstream detection sensors 318, 319 are provided in the downstream of the branching portion, specifically the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314. The upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318, 319 are connected to the main control device 162, which determines whether or not a prize has been won in the upper variable winning device 64 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. In addition, the remaining game balls are monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318, 319.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, if it is determined that a ball has entered the second branch passage 314 during the opening and closing execution mode based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 318 attached to the first branch passage 313, the lottery mode switches from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Details will be described later, but in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is higher than in the low probability mode, allowing the player to play with an advantage. For ease of explanation, the second branch passage 314 will be referred to as the "advantageous ball entry section 314" below.

Of the game balls launched into the right route, most that pass through the upper variable winning device 64 head toward the ball entry unit 70 disposed downstream of the upper variable winning device 64 on the right route. The ball entry unit 70 is formed by integrating the second operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 described above. The ball entry unit 70 will be described below with reference to FIG. 6.

(Goal scoring unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 that constitutes a part of the right route (specifically, the downstream region) is formed, and the housing 320 is fixed to the game board 60 in a state where it bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center (left side). In the upper right part of the bulging part of the housing 320, an entrance part 321a of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed so as to face upward, and in the lower left part, an exit part 321b of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed so as to face left.

The exit portion 321b is located directly below the first operating ball entry portion 62, and the game ball flowing out from the exit portion 321b is guided below the lower operating ball entry portion 62L. This prevents the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 from entering the lower operating ball entry portion 62L.

The housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (e.g., the game balls flowing down the ball passage 321) can be seen from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the unity of the second operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque so that the internal structure is difficult or impossible to see.

The ball passage 321 has a prescribed passage width and passage height so that multiple game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step occurs at a midway point in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 is provided with a horizontally long upstream passage section 322 that constitutes the upstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine, and a horizontally long downstream passage section 324 that constitutes the downstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine, which are offset vertically and horizontally so that a difference in height occurs, with the former on the upper side and the latter on the lower side, and the upstream passage section 322 and downstream passage section 324 are connected by a vertically extending intermediate passage section 323 (corresponding to a "connecting passage section").

The second actuation ball entrance 63 is provided adjacent to the upstream passage 322. Specifically, the second actuation port 63a of the second actuation ball entrance 63 is open upward, and the upstream passage 322 is formed to cross above the second actuation port 63a. The electric device 71 attached to the second actuation ball entrance 63 has a shutter 331 that can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and an electric device drive unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331. The electric device drive unit 332 is connected to the main control unit 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control unit 162. In a non-driven state (non-excited state) where no drive signal is being output from the main control device 162, the shutter 331 is positioned in a closed position covering the second operating port 63a from above, and when a drive signal is output and the electric role drive unit 332 is put into a driven state (excited state), it moves (retreats) to an open position where it does not cover the second operating port 63a.

Here, when the shutter 331 is placed in the closed position, the shutter 331 forms the bottom of the upstream passage section 322, i.e., the rolling surface of the game ball. In detail, the housing 320 is provided with an upstream bottom that forms the bottom upstream of the second actuation port 63a in the passage direction of the upstream passage section 322, and a downstream bottom that forms the bottom downstream of the second actuation port 63a, and the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the upstream bottom 322a, downstream bottom 322b, and shutter 331. In the following description, the area in the upstream passage section 322 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331, i.e., the area in the upstream passage section 322 facing the second actuation port 63a across the shutter 331, is referred to as the "first specific area SE1."

When the shutter 331 is in the open position and the upstream passage portion 322 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, a game ball that reaches the first specific area SE1 has difficulty moving in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322, and flows into the second operating port 63a. In contrast, game balls that do not flow into the second operating port 63a continue to move along the ball passage 321, and most of them reach the downstream passage portion 324. Here, the downstream passage portion 324 and the associated lower variable winning device 65 will be explained.

The lower large winning opening 341 of the lower variable winning device 65 is open upward, and a downstream passage section 324 is formed so as to cross above the lower large winning opening 341. The lower variable winning device 65 has a shutter 345 that can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and a drive section (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive section for the shutter 345 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driven state (non-excited state) in which no drive signal is output from the main control device 162, the shutter 345 is disposed in a closed position that covers the lower large winning opening 341 from above, and when a drive signal is output and the drive section is in a driven state (excited state), the shutter 345 moves (retracts) to an open position that does not cover the lower large winning opening 341.

When the shutter 345 is in the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom of the downstream passage 324, i.e., the rolling surface of the game ball. In more detail, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom that forms the bottom downstream of the lower large winning opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream passage 324, and the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the downstream bottom and the shutter 345. In the following explanation, the area in the downstream passage 324 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345, i.e., the area in the downstream passage 324 facing the lower large winning opening 341 across the shutter 345, is referred to as the "second specific area SE2."

When the shutter 345 is in the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, the game ball that reaches the second specific area SE2 has difficulty moving in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324, and will flow into the lower large winning opening 341.

(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 602. The MPU 602 is an element that incorporates a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, a RAM 604 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, etc. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the RAM 604, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 605 provided in the main control unit 162, a dispensing control unit 181, various detection sensors, etc. The power outage monitoring board 605 is connected to the power supply and launch control unit 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605. Also, as part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning hole 61, a detection sensor 391b for the first operating ball entry section 62, a detection sensor 391c for the second operating ball entry section 63, detection sensors 317-318 for the upper variable winning device 64, a detection sensor 391d for the lower variable winning device 65, and a detection sensor 391e for the through gate 66 are connected, and based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors 317-318, 391a-391e, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section. Also, the MPU 602 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot based on winning the first operating ball entry section 62 (first operating hole 62a) and the second operating ball entry section 63 (second operating hole 63a).

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, the payout control device 181, and the notification/presentation control device 143 (more specifically, the notification/presentation control board 651). The payout control device 181 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a win is identified in the general winning port 61, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output; if a win is identified in the upper large winning port 311, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 14 game balls is output; if a win is identified in the lower large winning port 341, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a win is identified in the first operating port 62a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output; and if a win is identified in the second operating port 63a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output.

The notification/performance control device 143 outputs various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the electric device driver 332 that drives the electric device 71 attached to the second operating ball entry unit 63, the variable winning driver 451 that drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, the flow path switching driver 452 that drives the flow path switching member 316 of the upper variable winning device 64, the variable winning driver 461 that drives the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, the main display unit 81, etc. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 controls the driving of various drivers etc. through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64 and the variable winning drive unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65 so that the upper large winning opening 311 and the lower large winning opening 341 are opened and closed. Also, for example, during each game round, the MPU 602 executes display control of the first operating opening display unit D1 and the second operating opening display unit D2 in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal and the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal when a state transition occurs. For example, when the game result is a jackpot, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal through the jackpot signal output terminal to the management and control device on the gaming hall side. Specifically, under normal circumstances, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result occurs, a HI level signal is output. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply and launch control device 191, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement park. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path.

The power supply/launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 (more specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. More specifically, the power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launching handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launching handle 41, and the launch strength (launch speed) of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 110 is determined based on information from this operation level detection sensor. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball launching handle 41, and the power supply/launch control device 191 is configured to be able to determine whether the player is touching the game ball launching handle 41 based on this information. Based on information from the touch sensor, it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41, and if the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated, the launch of the game ball is permitted.

The information from the touch sensor is transmitted via the power supply and launch control device 191 to the main control device 162, the notification and performance control device 143, and the display control device 710.

The notification/performance control device 143 has a notification/performance control board 651 equipped with an MPU 652, which contains a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 653 are executed.

The notification/performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamps 26-28 and speaker 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. In more detail, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 75 and the stopped display mode of the patterns that will ultimately be stopped and displayed (for example, the type of pattern combination) based on various commands input from the main control device 162, determines whether or not a reach will occur and the content of the reach performance, and transfers the determined content to the above command to the display control device 710.

The display control device 710 has a display control board equipped with an MPU, which contains a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, and a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. The MPU controls the display of the variable display unit 67 (more specifically, the pattern display device 75) based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 143.

Here, we will explain the display contents of the pattern display device 75. The display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 is provided with a variable display area in which three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. On the display screen 75a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom).

Details will be given later, but in each variable display area, one symbol is displayed for each symbol row, for a total of three symbols. For example, the variable display stops in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → center symbol row, and when the variable display of all symbol rows ends with a specified symbol combination formed on the active line, a video or the like is displayed indicating a transition to a special game state corresponding to the jackpot result or special jackpot result.

In light of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the left pattern row can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the right pattern row can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the center pattern row can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Incidentally, the manner in which the pattern display device 75 changes is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows can be set to be horizontal.

A reserved ball display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. This reserved ball display area is composed of a reserved ball number display area for the upper operating port, which is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved ball display areas as the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62a are lined up in the left-right direction, and a reserved ball number display area for the first operating port, which is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved ball display areas as the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63a are lined up in the left-right direction.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first actuation port 62a, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area for the lower actuation port is set to a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area. In addition, when a game ball enters the second actuation port 63a, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area for the right actuation port is set to a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62a is one, a predetermined reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62a is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area to the fourth unit reserved display area.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 8, the configuration relating to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during play to draw a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode), set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display section D), set the pattern display of the pattern display device 75, etc. Specifically, it uses a winning random number counter C1 used to draw a lottery for the occurrence of a big win or a special win, a winning type counter C2 used to determine the type of the big win result, a reach random number counter C3 used to draw a lottery for the occurrence of a reach display when the pattern display device 75 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change display time of the picture on the ball entry section display section of the main display unit 81 and the change display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75. In addition, it uses an opening random number counter C4 used to draw a lottery for whether or not the electric role 71 attached to the second operation ball entry section 63 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a specified area of the RAM 604.

RAM 604 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 632 consisting of a reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, a reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, a first execution area AE1 for the reserve area Ra for the first actuation port, a second execution area AE2 for the reserve area Rb for the second actuation port, and a total reserved number memory area. In the reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the win random number counter C1, the win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls into the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "599", for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "599"). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the first actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a, and is stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63a.

The random number values for winning the jackpot and the special jackpot are stored as a win/lose table (win/lose information group) in a win/lose table storage area 621, which serves as a win/lose information group storage means in ROM 603. The contents of the win/lose table will now be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figures 9 and 10. As win/lose tables, a win/lose table for the first actuation port 62a (see Figure 9) and a win/lose table for the second actuation port 63a (see Figure 10) are provided, and the win/lose table for the first actuation port 62a is referenced in a lottery based on a ball entering the first actuation port 62a, and the win/lose table for the second actuation port 63a is referenced in a lottery based on a ball entering the second actuation port 63a.

(First operating port hit/miss table)
In the hit/miss table for the first actuation port 62a, which is referenced when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, there are two random number values corresponding to a jackpot result, "7" and "507," as shown in FIG. 9(a). That is, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0" to "599,""7" and "507" correspond to a jackpot result, and the probability of a jackpot is 2/600. The hit/miss table for the first actuation port 62a corresponding to the low probability mode does not have random number values corresponding to a special hit result, and the random number values other than the jackpot result correspond to a miss lottery result.

In the hit/miss table for the first actuation port 62a, which is referenced when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 9(b), there are six random number values corresponding to the jackpot result: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning is 6/600. In the hit/miss table for the first actuation port 62a corresponding to the high probability mode, no random number values corresponding to the special hit result are provided, and the random number values other than the jackpot result correspond to the lottery result of not winning.

(Win/loose table for second operating port)
In the hit/miss table for the second actuation port 63a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are two, "7" and "507". That is, among the hit random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7" and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of the jackpot result is 2/600, which is the same as the hit/miss table for the first actuation port 62a. However, in the hit/miss table for the second actuation port 63a, "1", "2", "3", ... "597", "598", "599" correspond to the special hit result, and the probability of the special hit result is 593/600. In addition, the random number values other than the random number values that result in the jackpot result and the random number values that result in the special hit result, specifically "4", "104", "204", "404", and "504", are configured to result in a miss in the lottery result.

In the hit/miss table for the second actuation port 63a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of a jackpot is 6/600, which is similar to the hit/miss table for the first actuation port 62a. However, in the hit/miss table for the second actuation port 63a, "1", "2", "3", ... "597", "598", and "599" correspond to the special hit result, and the probability of a special hit result is 593/600. In addition, other than the random number value that results in a jackpot and the random number value that results in a special jackpot, specifically "404," the lottery result is configured to be a losing result.

In this way, the probability of a big win is the same whether the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a is won. However, when comparing the first actuation port 62a and the second actuation port 63a, the possibility of a special win is set higher for the second actuation port 63a. In other words, when comparing the probability of a certain number of balls being released, the second actuation port 63a is favored over the first actuation port 62a.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 8, the winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "99" and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "99"). The winning type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the first actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a, and is stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63a.

The allocation destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 622, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in the ROM 603. In this embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined by referring to the hit type counter C2 and the allocation table. The jackpot results include 6R normal jackpot result A, 6R normal jackpot result B, 6R normal jackpot result C, 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R normal jackpot result E, 6R normal jackpot result F, 6R special jackpot result, and 16R special jackpot result.

(First operating port sorting table)
As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the first operating port distribution table, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "99", a total of six "0" to "5" correspond to the 6R normal jackpot result A, a total of six "6" to "11" correspond to the 6R normal jackpot result B, a total of six "12" to "17" correspond to the 6R normal jackpot result C, a total of six "18" to "23" correspond to the 6R normal jackpot result D, a total of six "24" to "29" correspond to the 6R normal jackpot result E, a total of six "30" to "49" correspond to the 6R normal jackpot result F, a total of 48 "50" to "97" correspond to the 6R special jackpot result, and a total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 16R special jackpot result.

(Distribution table for second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the distribution table for the second operating port, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "99", a total of two "0" to "1" correspond to a 6R normal jackpot result B, a total of two "2" to "3" correspond to a 6R normal jackpot result C, a total of three "4" to "6" correspond to a 6R normal jackpot result D, a total of three "7" to "9" correspond to a 6R normal jackpot result E, a total of 25 "10" to "34" correspond to a 6R normal jackpot result F, a total of 55 "35" to "89" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result, and a total of 10 "90" to "99" correspond to a 16R special jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 8, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a or the second actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the first actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62a, and is stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63a. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state) based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603.

Here, the reach display refers to a display state that makes the player think that the game is in a variable display state that is likely to result in a special display result after the variable display of the patterns (pictures) has started on the pattern display device 75 and before the stopped display result is derived and displayed, in a gaming machine that has a pattern display device 75 that is capable of displaying a variable (or changeable) pattern (picture), and in which the stopped display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game round in which the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode.

In other words, it is a display state in which the patterns of some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the patterns of the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of an open/close execution mode on a preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, and the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern sequence while the reach line is formed.

To explain the display contents on the display screen 75a in more detail, first the display of the changing patterns in the right pattern row is terminated, and then when the display of the changing patterns in the left pattern row is terminated, a reach line is formed by the display of the numbered main patterns that make up the winning pattern combination on one of the active lines, and when the reach line is formed, the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern row is performed, resulting in a reach display. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated by displaying the numbered main patterns that make up the winning pattern combination together with the main patterns that form the reach line as stopped on the reach line.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while a reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a. In addition, when a reach display is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the time for which the patterns are displayed in the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D), and the time for which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 (at the start of the pattern variation by the pattern display device 75).

The opening random number counter C4 for the electric role 71 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The opening random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role memory area 633 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the through gate 66. Then, at a specified timing, an opening lottery (support lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric role 71 to the open state by referring to the stored value of the opening random number counter C4 and the support lottery table (win/lose information group) stored in the win/lose table memory area 621 of the ROM 603.

(Regarding various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 to progress the game in each game round. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 12. This process is periodically (for example, every 2 msec) started by the MPU 602. In step S101, a process of reading various detection sensors (for example, the above-mentioned detection sensors 317-319, 391a-391e) is executed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a win has occurred through the first operating port 62a, a winning detection flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604; if it is determined that a win has occurred through the second operating port 63a, a winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635; if it is determined that a win has occurred through the upper variable winning device 64, a winning detection flag for the upper large winning port is stored in the various flag storage area 635; if it is determined that a win has occurred through the advantageous winning section 314, a winning detection flag for the advantageous winning section is stored in the various flag storage area 635; and if it is determined that a win has occurred through the lower variable winning device 65, a winning detection flag for the lower large winning port is stored in the various flag storage area 635.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

Then, in step S104, the through-winning process associated with winning at the through gate 66 is executed, and in the following step S105, the winning process associated with winning at the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed, after which the timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Winning process for skipping)
In the winning process for through in step S104, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 66. If the game ball has entered the through gate 66 and the number of reserved storage devices is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the number of reserved storage devices is incremented by 1, and the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first free storage area of the electric storage area 633 of the RAM 604. Then, this winning process is terminated.

If it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 66, or if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 66 but the number of reserved role memories has reached the upper limit, the winning process is terminated without storing the value of the open random number counter C4.

In addition, in the winning process for through, display control processing is executed for the through gate reserved number display section SS of the main display unit 81. Specifically, light emission control processing is executed for the through gate reserved number display section SS, which is made up of four light emitters (LEDs), so that the number of light emitters equal to the number of reserved role memories is lit.

(Winning process for the operating port)
In the winning process for the actuation port, first, whether or not the game ball has won (initial winning) in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) is determined based on whether or not the winning detection flag for the first actuation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when a detection signal indicating that the game ball has won in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) is received, a winning ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 181. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that the game ball has won in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC is informed that a winning has occurred in the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a).

Then, the value (start-up hold memory number) stored in the hold number memory area of the hold area Ra for the first operating port is updated (increased by 1). Next, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the win random number counter C1, the win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the winning detection flag for the first operating port is not stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, but the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball. The set prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 181 by the external output process of the normal process described below.

Next, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the second actuation ball entry section 63 (second actuation port 63a) to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a game ball has entered the second actuation ball entry section 63 (second actuation port 63a).

Then, the value (start-up hold memory number) stored in the hold number memory area of the hold area Rb for the second operating port is updated (increased by 1). Next, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the win random number counter C1, the win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and this winning process is terminated.

If the game ball does not enter either the first operational ball entry section 62 or the second operational ball entry section 63, this winning process ends.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 13. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as periodic processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, in step S201, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. Also, if a command for presentation such as a command corresponding to the presentation for a game round, such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command, or a command corresponding to the presentation for the open/close execution mode is set, it is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143. Also, output settings for the external terminal board 213 are made according to the information set in the external output buffer of RAM 604.

Next, in step S202, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the next step S203, a game round control process is executed to progress each game round. In this game round control process, a win/loss determination is made for a jackpot, and a distribution determination is made for the type of jackpot. In addition, the process sets the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 75, and controls the display of the operation port display sections D1 and D2 in the main display unit 81 (main display section D).

Then, in step S204, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, or the like.

In the next step S205, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric role 71 attached to the second operating ball entrance section 63. In this electric support process, the information stored in the electric role memory area of the RAM 604 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role 71, and the electric role 71 is opened and closed, and the display of the through gate display section DS is controlled.

In the next step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once per predetermined launch period (0.6 sec in this embodiment), provided that a launch permission signal output from the power supply/launch control device 191 is input based on the fact that a launch operation is being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE. In other words, if an irregular shot such as a so-called stop shot is not being performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle, provided that a launch operation is being performed.

In the next step S207, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The power outage flag is set when the power outage monitoring board 605 detects the occurrence of a power outage and inputs a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is cleared during the next main processing.

If the power outage flag is not set, the last of the multiple processes that are repeatedly executed has been completed, and so in step S208 it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S206 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power outage flag is set, this means that a power outage has occurred, and power outage processing from step S211 onwards is executed. Specifically, in step S211, timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and then in step S212, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved, and in step S213, access to RAM 604 is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

(Game play control process)
Here, the game number control process in step S203 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 14 to FIG. 18. As shown in FIG. 14, in the game number control process shown in this embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an opening and closing execution mode flag (opening and closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in an opening and closing execution mode flag storage area (opening and closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The opening and closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening and closing execution mode in the game state shift process described later, and is erased when the opening and closing execution mode is terminated in the game state shift process.

If a positive judgment is made in step S301, the game round control process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S301, the game round control process (game round control process corresponding to the lower actuation port, control process for the first actuation port) for the game round related to the winning of the first actuation ball entry section 62 (first actuation port 62a) is executed in step S302, and the game round control process (game round control process corresponding to the right actuation port, control process for the second actuation port) for the game round related to the winning of the second actuation ball entry section 63 (second actuation port 63a) is executed in step S303, and then the game round control process is terminated. The basic flow is the same for these two control processes. Below, first, the first actuation port control process will be described with reference to Figures 15 and 16, and then the second actuation port control process will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18, focusing on the differences from the first actuation port control process.

(Control process for first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 15, in the first actuation port control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a game related to the first actuation port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first actuation port display section D1 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game round flag for the first actuation port (hereinafter referred to as a first game round flag) is stored (stored) in a game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The first game round flag is stored when the variable display of the pattern is started on the first actuation port display section D1, and is erased when the pattern is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game is not being played, a negative judgment is made in step S401 and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is judged whether a game is being played for the second operating port 63a. Specifically, it is judged whether the display section D2 for the second operating port of the main display unit 81 is displaying a variable or fixed value, that is, whether one game is being played. This judgment is made by judging whether a game-play flag for the second operating port (hereinafter referred to as the second game-play flag) is stored (stored) in the game-play flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game-play flag for the second operating port is stored when a variable display is started in the display section D2 for the second operating port, and is erased when a picture or the like corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is time to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a jackpot result or a special jackpot result in the second actuation port 63a. If a positive judgment is made in step S403, the control process for the first actuation port is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S403 or step S402, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced to judge whether the reserved memory number CRN for the first actuation port (more specifically, the number of reserved information related to the first actuation port 62a), which is the number of reserved information stored, is "0" or not. If the reserved memory number CRN for the first actuation port is "0", the game number control process ends as is. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the first actuation port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, data setting process is performed.

In the data setting process for the first actuation port 62a, first the reserved memory count CRN for the first actuation port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first actuation port is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 8), and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first actuation port.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port are turned off in order from the bottom, in the opposite order to the light-on process that is executed when hold information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S406, a change start process for the first actuation port (change start process for the first actuation port) is executed to start the changing display of the image in the first actuation port display section D1 and the changing display of the pattern in the pattern display device 75, and then this game round control process is terminated. Here, the change start process for the first actuation port in step S406 will be described with reference to FIG. 16.

(First operating port fluctuation start process)
In the first operation port variation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed in step S501. In the win/loss determination process, by referring to the win/loss table for the first operation port, it is determined whether the information for win/loss determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information obtained from the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the first execution area AE1, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the winning type counter C2, is grasped. Also, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is determined whether the above-mentioned grasped type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result A, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result B, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result C, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result D, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result E, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result F, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result, or the information group corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result.

In step S504, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the first operating port display section D1 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D) in the relevant game round is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, multiple images to be stopped and displayed on the first operating port display section D1 are set, and in step S504, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in RAM 604. Also, in step S504, information for the MPU 602 to identify whether the current game result is any of a 6R normal jackpot result A, a 6R normal jackpot result B, a 6R normal jackpot result C, a 6R normal jackpot result D, a 6R normal jackpot result E, a 6R normal jackpot result F, a 6R special jackpot result, or a 16R special jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the 6R normal jackpot result is A, the 6R normal A flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is B, the 6R normal B flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is C, the 6R normal C flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is D, the 6R normal D flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is E, the 6R normal E flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is F, the 6R normal F flag is stored, if the 6R special jackpot result is a 6R special jackpot flag is stored, and if the 16R special jackpot result is a 16R special jackpot flag is stored.

After executing the setting process of step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the second actuation port 63a is being executed. If the determination is affirmative in step S505, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round related to the second actuation port 63a (changing display of a pattern) is being executed, the game round related to the second actuation port 63a (changing display of a pattern) is forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if a game round related to the first actuation port 62a corresponds to a jackpot result and a game round related to the second actuation port 63a can be executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in that game round, the game round related to the second actuation port 63a is shortened, and the game round related to the second actuation port 63a is also terminated together with the end of the game round related to the first actuation port 62a. In such a case, the image displayed in a stopped state during the game round related to the second actuation port 63a will correspond to a losing result.

Returning to the explanation of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is a miss result, a negative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed.

Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the first operating port display section D1 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D) in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for miss results that is pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604.

After the processes of steps S506 and S507 have been executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, a process for setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed. Specifically, a value corresponding to the variable display time is set in a variable display time counter for the first operating port (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display time counter) provided in the various counter area 634 of AM604. The first variable display time counter is updated (decremented) each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S509. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach does not occur is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach occurs. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the control device on the sub side, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, where the display of the first actuation port display section D1 in the main display unit 81 starts to change. In the next step S511, the above-mentioned first game round flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a game round (e.g., a change display) related to the first actuation port 62a is currently being performed. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the patterns in the first actuation port display section D1 and the pattern display device 75 changes in accordance with the lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the display of the patterns and the change of patterns can also be configured to start before the lottery.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 15 again, if a positive judgment is made in step S401, that is, if it is judged that a game round related to the first actuation port 62a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is judged whether it is time to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a jackpot result in a game round related to the second actuation port 63a. If a negative judgment is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is judged whether it is time to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a special win result in a game round related to the second actuation port 63a. If a negative judgment is made in step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, it is determined whether the timing has passed the variable display time set in step S508. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the first variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S409, a variable display process is executed in step S410, and then the first operating port control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S410, the image is displayed variably by performing a process of turning on/off each LED constituting the first operating port display section D1.

Returning to the explanation of step S409, if the value of the first variable display time counter is "0", a positive judgment is made in step S409 and the process proceeds to step S411. In step S411, it is determined whether or not a fixed display is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag for the first operating port (hereinafter referred to as the first fixed display flag) is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative judgment is made in step S411, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, a variable end process for the first operating port is executed.

In the first operation port fluctuation end process, a fluctuation end command for the first operation port (hereinafter referred to as the first fluctuation end command) is first set. This first fluctuation end command is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The notification/presentation control device 143 executes a process to end the presentation for that game round based on receiving the first fluctuation end command. In addition, the first fluctuation end command is sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/presentation control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the first fluctuation end command and displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 (final stop display). Note that the first fluctuation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 143 or the display control device 710 may independently end the presentation for the game round.

After the first variation end command is set, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed on the first operating port display section D1 in a previously determined manner. For example, if the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, a confirmed display of the image corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value equivalent to the confirmed display time (1 sec in this embodiment) is set in a confirmed display time counter for the first operating port (hereinafter referred to as the first confirmed display time counter) provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. The first confirmed display time counter is updated (decremented) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After setting the confirmed display time, the first confirmed display flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This first confirmed display flag is cleared when the value of the first confirmed display time counter becomes "0".

After executing the fluctuation end process in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether the current game state is the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state described below. If a negative determination is made in step S413, the process proceeds to step S414. If a positive determination is made in step S413, the process proceeds to step S414.

In this embodiment, a first game count counter is provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 to grasp the number of times a game involving the first actuation port 62a has been played in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. In the game count counter update process of step S414, the value of the first game count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the first game count counter is decremented by "1."

In the next step S415, it is determined whether the first play count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S415, the control process for the first operating port is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S415, the process proceeds to step S416, where a variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and the control process for the first operating port is terminated. Details will be described later, but the variable display time table will be switched at the timing when the play round in which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends. Note that the first play count counter is linked to the second play count counter described later, and when the value of the first play count counter becomes "0", the value of the second play count counter is also changed to "0".

Returning to the explanation of step S411, if a positive judgment is made in step S411, that is, if the first confirmation display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S417. In step S417, it is judged whether the value of the first confirmation display time counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S417, the control process for the first operating port is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S417, a flag erasing process is executed in step S418, and then the control process for the first operating port is terminated. In this flag erasing process, the first game round flag and the first confirmation display flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased. As a result, in the subsequent control process for the first operating port, a negative judgment is made in step S401 until a game round related to the first operating port 62a is started again.

Returning to the explanation of step S407, if a positive judgment is made in step S407, that is, if it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the second actuation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S419. In step S419, a process of rewriting the stopped image is executed. In the process of rewriting the stop result, the stopped image determined in the process of starting the fluctuation for the first actuation port is rewritten to an image corresponding to the miss result. Specifically, if the game round related to the first actuation port 62a results in a miss result, the stopped image is stopped, whereas if the game round related to the first actuation port 62a results in a win result, the stopped image is rewritten to an image corresponding to the miss result. In conjunction with this, the first fluctuation display time counter and the game count counter are reset (cleared to 0). After the process of step S419 is executed, various processes related to the end of the game round from step S411 onwards are executed, and then the control process for the first actuation port is terminated.

Next, if a positive judgment is made in step S408, that is, if it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special winning result in the game round related to the second actuation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S420. In step S420, a fluctuation continuation flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. With this fluctuation continuation flag set, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs display control to continue the fluctuating display of the pattern on the first actuation port display section D1 even during the opening and closing execution mode.

In the next step S421, the update restriction process for the first variable display time counter is executed, and then the control process for the first operating port is terminated. This update restriction process suspends the update of the first variable display time counter until the opening and closing execution mode ends. In other words, in this embodiment, if a special winning result is obtained in a game round related to the second operating port 63a and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, the variable display of the image in the first operating port display section D1 continues during the opening and closing execution mode, but the remaining variable display time is maintained until the opening and closing execution mode ends.

Next, the control process for the second operating port will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18.

(Control process for second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 17, in the second actuation port control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a game related to the second actuation port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second actuation port display section D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D) is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not the above-mentioned second game turn flag is stored (stored) in the game turn flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The second game turn flag is stored when the variable display of the pattern is started on the second actuation port display section D2, and is erased when the pattern is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game round is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is judged whether a game round related to the first operating port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is judged whether the first operating port display section D1 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game round is being played. This judgment is made by judging whether the above-mentioned first game round flag is stored (stored) in the game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is judged whether or not it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the first actuation port 62a. If a positive judgment is made in step S603, the control process for the second actuation port is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S603 or step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced to judge whether the reserved memory number CRN for the second actuation port (more specifically, the number of reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a), which is the number of reserved information stored, is "0" or not. If the reserved memory number CRN for the second actuation port is "0", the game number control process ends as is. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the second actuation port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting process is performed.

In the data setting process for the second actuation port 63a, first the reserved memory count CRN for the second actuation port is decremented by 1. Then, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second actuation port is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 8), and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second actuation port.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold number display unit S2 for the second operating port is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the hold number display unit S2 for the second operating port are turned off in order from the bottom, in the opposite order to the light-on process that is executed when hold information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S606, a process for starting the change in the image on the second actuation port display section D2 and the change in the image on the image display device 75 is executed, and then the game play control process is terminated. Here, the change initiation process for the second actuation port in step S606 will be described with reference to FIG. 18.

(Fluctuation start process for second operating port)
In the second operation port variation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed in step S701. In the win/loss determination process, by referring to the win/loss table for the second operation port, it is determined whether the information for win/loss determination among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, i.e., the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 and the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 are referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result B, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result C, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result D, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result E, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result F, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result, or the information group corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result.

In step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D) in the relevant game round is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in RAM 604. This stop result table for the jackpot result has a plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the second operation port display section D2, and in step S704, information indicating the image according to the jackpot result is stored in RAM 604. Also, in step S704, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is 6R normal jackpot result B, 6R normal jackpot result C, 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R normal jackpot result E, 6R normal jackpot result F, 6R special jackpot result, or 16R special jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, if the 6R normal jackpot result is B, the 6R normal B flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is C, the 6R normal C flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is D, the 6R normal D flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is E, the 6R normal E flag is stored, if the 6R normal jackpot result is F, the 6R normal F flag is stored, if the 6R special jackpot result is a 6R special jackpot flag is stored, and if the 16R special jackpot result is a 16R special jackpot flag is stored.

After executing the setting process of step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the first actuation port 62a is being executed. If a positive determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round related to the first actuation port 62a (display of changing patterns) is being executed, the game round related to the first actuation port 62a (display of changing patterns) is forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if a game round related to the second actuation port 63a corresponds to a jackpot result and a game round related to the first actuation port 62a (corresponding to a losing result) can be executed beyond the timing of the confirmation display in the game round, the game round related to the first actuation port 62a is shortened and the game round related to the second actuation port 63a is terminated together with the end of the game round related to the first actuation port 62a. In such a case, the image displayed in a stopped state during the game involving the first actuation port 62a will correspond to a losing result.

Returning to the explanation of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and a positive determination is made in step S707, and the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, a stop result setting process for a special winning result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (second actuation port display section D2) of the main display unit 81 in that game round is identified from a stop result table for a special winning result pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. This stop result table for a special winning result has a plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the second actuation port display section D2, and in step S708, information indicating the image corresponding to the special winning result is stored in RAM 604. Note that if the current game result is a special winning result, a special winning flag is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604.

If the determination result in step S701 is a losing result, negative determinations are made in steps S702 and S707, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (second operating port display section D2) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for losing results pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604.

After executing the processes of steps S706, S708, and S709, or if a negative judgment is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, a process for setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed. The details of this process for setting the variable display time will be described later.

After executing the process of setting the variable display time in step S710, the variable start command and the type command are set in step S711. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrence. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on the occurrence of a reach, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the occurrence of a reach from the information on the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating the occurrence of a reach. Note that the variable start command may include information directly indicating the occurrence of a reach. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the variable display of the pattern in the second operating port display unit D2 and the pattern in the pattern display device 75 is configured to start in accordance with the lottery, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the variable display of the pattern and the pattern to start before the lottery.

After executing the setting process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, where the variable display of the second actuation port display section D2 on the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variable display start process for the second actuation port is terminated. In the process of step S712, the above-mentioned second game turn flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a game turn (e.g., variable display) related to the second actuation port 63a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17 again, if a positive determination is made in step S601, i.e., if it is determined that a game round related to the second actuation port 63a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a jackpot result in a game round related to the first actuation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

In step S608, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. In step S608, it is determined whether the variable display time set in step S710 has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the second variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S608, a variable display process is executed in step S609, and then the second operating port control process is terminated. In the variable display process in step S610, the image is displayed variably by performing a process of turning on/off each LED that constitutes the second operating port display section D2.

Returning to the explanation of step S608, if the value of the second variable display time counter is "0", a positive judgment is made in step S608 and the process proceeds to step S610. In step S610, it is determined whether or not a fixed display is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag for the second operating port (hereinafter referred to as the second fixed display flag) is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative judgment is made in step S610, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, a variable end process for the second operating port is executed.

In the second operation port fluctuation end process, a fluctuation end command for the second operation port (hereinafter referred to as the second fluctuation end command) is first set. This second fluctuation end command is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). Based on receiving the second fluctuation end command, the notification/presentation control device 143 executes a process to end the presentation for that game round. In addition, the second fluctuation end command is sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/presentation control device 143, and by receiving the second fluctuation end command, the display control device 710 displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 as a final display (final stop display). Note that the second fluctuation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 143 or the display control device 710 may independently end the presentation for the game round.

After the second variation end command is set, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed on the second operating port display section D2 in a previously determined manner. For example, if the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, a confirmed display of the image corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value equivalent to the confirmed display time (1 sec in this embodiment) is set in a confirmed display time counter for the second operating port (hereinafter referred to as the second confirmed display time counter) provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. The second confirmed display time counter is updated (decremented) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After the confirmed display time is set, the second confirmed display flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This second confirmed display flag is cleared when the value of the second confirmed display time counter becomes "0".

After executing the fluctuation end process in step S611, the process proceeds to step S612. In step S612, it is determined whether the current game state is the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state described below. If a negative determination is made in step S612, the second operating port control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S612, the process proceeds to step S613.

In this embodiment, a second game count counter is provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 to grasp the number of times a game involving the second actuation port 63a has been executed in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. In the game count counter update process of step S613, the value of the second game count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the second game count counter is decremented by "1."

In the next step S614, it is determined whether the second play count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S614, the second operation port control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S614, the process proceeds to step S615, where a variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and the second operation port control process is terminated. Details will be described later, but the variable display time table is switched at the timing when the play round in which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends. Note that the second play count counter is linked to the first play count counter described above, and when the value of the second play count counter becomes "0", the value of the first play count counter is also changed to "0".

Returning to the explanation of step S610, if a positive judgment is made in step S610, that is, if the second confirmation display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S616. In step S616, it is judged whether the value of the second confirmation display time counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S616, the control process for the second operating port is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S616, a flag erasing process is executed in step S617, and then the control process for the second operating port is terminated. In this flag erasing process, the second game turn flag and the second confirmation display flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased. As a result, in the subsequent control process for the second operating port, a negative judgment is made in step S401 until a game turn related to the second operating port 63a is started again.

Returning to the explanation of step S607, if a positive judgment is made in step S607, that is, if it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the first actuation port 62a, the process proceeds to step S618. In step S618, a process of rewriting the stopped image is executed. In the process of rewriting the stop result, the stopped image determined in the process of starting the fluctuation for the second actuation port is rewritten to an image corresponding to the miss result. Specifically, if the game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a miss result, the stopped image is stopped, whereas if the game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a win result, the stopped image is rewritten to an image corresponding to the miss result. In conjunction with this, the second fluctuation display time counter and the game number counter are reset (cleared to 0). After the process of step S618 is executed, various processes related to the end of the game round from step S610 onwards are executed, and then the control process for the second actuation port is terminated.

(Game status transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 19 to 23. As already described, in this embodiment, there are provided a normal game state in which the game progresses based on the entry of balls into the actuation ports 62a and 63a, and a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened. Details will be described later, but the normal game state is composed of a first normal game state and a fourth normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and a second normal game state and a third normal game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and these first normal game state to the fourth normal game state are switched via a special game state corresponding to the big win result, etc.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether or not a game round (more specifically, a confirmation display) has ended. If a game round has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If the game round has ended, more specifically if the preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended, proceed to step S803 and determine whether the game result of the current game round (the result of the win/lose lottery) corresponds to a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode). Specifically, the above-mentioned 6R normal A flag, 6R normal B flag, 6R normal C flag, 6R normal D flag, 6R normal E flag, 6R normal F flag, and 6R special probability flag are stored in RAM 604, and it is determined whether any of the 16R special probability flags are stored. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition process ends as is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start process is executed in step S804. In this start process, first, an opening waiting time (start waiting time) is set for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, in order to keep the variable winning devices 64, 65 waiting without starting to open the large winning openings 311, 341 of the variable winning devices 64, 65. Specifically, the opening waiting time information previously stored in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

In this embodiment, the waiting time for the opening (opening time) differs depending on the type of win. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening in the case of a big win is 5 seconds, whereas the waiting time for the opening in the case of a special win is shorter, specifically 8 msec.

In the following step S805, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to a jackpot result. If a positive determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, where a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round number counter RC provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "6", and if the current jackpot result is a 16R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "16". The round number counter RC is decremented each time a round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the current special game state ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S805, if a negative judgment is made in step S805, that is, if the special game state is triggered by a special win result, the process proceeds to step S807. In step S807, a second winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. After that, in step S808, the round number counter is set to "1". In the subsequent processing, it is determined that the current special game state corresponds to a special win result based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set.

After executing the process of step S806 or step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, the opening command is set. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode in the pattern display device 75, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. The display control device 710 executes display control of the pattern display device 75 so that a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a moving image display of a character or the like as the display content corresponding to a big win, or a background image or the like is switched based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 143.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S809, the external signal setting process is executed in step S810, and this game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process in step S810, it is determined whether any of the various jackpot flags and special win flags described above are stored in RAM 604, and if any flag is stored, a signal indicating that a jackpot or special win has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. By receiving this external signal, the management control device understands that a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) has occurred.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a positive determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step S812.

Here, we will explain the big prize opening and closing process with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 20 to 22.

(Big prize opening and closing process)
As shown in Fig. 20, in the big prize opening opening process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second prize mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902, where the first opening and closing process is executed. The first opening and closing process is executed when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) corresponding to the big prize result is established.

(First opening and closing process)
As shown in Fig. 21, in the first opening/closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64. If the upper large winning opening 311 is not open, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is "0". If a positive determination is made in step S1002, the first opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is judged whether the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time of the upper large winning opening 311, the interval time (interval time between rounds), etc., and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) is executed. If a negative judgment is made in step S1003, the first opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1004, where the opening process of the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 451 is driven to open the upper large winning opening 311.

Then, steps S1005 to S1006 are executed to set the closing conditions (opening setting) for the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311). Specifically, in step S1005, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 seconds), and in the following step S1006, the winning counter PC is set to "9."

In the next step S1007, it is determined whether or not this is the first round (first round) in the current special game state. If a positive determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to a guaranteed big win result. If a positive determination is made in step S1008, a guaranteed big win flow path switching process is executed in step S1009. In the guaranteed big win flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the duration for which the drive signal is to be output is set. This duration is the same length as the maximum opening time of the upper big winning opening 311. Therefore, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route, most of them will win the advantageous ball entry section 314, and the transition to the high probability mode is essentially confirmed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1008, normal flow path switching processing is executed in step S1010. In the normal flow path switching processing, as in the guaranteed bonus flow path switching processing, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and a duration for which the drive signal is to be output is set. This duration is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper large winning opening 311. More specifically, a time shorter than the time required for a game ball that has flowed into the upper large winning opening 311 to reach the favorable ball entry section 314 (more specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319) is set. Therefore, even if game balls are continuously launched to the right route, winning in the favorable ball entry section 314 is substantially avoided.

After the flow path switching process is executed in steps S1009 and S1010, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, an opening command is set indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) has been opened, and the first opening/closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 14). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is time to return the flow path switching member 316 to the protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether the duration set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S1012, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the return process in step S1013 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1015, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper large winning hole 311 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317 arranged in the upper variable winning device 64.

If a win has occurred, a win command output process is executed in step S1016. The win command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, which then changes the display on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 based on the win command.

After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017. In step S1017, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1018, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the process of opening and closing the large prize opening is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1018, i.e., if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S1014 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is judged to be "0"), this means that the large winning opening closure condition is met. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set to a non-driven state to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311).

In the next step S1020, it is determined whether the flow path switching member 316 is in the retracted position. If the determination in step S1020 is affirmative, in step S1021, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

After executing the return process in step S1021, or if a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1022, where the round number counter RC is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the value of the round number counter RC is maintained at "0".

Then, in step S1023, it is determined whether the updated value of the round number counter RC is "0". If the determination in step S1023 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1024, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec).

After executing the process of step S1024, a close command is set in step S1025, and this first opening/closing process is terminated. This set close command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 14). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the close command based on the received close command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1023, if it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1026. In step S1026, the process of starting the ending is executed. In the process of starting, a waiting time for the ending (5 sec in this embodiment) is set for waiting without starting the next round of play for the ending of the open/close execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending that is pre-stored in ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of RAM 604.

Then, in step S1027, an ending command is set, and the first opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 14).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 20, if a positive determination is made in step S901, the second opening/closing process is executed in step S903. The second opening/closing process will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 22.

(Second opening and closing process)
In the second opening/closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65. If the lower large winning opening 341 is not open, in step S1102, an opening process of the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is driven to open the lower large winning opening 341.

Then, steps S1103 to S1104 are executed as a process for setting the closing conditions (setting process for when the opening is performed) for the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, the timer counter TC1 is set to "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec), and in the following step S1104, the winning counter PC is set to "9".

Returning to the explanation of step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106, where it is determined whether a game ball has won the lower large winning opening 341 based on a detection signal from a ball entry detection sensor arranged in the lower variable winning device 65.

If a win has occurred, the output process of a win command is executed in step S1107. The win command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, which changes the display on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 based on the win command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1109, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the second opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1109, i.e., if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S1105 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is judged to be "0"), this means that the large winning opening closure condition is met. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to a non-driven state to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341).

In the next step S1111, the process of starting the ending is executed. In this process, a waiting time for the ending (0.2 sec in this embodiment) is set for the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, during which the next game round is to wait before starting. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 603, is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S1112, an ending command is set, and the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 14).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19 again, after executing the large prize opening/closing process of step S812, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, it is determined whether or not the round count counter RC is at "0". If a negative determination is made in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S813.

On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S815, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is explained with reference to FIG. 23.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the first winning mode. If it corresponds to the first winning mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the advantageous ball entry portion 314 during the current special game state.

In this embodiment, a continuous probability bonus counter that stores the number of consecutive probability bonus jackpots is provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. The continuous probability bonus counter is updated (incremented) each time a special probability bonus jackpot result occurs and a ball lands in the favorable ball entry section 314 described above, and is reset when a normal jackpot result occurs or when the number of consecutive probability bonus jackpot results reaches the upper limit (7 times in this embodiment). In this transition process, this continuous probability bonus counter is referenced to determine whether the number of consecutive probability bonus jackpot results has reached the upper limit (7 times in this embodiment).

Specifically, if a positive judgment is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, where the continuous probability bonus counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuous probability bonus counter is incremented by "1". After the continuous bonus counter update process is performed, the process proceeds to step S1204, where it is determined whether the value of the continuous probability bonus counter has reached its upper limit ("7" in this embodiment). If the continuous bonus has not reached its upper limit, a negative judgment is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the special game state and the continuous number of the continuous probability bonus jackpots has not reached its upper limit, the process transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode after the special game state ends.

In the next step S1206, a variable display time table reference flag for the second normal game state is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Details will be described later, but by setting this variable display time table reference flag for the second normal game state, the variable display time of the image in the first actuation port display section D1 is extended and the variable display time of the image in the second actuation port display section D2 is shortened. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the second normal game state is set, other variable display time table reference flags are erased.

Returning to the explanation of step S1202, if no ball has entered the advantageous ball entry section 314 in this special game state, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the continuous chance bonus counter is reset (set to "0"). Then, in the following step S1210, a variable display time table reference flag for the fourth normal game state is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Details will be described later, but by setting this variable display time table reference flag for the fourth normal game state, the variable display time of the image in the first actuation port display section D1 is extended and the variable display time of the image in the second actuation port display section D2 is shortened. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the fourth normal game state is set, the other variable display time table reference flags are erased.

Incidentally, if a positive determination is made in step S1204, i.e., if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the upper limit, the processing of steps S1209 to S1210 is also executed.

After executing the processes of steps S1206 and S1210, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the above-mentioned process of setting the play count counter is performed. As already explained, in this embodiment, a first play count counter for the first actuation port 62a and a second play count counter for the second actuation port 63a are provided as play count counters. In this setting process, a first predetermined number (specifically, "1") is set in the first play count counter, and a second predetermined number (specifically, "100") that is greater than the first predetermined number is set in the second play count counter.

After executing the setting process of step S1207, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1201 (if the second winning mode is selected), the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, the various flags for the special game state (e.g., the winning mode flag, the big win flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and this transition process ends.

Next, the electric support processing executed in step S205 of the normal processing (see FIG. 13) will be described with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing, and FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the electric opening and closing processing.

(Electricity support processing)
In the electric support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support in progress flag is stored in a support in progress flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support in progress flag is a flag that is stored when the electric role 71 attached to the second operating port 63a is switched to the open state and is erased when the electric role 71 is returned to the closed state.

If the support in progress flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a support win flag is stored in the support win flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support win flag is stored when the opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric role 71 is opened is won, and is erased when the support in progress flag is stored.

If the support win flag is not stored, proceed to step S1303 and determine whether the value of timer counter TC2 provided in various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is "0". If the value of timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power role support process is terminated.

If the value of timer counter TC2 is "0", proceed to step S1304 and determine whether it is time to end the variable display of the patterns in the through gate display unit DS. If it is time to end the variable display, in step S1305, a miss display is set and timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec), and then the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the variable display of the patterns in the through gate display unit DS is terminated with the miss display stopped, and this miss display will continue for 0.5 sec.

If the timer counter TC2 value is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S1306, where it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved reel memories is greater than "0". If the value of the number of reserved reel memories is "0", the process proceeds to step S1307, where it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether support by the electric reel 71 will be performed. Specifically, the value stored in the reserved reel ball storage area of the electric reel memory area 633 is shifted, and the open lottery is performed by referring to the value of the opening random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the lottery table for support stored in the hit/miss table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. The probability of winning this support is 248/250, and the result is a win (support win) in almost all lotteries.

At the same time as the opening lottery, the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.7 sec) by referring to the support-compatible variable display time table stored in ROM 603. The timer counter TC2 is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the variable display of the image on the through gate display section DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 0.7 sec.

In the following step S1308, it is determined whether or not the result of the opening lottery in step S1307 is a winning result (support win). If it is not a support win, the main electric role support processing ends. If it is a support win, in step S1309, a support win flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604, and the main electric role support processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S1302, if the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, a positive judgment is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1310 to judge whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the image is being displayed in a variable manner in the through gate display unit DS, so the main electric role support process is terminated. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", a win display is set in step S1311. As a result, the image corresponding to the winning result is displayed stationary, and the display of the variable patterns in the through gate display unit DS is terminated. In the following step S1312, a support in progress flag is set in the various flag storage area 635, and the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and then the main electric role support process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive judgment is made in step S1301, i.e., if a support in progress flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1313, where an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric role 71 is executed, and then the electric role support process is terminated. The electric role opening/closing process will be explained below with reference to FIG. 25.

(Electrical switching processing)
In the electric role opening and closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric role 71 is open. Whether the electric role 71 is open is determined by whether the electric role drive unit 332 is in a driving state. If the electric role 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether the number of winnings after the electric role 71 is opened has reached the upper limit (in this embodiment, "10") for the attached second operating port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric role opening and closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, a closing process is performed to switch (return) the electric role 71 to the closed state. After that, in step S1405, the support in progress flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and the main electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if the electric role 71 is not open, a negative judgment is made in step S1401 and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is judged whether the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the electric role opening and closing process is terminated. If the timer counter TC2 is "0", an opening process is executed in step S1407 to switch the electric role 71 to the open state.

Then, in step S1408, the timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 seconds), and the main electric switch opening and closing process is terminated.

(Relationship between game state and variable display time)
As already explained, in this embodiment, reserved information is acquired based on balls entering the first actuation port 62a and the second actuation port 63a, and the variable display and final display of the patterns and symbols in a game round are executed based on the acquired reserved information. The variable display time for each game round is determined based on the variable display time table stored in the ROM 603, and this variable display time table is switched according to the progress of the game, thereby switching the actuation port and the actuation port display section that are dominant in the game progress. As already explained, the variable display time table is switched when a jackpot result is achieved or when the number of games played in the normal game state reaches a preset number.

In this embodiment, the variable display modes for setting the variable display time include a first variable display mode in which play related to the first actuation port 62a is the main mode, a second variable display mode in which play related to the first actuation port 62a and play related to the second actuation port 63a are of equal magnitude, a third variable display mode in which play related to the second actuation port 63a is essentially the main mode, and a fourth variable display mode in which play related to the second actuation port 63a is essentially the main mode, similar to the third variable display mode.

For the sake of convenience, in the following explanation, the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first variable display mode will be referred to as the "first normal game state", the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second variable display mode will be referred to as the "second normal game state", the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third variable display mode will be referred to as the "third normal game state", and the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the fourth variable display mode will be referred to as the "fourth normal game state".

Next, referring to Figs. 26 to 29, the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time, etc., specifically the variable display time table switching process in the game play control process (see Fig. 14), the variable display time setting process in the first actuation port variable start process (see Fig. 16), and the variable display time setting process in the second actuation port variable start process (see Fig. 18) will be explained in more detail. Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing the variable display time table switching process, Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process in the first actuation port variable start process (variable display time setting process for the first actuation port), Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process in the second actuation port variable start process (variable display time setting process for the second actuation port), and Fig. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the variable display time.

(Variable display time table switching process)
As shown in FIG. 26, in the variable display time table switching process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a variable display time table switching flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The variable display time table switching flag is a flag that is stored when the number of games played in a predetermined game state reaches a preset number of times (see step S416 in FIG. 15 and step S615 in FIG. 17). If this flag is not stored, the switching process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the timing is a timing at which the fixed display is completed in the game round (corresponding game round) in which the variable display time table switching flag is stored. If a negative determination is made in step S1502, the switching process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, it is determined whether the current game state is the second normal game state. If the current game state is the second normal game state, the process proceeds to step S1504, where a variable display time table reference flag for the third normal game state is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and this switching process is then terminated. In other words, when the number of games played in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit set by the game count counter, the game state transitions to the third normal game state. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the third normal game state is set, other variable display time table reference flags are erased.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1503, the process proceeds to step S1505, where it is judged whether or not the current gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1506, where a variable display time table reference flag for the first normal gaming state is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and then this switching process is terminated. In other words, when the number of games played in the fourth normal gaming state reaches the upper limit set by the game count counter, the state transitions to the first normal gaming state. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the first normal gaming state is set, other variable display time table reference flags are erased.

(Variable display time setting process for first operating port)
27, in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the first normal game state is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive determination is made in step S1601, that is, if the variable display mode is the first variable display mode, the setting process for the first normal game state is executed in step S1602, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first normal game state (first variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved information stored in the first operating port reserved area Ra in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the win/lose lottery, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc.

The variable display time is configured so that when comparing a jackpot result with a miss result, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a miss result where no reach display occurs (a complete miss), the variable display time is configured to be shorter as the number of reserved information stored increases. Figure 29 illustrates an example of the variable display time in the case of a complete miss in the first normal game state. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12 sec", "13 sec", and "14 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7 sec", "8 sec", and "9 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to one of "3 sec", "4 sec", and "5 sec". In addition, in the first normal game state, the determined display time of the pattern on the first operating port display section D1 and the determined display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are configured to be "1 sec."

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 27, if a negative judgment is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is judged whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the second normal game state is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive judgment is made in step S1603, that is, if the variable display mode is the second variable display mode, the setting process for the second normal game state is executed in step S1604, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, the variable display time table for the second normal game state (second variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table memory area 623 of the ROM 603 is selected to set the variable display time.

In the second normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection options for the variable display time are limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the results of the win/lose lottery. Specifically, in the second normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "1 sec" for each play (see FIG. 29), and the variable display time is shorter than in the first normal game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1603 in FIG. 27, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is judged whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the third normal game state is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive judgment is made in step S1605, that is, if the variable display mode is the third variable display mode, the process executes a setting process for the third normal game state in step S1606, and then ends this variable display time setting process.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, the variable display time table for the third normal game state (third variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table memory area 623 of the ROM 603 is selected to set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection options for the variable display time are the same regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the results of the win/lose lottery. Specifically, in the third normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "180 sec" and the fixed display time is configured to be "1 sec" for each play (see FIG. 29).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1605 of FIG. 27, the process proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, it is judged whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the fourth normal game state is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive judgment is made in step S1607, that is, if the variable display mode is the fourth variable display mode, the setting process for the fourth normal game state is executed in step S1605, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state (fourth variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the fourth normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection of the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the result of the winning/losing lottery. Specifically, in the fourth normal game state, for any game round, the variable display time is either "60 sec", "120 sec", or "180 sec", and the fixed display time is "1 sec" (see FIG. 29).

In this embodiment, the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604 stores any one of the first variable display time table reference flag for normal game state through the fourth variable display time table reference flag for normal game state. If, for some reason, none of the flags are stored, it is possible that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. In such a case, after abnormality processing is executed in step S1609, this setting process is terminated. This abnormality processing interrupts various processes related to the progress of the game, and the hall manager and the player are notified that an abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, the above notification ends based on the operation to clear the abnormality, and the various processes that were interrupted are resumed.

Next, the variable display time setting process for the second actuation port will be described with reference to FIG. 28. Note that the basic flow of the variable display time setting process for the second actuation port is the same as the variable display time setting process for the first actuation port.

(Variable display time setting process for second operating port)
In the variable display time setting process for the second operating port, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the first normal game state is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive determination is made in step S1701, that is, if the variable display mode is the first variable display mode, the setting process for the first normal game state is executed in step S1702, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, the variable display time table for the first normal game state (first variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table memory area 623 of the ROM 603 is selected to set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time, the selection options are limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the results of the winning/losing lottery. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "600 sec" and the fixed display time is configured to be "1 sec" for each game (see FIG. 29).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 28, if a negative judgment is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is judged whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the second normal game state is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive judgment is made in step S1603, that is, if the variable display mode is the second variable display mode, the setting process for the second normal game state is executed in step S1604, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the second normal game state (second variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

The variable display time is set according to the number of reserved information stored in the second operation port reserved area Rb. Specifically, when the number of reserved information stored is "0", the variable display time is set to "7 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "1", the variable display time is set to "5 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to "3 sec", and when the number of reserved information stored is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to "1 sec". In the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the second operation port display section D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 are configured to be "1 sec" (see FIG. 29).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1703 of FIG. 28, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is judged whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the third normal game state is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive judgment is made in step S1705, that is, if the variable display mode is the third variable display mode, the process executes a setting process for the third normal game state in step S1706, and then ends this variable display time setting process.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the third normal game state (third variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the third normal game state, regardless of the result of the winning/losing lottery, the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved information stored in the second operation port reserved area Rb. Specifically, if the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to "4 sec", if the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to "2 sec", and if the number of reserved information stored is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec". In the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the second operation port display section D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 are configured to be "1 sec".

If a negative judgment is made in step S1705 of FIG. 28, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, it is judged whether or not a variable display time table reference flag for the fourth normal game state is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a positive judgment is made in step S1707, that is, if the variable display mode is the fourth variable display mode, the setting process for the fourth normal game state is executed in step S1605, and then this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state (fourth variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the fourth normal game state, regardless of the result of the winning/losing lottery, the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved information stored in the second operation port reserved area Rb. Specifically, if the number of reserved information stored is "0", either "7 sec" or "8 sec" is set as the variable display time, if the number of reserved information stored is "1", either "5 sec" or "6 sec" is set as the variable display time, if the number of reserved information stored is "2", either "3 sec" or "4 sec" is set as the variable display time, and if the number of reserved information stored is "3" or "4", either "1 sec" or "4 sec" is set as the variable display time.

In this embodiment, the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604 stores any one of the first variable display time table reference flag for normal game state through the fourth variable display time table reference flag for normal game state. If, for some reason, none of the flags are stored, it is possible that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. In such a case, after abnormality processing is executed in step S1609, this setting process is terminated. This abnormality processing interrupts various processes related to the progress of the game, and the hall manager and the player are notified that an abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, the above notification ends based on the operation to clear the abnormality, and the various processes that were interrupted are resumed.

Next, we will explain the basic game flow with reference to Figure 30. Figure 33 is a block diagram showing the game flow.

(Game Flow)
The first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first variable display mode is the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the above-mentioned first to fourth normal game states. In this first normal game state, a difference is provided so that shooting the game ball aiming at the left route is more advantageous to the player than shooting the game ball aiming at the right route.

Specifically, the probability of a ball entering the lower operating port 62aL located on the left route is about 1/15, while the probability of a ball entering the right operating port 62aR located on the right route is about 1/60, and in consideration of the ball entering the first operating port 62a and obtaining pending information, it is more likely to enter the ball by aiming at the lower operating port 62aL located on the left route. Here, the second operating port 63a located on the right route is equipped with an electric device 71, and with the support of this electric device 71, most of the game balls shot (for example, 1/3) enter the second operating port 63a, and most of them result in a special win. However, in the first normal game state, the variable display time of the game number related to the second operating port 63a is extremely long (see FIG. 29), so even if the special winning result is obtained in most of the game numbers related to the second operating port 63a, it is difficult to consistently win prize balls by entering the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341). In other words, although it is possible to advance the game by shooting the game ball to the right route in the first normal game state, the investment will be high and the profit that can be expected from the investment will be smaller than when shooting the game ball to the left route.

If any type of jackpot result occurs in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). In the first special game state, the favorable ball entry section 314 is opened depending on the type of jackpot result. If a ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the first special game state ends becomes the high probability mode. If a ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the first special game state ends becomes the low probability mode.

In more detail, if the current first special game state is triggered by a 6R normal jackpot result A to a 6R normal jackpot result F, the ball will be substantially prevented from entering the favorable ball entry area 314. Therefore, the game state after the end of the first special game state becomes the fourth normal game state, which is a low probability mode and corresponds to the fourth variable display mode.

In the fourth variable display mode, the variable display time of the image on the first actuation port display section D1 is significantly extended from the first normal game state, and the variable display time of the image on the second actuation port display section D2 is significantly shortened. Specifically, the variable display time of the image on the second actuation port display section D2 is changed to be shorter than the variable display time of the image on the first actuation port display section D1, reversing the relationship between the long and short variable display times. As a result, in the fourth normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second actuation port 63a.

When the number of plays executed in the fourth normal game state reaches a specified number, the game transitions to the first normal game state, which is set to give the player a lower advantage than the fourth normal game state. Here, although there is an upper limit on the number of plays in the fourth normal game state, the game can proceed smoothly with the support of the electric device 71. Then, since the game progresses mainly with the play times related to the second operating port 63a, which is favored so that the allocation of jackpot results is favorable to the player, this provides an opportunity to transition to the second normal game state, which is more advantageous than the fourth normal game state.

As already explained, when a winning entry occurs in the second operating port 63a, most of the lotteries based on those winning entries result in a special winning result. In other words, in the fourth normal game state, a special winning result occurs in almost every game round, and the game state transitions to the second special game state in each game round. When the game state transitions to the second special game state, the lower variable winning device 65 opens, and some of the game balls that pass through the second operating port 63a enter the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341).

With the support of this electric device 71 and the prize balls that enter the lower variable winning device 65, in the fourth normal game state, the game balls are launched to the right, allowing the player to play while minimizing the loss of balls.

If the current first special game state is triggered by a 6R or 16R guaranteed jackpot result, then as long as the game ball continues to be fired toward the right route, the ball will land in the favorable ball entry section 314. For this reason, in most cases, the game state after the end of the first special game state becomes the second normal game state, which is the high probability mode and corresponds to the second variable display mode.

In the second variable display mode, the variable display time of the image on the first actuation port display section D1 and the variable display time of the image on the second actuation port display section D2 are significantly shortened compared to the first normal game state. However, unlike the fourth normal game state, the relationship between the length of the variable display time of the image on the first actuation port display section D1 and the length of the variable display time of the image on the second actuation port display section D2 remains the same. More specifically, as described above, in a game involving the first actuation port display section D1, the variable display time is 0.5 sec regardless of the number of reserved balls, and in a game involving the second actuation port display section D2, the variable display time is a minimum of 1 sec.

Here, when one play associated with the first actuation port display D1 has been performed in the second normal game state, or 100 play associated with the second actuation port display D2 has been performed, the game state transitions to the third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. The transition to the second normal game state is configured to go through the first special game state, and when a game ball is launched to the right during the first special game state, about 1 to 3 balls will enter the first actuation port 62a (more specifically, the right actuation port 62aR). For this reason, in many cases, the conditions for transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state are quickly met.

If balls repeatedly enter the second actuation port 63a without entering the first actuation port 62a, the game will transition to the third normal game state on the condition that 100 play times related to the second actuation port display section D2 have been performed, but the number of balls held will decrease slightly by that time. Therefore, it is assumed that in the second normal game state, the game will be played in the hope that a ball will enter the first actuation port 62a (specifically the right actuation port 62aR) quickly.

When the transition condition is met during the second normal game state, the game transitions to the third normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and the third variable display mode.

In the third variable display mode, the variable display time of the image on the first actuation port display section D1 is significantly extended and the variable display time of the image on the second actuation port display section D2 is further shortened compared to the second normal game state, reversing the relationship between the long and short variable display times. As a result, in the third normal game state, the game progresses mainly through the game times related to the second actuation port 63a. By progressing the game mainly through the game times related to the second actuation port 63a, which are favored so that the allocation of jackpot results is favorable to the player, it becomes a chance to continue the high probability mode.

As already explained, when a winning entry occurs in the second operating port 63a, most of the lotteries based on those winning entries result in a special winning result. In other words, in the fourth normal game state, a special winning result occurs in almost every game round, and the game state transitions to the second special game state in each game round. When the game state transitions to the second special game state, the lower variable winning device 65 opens, and some of the game balls that pass through the second operating port 63a enter the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341).

In the third variable display mode, the lower limit of the variable display time is further lowered compared to the fourth variable display mode. This difference in the variable display time results in the number of prize balls exceeding the number of game balls fired, and in the third normal game state, it is possible to progress in the game while increasing the number of balls held by firing game balls to the right route.

By repeatedly hitting the special jackpot in the second and third normal game states, the number of balls held will increase significantly. However, in this embodiment, as described above, an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive special jackpots, and when this limit is reached, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state via the first special game state. If the player can hit the special jackpot during this fourth normal game state, it will be a chance to further increase the number of balls held.

One of the features of this embodiment is that it diversifies the actual number of plays in the fourth normal game state while keeping the configuration from becoming too complicated. Below, the configuration related to this innovation will be explained with reference to Figures 31 to 32(a). Figure 31(a) is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the fourth normal game state corresponding to the second actuation port display section D2, Figure 31(b) is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the fourth normal game state corresponding to the first actuation port display section D1, and Figure 32(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state and the combination of variable display tables that are set.

(Fourth normal gaming state variable display time table)
As shown in Figure 31 (a), as variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state, a variable display time table A1 for the fourth normal game state (hereinafter referred to as table A1) corresponding to the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a) and a variable display time table A2 for the fourth normal game state (hereinafter referred to as table A2) are provided.

Table A1 is configured so that the display time is "8 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "0", "6 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "1", "4 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "2", and "2 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "3" or "4". As described above, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route (at 0.6 sec intervals) in the fourth normal game state, approximately 1/3 of the shot game balls enter the second actuation port 63a. And since most of them result in a special winning result, the time from when the display of the pattern starts to change on the second actuation port display section D2 to when the display of the pattern for the next game round starts to change is about "4 sec" at the shortest. For these reasons, when table A1 is set and there is little bias in the frequency of balls scoring, the number of reserved balls for the second actuation port 63a will fluctuate between "3" and "4," and the fluctuating display time in the second actuation port display section D2 will often be "2 seconds."

Table A2 is differentiated so that the variable display time is shorter than table A1 overall. Specifically, the variable display time is configured to be "7 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "0", "5 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "1", "3 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "2", and "1 sec" when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is "3" or "4". As described above, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route (at 0.6 sec intervals) in the fourth normal game state, approximately 1/3 of the shot game balls enter the second actuation port 63a. And since most of them result in a special winning result, the time from when the display of the pattern starts to change on the second actuation port display unit D2 to when the display of the pattern for the next game round starts to change is about "3 sec" at the shortest. For these reasons, when table A1 is set and there is little bias in the frequency of balls scoring, the number of reserved balls for the second actuation port 63a will fluctuate between "3" and "4," and the fluctuating display time in the second actuation port display section D2 will often be "1 second."

When table A2 is set, the game on the second operating port 63a progresses more quickly than when table A1 is set, so the grace period for obtaining reserved balls is shorter. However, for the second operating port 63a, regardless of whether table A1 or A2 is set, it is assumed that the ball will enter the second operating port 63a in excess of the upper limit of the reserved ball number (over winning). This prevents the frequency of the variable display time being set to a reserved ball number other than "3" to "4" when table A2 is set.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), as the variable display time table for the fourth normal game state, a variable display time table for the fourth normal game state B1 (hereinafter referred to as table B1) corresponding to the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a) and a variable display time table for the fourth normal game state B2 (hereinafter referred to as table B2) are provided.

Table B1 is configured so that the variable display time is "60 sec" regardless of whether the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a is "0" to "4", table B2 is configured so that the variable display time is "120 sec" regardless of whether the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a is "0" to "4", and table B3 is configured so that the variable display time is "180 sec" regardless of whether the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a is "0" to "4". In other words, there is a difference in the order of table B1 < table B2 < table B3, so that the time (grace period) until transition to the first normal game state is longer.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, we will explain the relationship between the trigger for transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state and the referenced variable display time table, as well as an overview of the display on the display screen 75a in the fourth normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state is a 6R normal jackpot result A, specifically, when the 6R normal jackpot result A occurs and no ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, table A1 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B1 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal game state are table A1 and table B1.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 60 seconds, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes from "3" to "4" is 2 seconds. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 second and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 second, during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a, about 15 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a miss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, then during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a, a maximum of 20 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed.

When the combination of table A1 and table B1 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B1, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "60.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the picture is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state is a 6R normal jackpot result B, specifically, when a 6R normal jackpot result B occurs and no ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B1 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal game state are table A2 and table B1.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 60 sec, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes between "3" and "4" is 1 sec. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 sec, during one game round related to the first actuation port display D1, about 20 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a loss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, then during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a, a maximum of 30 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed.

When the combination of table A2 and table B1 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B1, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "60.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the picture is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state is a 6R normal jackpot result C, specifically, when the 6R normal jackpot result C occurs and no ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, table A1 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B2 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal game state are table A1 and table B2.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 120 sec, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes from "3" to "4" is 2 sec. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 sec, during one game round related to the first actuation port display D1, about 30 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a are executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a miss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, a maximum of 40 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a are executed during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

When the combination of table A1 and table B2 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B1, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "120.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the picture is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state is a 6R normal jackpot result D, specifically, when a 6R normal jackpot result D occurs and no ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B2 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal game state are table A2 and table B2.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 120 sec, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes from "3" to "4" is 1 sec. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 sec, during one game round related to the first actuation port display D1, about 40 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a are executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a loss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, a maximum of 60 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a are executed during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

When the combination of table A2 and table B2 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B1, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "120.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the picture is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state is a 6R normal jackpot result E, specifically, when a 6R normal jackpot result E occurs and no ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, table A1 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B3 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal game state are table A1 and table B3.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 180 sec, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes from "3" to "4" is 2 sec. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 sec, during one game round related to the first actuation port display D1, about 45 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a are executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a miss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, a maximum of 60 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a are executed during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

When the combination of table A1 and table B3 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B3, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "180.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the picture is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state is a 6R normal jackpot result F, specifically, when a 6R normal jackpot result F occurs and no ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B3 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal game state are table A2 and table B3.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 180 sec, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes from "3" to "4" is 1 sec. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 sec, during one game round related to the first actuation port display D1, about 60 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a loss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, a maximum of 90 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

When the combination of table A1 and table B2 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B1, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "180.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the image is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the trigger for transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is the activation of the limiter, specifically, when the number of consecutive guaranteed jackpots reaches the upper limit, table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B3 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal gaming state are table A2 and table B3.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 180 sec, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes from "3" to "4" is 1 sec. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 sec, during one game round related to the first actuation port display D1, about 60 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a loss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, a maximum of 90 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

When the combination of table A2 and table B3 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B1, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "180.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the picture is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), if the trigger for transition to the fourth normal game state is a 6R or 16R jackpot result and the ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second actuation port display section D2 (second actuation port 63a), and table B3 is set as the variable display time table for the first actuation port display section D1 (first actuation port 62a). In other words, the table combinations referenced in the fourth normal game state are table A2 and table B3.

In this table combination, the time for displaying the change in the image on the first actuation port display D1 is 180 sec, and the time for displaying the change in the image on the second actuation port display D2 when the reserved number changes from "3" to "4" is 1 sec. Considering that the time for displaying the finalized image on the second actuation port display D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special game state is approximately 1 sec, during one game round related to the first actuation port display D1, about 60 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed. Incidentally, if every game round related to the second actuation port 63a results in a loss and the game does not transition to the second special game state, a maximum of 90 game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will be executed during one game round related to the first actuation port 62a.

When the combination of table A2 and table B3 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32(b), a timer is displayed on the display screen 75a as information corresponding to table B1, i.e., information indicating the remaining time for which the fourth normal game state is maintained, and this timer is updated (decremented) as time passes. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal game state, the timer displays "180.00 sec remaining START", and when the fourth normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state, "00.00 sec remaining TIME OVER" is displayed. Note that, when a special win occurs during the fourth normal game state and transitions to the second special game state, the timer is stopped from updating (decrementing) from the time when the picture is confirmed and displayed on the second operation port display section D2 until the second special game state ends. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer and the word "LOCK" is also displayed, indicating that the timer update has been paused.

If the number of reserved turns related to the first actuation port 62a is "0" when transitioning to the fourth normal game state, the timer will not be updated until new reserved turn information related to the first actuation port 62a is acquired, providing an opportunity to play an extra turn related to the second actuation port 63a. In such a case, the word "STANDBY" will be additionally displayed on the timer (initial value) on the display screen 75a, indicating that the timer is in the state before it began to be updated.

Here, in the fourth normal game state, the number of times the game is played through the second actuation port 63a changes depending on the ball entry status through the second actuation port 63a. A specific example will be described below with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33(a) illustrates a case where the reserved number through the first actuation port 62a is "1" and the reserved number through the second actuation port 63a is "4" at the start of the fourth normal game state, and FIG. 33(b) illustrates a case where the reserved number through the first actuation port 62a is "1" and the reserved number through the second actuation port 63a is "3" at the start of the fourth normal game state. Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 33(a) and (b) both show the fourth normal game state corresponding to the combination of table A2 and table B3.

(Difference in number of executions)
In Fig. 33(a), at the timing of transition to the fourth normal game state, the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is reduced from "4" to "3" and the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a is reduced from "1" to "0", and the variable display of each pattern on the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 is started. In this case, the variable display time of the pattern on the first actuation port display section D1 is set to 180 sec, and the variable display time of the pattern on the second actuation port display section D2 is set to 1 sec. In this example, since the first play time related to the second actuation port 63a corresponds to the special winning result, the pattern corresponding to the special winning result is displayed as a fixed pattern for 1 sec, and then the game state transitions to the second special game state.

Here, the time required for the second special game state is about 1 sec, and there is a grace period of about 3 sec from when the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a decreases to "3" until the next game round starts. As already explained, about 1/3 of the game balls launched to the right route are configured to enter the second actuation port 63a, and the launch cycle is 0.6 sec. Therefore, if the game balls continue to be launched to the right route, in many cases, the balls will enter the second actuation port 63a before the start of the next game round. In the example of FIG. 33(a), the game balls continue to be launched, and the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a is restored from "3" to "4" before the start of the next game round. This decrease → increase in the reserved number is repeated until the display of the changing pattern related to the first actuation port 62a ends, and the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a executed during the display of the changing pattern in the first actuation port 62a reaches 60.

Next, in FIG. 33(b), at the timing of transition to the fourth normal game state, the reserved number related to the second actuation port 63a decreases from "3" to "2" and the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a decreases from "1" to "0", and the display of the patterns on the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 begins to change. In this case, the display time of the patterns on the first actuation port display section D1 is set to 180 sec, and the display time of the patterns on the second actuation port display section D2 is set to 1 sec. In this example, the first play round related to the second actuation port 63a corresponds to a special winning result, so the pattern corresponding to the special winning result is displayed as determined for 1 sec, and then the game state transitions to the second special game state.

Here, in the example of FIG. 33(b), although the game ball continues to be released, no ball enters the second actuation port 63a before the start of the next game round, and the reserved number for the second actuation port 63a remains at "2". Therefore, in the second game round for the second actuation port 63a, the variable display time of the image on the second actuation port display unit D2 is 3 seconds. In this way, if the reserved number is not obtained at the right time and the shortening function of the variable display time of the image on the second actuation port display unit D2 (the shortening function according to the reserved number) is not performed well, that is, if the shortest variable display time is not set as the variable display time, the number of games that can be played before the image is confirmed and displayed on the first actuation port display unit D1 (the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a) will be reduced. In the example shown in FIG. 33(b), this type of event occurs multiple times before the changing display of the image related to the first actuation port 62a ends, so that the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a that are played while the changing display of the image related to the first actuation port 62a is 56.

The variable display time table for the second actuation port 63a is maintained in table A2 until the final display of the image in the first actuation port 62a is completed. Therefore, if a game round related to the second actuation port 63a is started before the final display of the image in the first actuation port display section D1 is completed, the number of game rounds related to the second actuation port 63a will increase by one as a benefit of the fourth normal game state.

The following provides additional explanation of the relationship between the game flow and the number of balls held in this pachinko machine 10, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 34.

When balls are launched in the left direction in the first normal game state, the number of balls held will decrease as the game progresses. If a jackpot is reached under such a situation of continued investment and the game transitions to the first special game state, the number of balls held will increase significantly due to frequent winnings in the upper variable winning device 64. Specifically, the first special game state is configured so that nine balls can actually win during a round of play. Since one winning ball pays out 14 balls, 126 balls can be won in one round. This round of play is then repeated multiple times after an interval of 2 seconds, providing a chance to win a large number of balls at once.

In the first round in the first special game state, the favorable ball entry section 314 is opened. If a ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 in this round, the game transitions to the second normal game state after the first special game state ends. In the second normal game state, the time for displaying the changing patterns in the first actuation port display section D1 and the time for displaying the changing patterns in the second actuation port display section D2 are both shortened. As a result, a ball enters the second actuation port 63a, resulting in a special win, and the lower variable winning device 65 is quickly opened. With the support of the lower variable winning device 65, the rate at which the number of balls decreases is slower in the second normal game state compared to the first normal game state.

In the second normal game state, as in the fourth normal game state, an upper limit is set for each of the number of games related to the first actuation port 62a and the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a. In this embodiment, the upper limit for the number of games related to the first actuation port 62a is "1", and the upper limit for the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a is "100". Here, about 1/60 of the game balls shot to the right route enter the right actuation port 62aR arranged in the right route together with the upper variable winning device 64. For this reason, in most cases where the game state transitions to the second normal game state via the first special game state, it is assumed that the reservation related to the first actuation port 62a is secured by the start of the second normal game state. Therefore, the transition condition is quickly established in the second normal game state, and the game state transitions to the third normal game state.

The third normal game state will continue until a jackpot result occurs and the game moves to the first special game state. Here, in the third normal game state, the time during which the image changes on the first actuation port display unit D1 is significantly extended compared to the first normal game state and the second normal game state, and the time during which the image changes on the second actuation port display unit D2 is further shortened compared to the second normal game state. As a result, when a game ball is launched to the right route, the game progresses with the game times related to the second actuation port 63a as the main. As described above, by shortening the time during which the image changes on the second actuation port display unit D2 is displayed, the span of support by the lower variable winning device 65 when a special winning result occurs is shortened, and the opportunities for such support are substantially increased. As a result, the opportunities for the game ball launched to the right route to enter the lower variable winning device 65 increase, and the number of balls held changes from a decrease to an increase. In other words, in the third normal game state, if a special jackpot occurs before the next jackpot, the game will transition to the second special game state, which will give you a chance to increase your ball count. If a normal jackpot occurs in the third normal game state, or if the number of consecutive jackpots with a special jackpot has reached the upper limit, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state via the first special game state.

In the fourth normal game state, as in the second normal game state, an upper limit is set for each of the number of games related to the first actuation port 62a and the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games related to the first actuation port 62a is "1", and the upper limit of the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a is "100". In the fourth normal game state, the display time of the changing pattern in the display section D1 for the first actuation port is the same as in the third normal game state, and the display time of the changing pattern in the display section D2 for the second actuation port is slightly extended compared to the third normal game state. In other words, in the fourth normal game state, as in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the number of games related to the second actuation port 63a. However, by lengthening the time for which the image changes and is displayed on the second operating port display section D2, the span of support by the lower variable winning device 65 when a special winning result is obtained is extended, and the opportunities for said support are effectively reduced. This reduces the opportunities for the game ball launched to the right route to enter the lower variable winning device 65, and the number of balls held changes from an increase to a decrease. However, due to the support from the lower variable winning device 65, the rate at which the number of balls held decreases is slower in the fourth normal game state compared to the first normal game state.

The first embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In this embodiment, in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, the fourth normal game state continues until the number of times of play related to the first actuation port 62a in the fourth normal game state reaches the upper limit (corresponding to the "reference number of times": 1 time), and when the upper limit is reached without a jackpot result, the state transitions to the first normal game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state. The number of times of play related to the second actuation port 63a progresses in parallel with the number of times of play related to the first actuation port 62a, but the number of times of play related to the second actuation port 63a can be executed varies depending on the frequency of balls entering, etc. In other words, the number of times of play in the fourth normal game state is uncertain until the fourth normal game state actually ends. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to execute as many times of play as possible in the fourth normal game state, which can contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

Here, in the fourth normal game state, multiple (three in this embodiment) variable display times for the image on the second operating port display section D2 are prepared, and the upper limit of the number of games that can be played is determined by which of these variable display times is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the fourth normal game state and prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In more detail, the variable display time of the second actuation port display section D2 that is set in the fourth normal game state is 60 sec, 120 sec, and 180 sec, but the difference between the variable display times is greater than the maximum value of the variable display time of the first actuation port display section D1 in the fourth normal game state (8 sec in this embodiment). Therefore, depending on the variable display time of the second actuation port display section D2, the upper limit of the number of games that can be actually executed differs (see FIG. 32(a)), and the diversification of the fourth normal game state is ideally realized.

In addition, in the fourth normal game state, multiple (two) variable display time tables are prepared for determining the variable display period of the image in the second actuation port display section D2, and the actual number of times the game is played related to the second actuation port 63a in the fourth normal game state changes depending on which variable display time table is referenced. This configuration makes the game more monotonous and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

In particular, by combining the variable display time tables (tables B1-B3) associated with the first actuation port 62a with the variable display time tables (tables A1-A2) associated with the second actuation port 63a, the total number of variable display time tables is prevented from becoming excessively large, while diversifying the fourth normal gaming state (see FIG. 32(a)).

These combinations of variable display time tables are associated with the types of jackpot results. Table combinations with a higher actual execution count as described above are more likely to be set when a normal jackpot result is obtained by a lottery based on a ball entering the second operating port 63a than when a normal jackpot result is obtained by a lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 62a. In other words, a normal jackpot result in the fourth normal gaming state is more likely to result in a higher actual execution count when the game subsequently transitions to the fourth normal gaming state than a normal jackpot result in the first normal gaming state. This is preferable in terms of strengthening the player's rescue function when normal jackpot results occur consecutively.

In this embodiment, if there are consecutive high probability jackpot results, the limiter function may be activated and the high probability mode may be forcibly terminated. In such a case, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state, but when the limiter function is activated and the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, the combination of the variable display time table described above becomes the most advantageous combination for the player. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's desire to play.

General gaming machines have a function that shortens the variable display time as the number of reserved information increases, but when this function is activated, there is a high possibility that the operation of launching game balls will be avoided so that the reserved information related to the first actuation port 62a is not stored as much as possible when the reserved information is about to transition to at least the fourth normal game state. This is a concern as it will hinder the smooth progress of the game and the improvement of the operating rate. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, when determining the variable display time of the image in the first actuation port display section D1 in the fourth normal game state, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by configuring the variable display time to be common regardless of the number of reserved information related to the first actuation port 62a.

In this embodiment, the lower actuation ball entry section 62L and the right actuation ball entry section 62R are provided as the first actuation ball entry section 62. Since there may be some variation in the presence or absence of balls in each of these first actuation ball entry sections 62, in some cases, it cannot be denied that the fourth normal game state may proceed with the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a remaining at "0" in the fourth normal game state. In other words, it cannot be denied that the game round related to the first actuation port 62a, which should normally determine the length of the fourth normal game state, may not proceed, and only the game round related to the second actuation port 63a may be repeated. If such an event occurs, it is concerned that the game may become excessively advantageous for the player, and the soundness of the game may decrease. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, an upper limit is also set for the number of times that the second actuation port 63a is played in the fourth normal play state, and if the number of times that the second actuation port 63a is played reaches its upper limit before the number of times that the first actuation port 62a is played reaches its upper limit, the state transitions to the first normal play state. By having such a backup function, the occurrence of the above-mentioned events is suppressed. Note that the upper limit for the number of times that the second actuation port 63a is played is higher than the upper limit for the number of times that the first actuation port 62a is played, and frequent intervention by the latter is avoided.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment described above, the variable display time table for the first operating port referenced in the fourth normal game state is set to one of variable display time tables B1 to B3 depending on the type of jackpot result, and when variable display time table B1 is set, the variable display time is "60 sec." When variable display time table B2 is set, the variable display time is "120 sec." When variable display time table B3 is set, the variable display time is "180 sec." However, it is sufficient if the variable display time is configured so that the order of the variable display time table B1 < variable display time table B2 < variable display time table B3 is the order.

For example, when variable display time table B1 is set, the percentage of the variable display time that is "60 sec" is 60%, the percentage of the variable display time that is "120 sec" is 20%, and the percentage of the variable display time that is "180 sec" is 20%; when variable display time table B2 is set, the percentage of the variable display time that is "60 sec" is 20%, the percentage of the variable display time that is "120 sec" is 60%, and the percentage of the variable display time that is "180 sec" is 20%; when variable display time table B3 is set, the percentage of the variable display time that is "60 sec" is 20%, the percentage of the variable display time that is "120 sec" is 20%, and the percentage of the variable display time that is "180 sec" is 60%.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth normal game state, the time period during which the image changes on the first actuation port display section D1 is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls related to the first actuation port 62a, but this is not limited to the above. The time period during which the image changes on the first actuation port display section D1 in the fourth normal game state may be varied depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, the more reserved balls related to the first actuation port 62a, the longer the time period during which the image changes on the first actuation port display section D1 may be, or the less reserved balls related to the first actuation port 62a, the longer the time period during which the image changes on the first actuation port display section D1 may be.

<Modification 3>
In the variable display time table A1 and the variable display time table A2 shown in the first embodiment, the difference in the variable display time for each reserved number is unified to "1 sec", but the difference in the variable display time after the reserved number may be different. For example, it is possible to make the difference in the variable display time larger as the reserved number increases.

It is also possible to limit the number of reserved items for which a difference in the variable display time occurs. In such a configuration, the difference in the variable display time may occur only when the number of reserved items is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, when the upper limit has been reached).

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the game state is transitioned to the first normal game state when the number of games played with the second actuation port 63a in the fourth normal game state reaches the upper limit (corresponding to the "second reference number of games"), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game state may be transitioned to the first normal game state when the sum of the number of games played with the first actuation port and the number of games played with the second actuation port reaches the upper limit.

<Modification 5>
In the above first embodiment, in the fourth normal game state, the remaining time is displayed based on the varying display time of the picture in the first actuation port display section D1. However, considering that the timing at which the varying display time table switches is the timing at which the final display ends in the first actuation port display section D1, the total remaining time may be displayed by adding the final display time to the remaining time.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the remaining time until the variable display of the image in the first actuation port display section D1 ends is indicated when the fourth normal game state is reached, but this is not limiting. It is also possible to indicate a portion of the time during which the fourth normal game state is maintained, i.e., a time shorter than the actual remaining time, and to make the remaining time unindicated (end the display of the remaining time) after the time has elapsed. In this case, for example, the remaining time on the timer counter may be displayed as "???" or the like.

<Modification 7>
In the fourth normal game state, when the variable display time in the second actuation port display section D2 is shortened, it is also possible to continue displaying the remaining time until the variable display of the picture in the second actuation port display section D2 ends, rather than ending the display of the remaining time by the timer counter when the variable display of the picture in the first actuation port display section D1 ends. In this case, for example, the remaining time may be clearly displayed, or the remaining time on the timer counter may be hidden by displaying "???" or the like.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the electric role 71 has only one type of support mode is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in other embodiments described later, a low-frequency support mode in which the support frequency by the electric role 71 is relatively low and a high-frequency support mode in which the support frequency is relatively high may be provided as the support mode. In such a configuration, the low-frequency support mode may be used for the first normal game state corresponding to the first variable display mode, and the high-frequency support mode may be used for the second normal game state corresponding to the second variable display mode, the third normal game state corresponding to the third variable display mode, and the fourth normal game state corresponding to the fourth variable display mode.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when a 6R or 16R jackpot result is obtained, the variable display time table corresponding to the second operating port display unit is table A2, and the variable display time table corresponding to the first operating port display unit is table B3, but this is not limited to the above. As with the normal jackpot result, it is also possible to configure the table combination to be different depending on the type of jackpot result. With this configuration, it is possible to create a difference in the frequency of game times related to the relatively disadvantageous first operating port, and it is possible to change the rate at which the jackpot result is actually a jackpot result. In particular, by providing table A3, which has an even shorter variable display time than table A2, as table A group, it is possible to further diversify the progress speed of game times related to the second operating port. When table A2 and table A3 are compared, the frequency of transition to the second special game state due to a special winning result also changes, so that the increase/decrease ratio of the player's balls can also be diversified. For example, in the second normal gaming state, it is possible to configure the game so that the number of balls held by the player may decrease slightly, remain approximately constant, or increase slightly.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times of play associated with the first actuation port 63a in the fourth normal game state (corresponding to the "reference number of times") is set to one, but this is not limited thereto. The upper limit may be set to two or more. In addition, the upper limit of the number of times of play associated with the first actuation port 63a when the second normal game state is shifted to the third normal game state is made to coincide with the upper limit of the number of times of play associated with the first actuation port 63a when the fourth normal game state is shifted to the first normal game state, and the variable display time tables associated with the first actuation port 63a are made separate for the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, and a difference is provided in the variable display time of the picture in the first actuation port display section D1, thereby providing a clear difference between the period during which the second normal game state is maintained and the period during which the fourth normal game state is maintained, but this is not limited thereto. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display time table of the first operating port display unit D1 referenced in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state is made common, and the above upper limit in the second normal game state and the above upper limit in the fourth normal game state are made different, thereby making the period during which the second normal game state is maintained different from the period during which the fourth normal game state is maintained.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, the variable display time table corresponding to the first actuation port display section D1 referred to in the fourth normal game state is configured so that the variable display time is set to be the same regardless of the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a, but this is not limited to this, and a difference may be set in the variable display time set according to the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a. For example, the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a increases, or the variable display time may be set to be longer as the reserved number related to the first actuation port 62a increases. In addition, when the former of these two deformation patterns is used, it is preferable to make the difference in the variable display time for each reserved number smaller than the minimum value of the variable display time of the picture in the second actuation port display section D2, so that a substantial difference in the number of times of execution of the game is unlikely to occur even if the reserved number is different.

<Modification 12>
In the above first embodiment, three variable display time tables for the first operating port and two variable display time tables for the second operating port are used to classify the fourth normal game state into six patterns, but the number of variable display time tables for the first operating port and the number of variable display time tables for the second operating port are arbitrary.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the game times related to the two operating ports are executed in parallel, but the specific configuration for realizing diversification of the game using this function is different from that of the first embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the configuration of the game board 60 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 35. Figure 35 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game Board 60)
A general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. are disposed in each opening formed in the game board 60. When a ball enters an entry section such as the general winning opening 61, the operational winning sections 62, 63, or the variable winning devices 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player based on the detection result.

At the bottom of the game board 60, an outlet 68 is provided, and game balls that do not enter the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "entering" means that the game ball passes through a specific opening position, and includes not only a situation in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position, but also a situation in which the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position.

The game board 60 is also provided with numerous game pins 69 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These game pins 69, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the probability of winning the general winning hole 61 and the like described above is appropriate.

The variable display unit 67 is disposed in the center of the game board 60, and the above-mentioned operating ball entry sections 62, 63, etc. are disposed around the variable display unit 67. The operating ball entry sections 62, 63 are broadly divided into a lower operating ball entry section 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a right operating ball entry section 63 disposed to the right of the variable display unit 67. In particular, the right operating ball entry section 63 is provided with an electric device 71 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 71 has a shutter and a solenoid-type drive section that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter can be changed by the drive section to switch between an open state (accepting state) in which a ball can be entered into the right operating ball entry section 63 (right operating port 63a) and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the ball cannot be entered. In addition, the electric device 71 attached to the right-side ball entry section 63 may be switchable between a state in which it is easy to enter the right opening 63a and a state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 66 is disposed in the play area PE (the right route described later in detail) upstream of the right-side actuated ball entry section 63, more specifically, to the side (right) of the variable display unit 67. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass in the vertical direction, and game balls that enter the through gate 66 flow downstream in the play area PE without being ejected from the play area PE. If a lottery is won, triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 66, the electric device 71 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

The upper variable winning device 64 is disposed on the right route between the through gate 66 and the right-side operating ball entry section 63, and the lower variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right route downstream of the right-side operating ball entry section 63. The upper variable winning device 64 and the lower variable winning device 65 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment, so a detailed description will be omitted.

The above-mentioned right-side operating ball entry section 63, variable entry devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from entering the right-side operating ball entry section 63, variable entry devices 64, 65, and through gate 66. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entry section 62 is arranged on the left route, and game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from entering the lower operating ball entry section 62. By selecting the destination of the game ball (path of game ball flow) from the right route or the left route depending on the game situation, the player can play advantageously.

Here, we will provide additional information about the right-side actuation ball entry section 63 with reference to Figure 36. Figure 36 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the right-side actuation ball entry section 63.

The right-side ball entry section 63 is formed with a guide passage 63c that guides game balls that have flowed into the right-side opening 63a to a recovery passage provided on the rear side of the game board 60. The guide passage 63c branches into a first branch passage 63d and a second branch passage 63e midway. The guide passage 63c can be seen from the front of the game machine, making it possible to visually confirm the branch destinations of game balls passing through the guide passage 63c.

At the branching position in the guide passage 63c, a distribution means 63g is provided that distributes game balls that reach the branching position to the first branching passage 63d and the second branching passage 63e. The distribution means 63g is switchable between a first guide state in which the game ball that reaches the branching position is guided to the first branching passage 63d and a second guide state in which the game ball is guided to the second branching passage 63e. This distribution means 63g is configured to switch from one guide state to the other guide state based on the game ball that has been guided. Therefore, the game balls that flow into the right operating port 63a are sequentially (alternately) distributed to the first branching passage 63d/second branching passage 63e.

The lower actuation port 62a is connected to the first branch passage 63d via the communication passage 63f, and game balls that flow into the lower actuation port 62a flow directly into the first branch passage 63d. In other words, game balls that flow into the right actuation port 63a flow into both branch passages 63d and 63e, while game balls that flow into the lower actuation port 62a flow only into the first branch passage 63d.

A detection sensor 391b for detecting game balls is disposed in the first branch passage 63d, and a detection sensor 391c for detecting game balls is disposed in the second branch passage 63e at a position downstream of the communicating portion of the connecting passage 63f. These detection sensors 391b, 391c are connected to the main control device, and the main control device determines whether or not a ball has entered the ball entry sections 63d, 63e based on the detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 391b, 391c. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the first branch passage 63d will be referred to as the "first ball entry section 63d" and the second branch passage 63e will be referred to as the "second ball entry section 63e".

The basic configuration of the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 and the main display unit 81 arranged outside the game area PE is the same as in the first embodiment. In the following description, the display unit for the first ball entry section 63d in the main display unit 81 is referred to as the "first ball entry section display unit D1", the reserved number display unit for the first ball entry section 63d is referred to as the "reserved number display unit S1 for the first ball entry section", the display unit for the second ball entry section 63e is referred to as the "second ball entry section display unit D2", and the reserved number display unit for the second ball entry section 63e is referred to as the "reserved number display unit S2 for the second ball entry section". The basic configuration of each of these display units D1, D2, S1, and S2 is the same as that of each of the display units D1, D2, S1, and S2 in the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, referring to Figures 37 and 38, the hit/miss table for the first ball entry section 63d and the hit/miss table for the second ball entry section 63e will be explained.

(Win/lose table for the first ball entry section)
In the hit/lose table for the first ball entry section 63d, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in Fig. 37(a), the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are "7" and "507." In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599,""7" and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning is 2/600.

In addition, in the hit/miss table for the first ball entry section 63d, "5", "105", "205", and "405" correspond to the first special hit result, and the probability of the first special hit result being 4/600. "305" and "505" correspond to the second special hit result, and the probability of the second special hit result being 2/600. All random number values other than the jackpot result and the special hit result correspond to a losing lottery result.

Details will be given later, but the first special hit result and the second special hit result are common in that they trigger a transition to the second special game state, but they differ in that the first special hit result does not trigger a change in the variable display time table that specifies the variable display time of the images in the first ball entry section display section D1 and the second ball entry section display section D2, whereas the second special hit result does trigger a change in the variable display time table.

In the hit/miss table for the first ball entry section 63d, which is referenced when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of a jackpot is 6/600.

Also, like the win/lose table for the low probability mode, "5", "105", "205", and "405" correspond to the first special win result, and the probability of this occurring is 4/600. "305" and "505" correspond to the second special win result, and the probability of this occurring is 2/600. All random number values other than those that result in a jackpot or special win correspond to a losing lottery result.

(Win/lose table for the second ball entry section 63e)
In the hit/miss table for the second ball entry section 63e, which is referenced when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, there are two random number values corresponding to the jackpot result, "7" and "507", as shown in Fig. 38(a). That is, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0" to "599", "7" and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of a jackpot is 2/600. In the hit/miss table for the second ball entry section 63e corresponding to the low probability mode, no random number values corresponding to a special hit result are provided, and the random number values other than the jackpot result correspond to a miss lottery result.

In the hit/miss table for the second ball entry section 63e, which is referenced when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 38(b), there are six random number values corresponding to the jackpot result: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning is 6/600. The hit/miss table for the second ball entry section 63e corresponding to the high probability mode does not have random number values corresponding to the special hit result, and the random number values other than the jackpot result correspond to the lottery result of not winning.

In this embodiment, the jackpot results include a 6R normal jackpot result, a 16R normal jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result, and a 16R special jackpot result. Next, the allocation table will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the allocation table for the first ball entry section, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "99", a total of 50 values from "0" to "49" correspond to a 6R normal jackpot result, and a total of 50 values from "50" to "99" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result. In other words, the probability of a special jackpot result is 50%.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), in the allocation table for the second ball entry section, of the winning type counter C2 values from "0" to "99", a total of 35 values from "0" to "34" correspond to a 16R normal jackpot result, and a total of 65 values from "35" to "99" correspond to a 16R special jackpot result. In other words, the probability of a special jackpot result is 65%, which is a higher probability of a special jackpot result than the allocation based on balls entering the first ball entry section 63d.

In this embodiment, multiple types of support modes with different support modes are provided as support by the electric device 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entrance section 63. In detail, the support modes include a low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency with which the electric device 71 is in an open state per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in a similar manner into the game area PE.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 40(a), in the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the image on the through gate display section DS (normal image) is 10 to 30 seconds, and the fixed display time of the image is 0.5 seconds. The probability of winning (support win) in the support lottery using the open random number counter C4 is 50/100. When a support win occurs, the electric role 71 opens for 0.1 seconds.

In contrast, in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the image on the through gate display section DS (normal image) is 0.2 to 1 sec, and the fixed display time of the image is 0.5 sec. The probability of winning (support win) in the support lottery using the open random number counter C4 is 90/100. When a support win occurs, the electric role 71 is in the open state for 2 sec.

In the high frequency support mode, the probability of a winning ball entering the right side actuation ball entry section 63 (right actuation port 63a) is higher than in the low frequency support mode. When a winning ball enters the right actuation port 63a, a predetermined number of game balls (one in this embodiment) are paid out. This allows the player to play while minimizing the consumption (investment) of their balls in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), the 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which, after the first special game state ends, the win/lose selection mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode until the number of times played after the transition reaches a reference number (specifically, 100 times), and the 6R special jackpot result and the 16R special jackpot result are jackpot results in which, after the first special game state ends, the win/lose selection mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode until the next jackpot result is reached.

In this embodiment, the first to third variable display modes are provided as variable display modes that determine the variable display time of the image on the first ball entry section display section D1 of the main display unit 81 and the variable display time of the image on the second ball entry section display section D2.

Details will be described later, but the first variable display mode is set so that the time for which the image changes in the first ball entry section display unit D1 is shorter than the time for which the image changes in the second ball entry section display unit D2. The second variable display mode, like the first variable display mode, is set so that the time for which the image changes in the first ball entry section display unit D1 is shorter than the time for which the image changes in the second ball entry section display unit D2, but the difference is smaller than in the first variable display mode, to differentiate it from the first variable display mode. The third variable display mode is set so that the time for which the image changes in the first ball entry section display unit D1 is longer than the time for which the image changes in the second ball entry section display unit D2.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), the 6R normal jackpot result, 16R normal jackpot result, 6R special jackpot result, and 16R special jackpot result are all jackpot results for which the second variable display mode is set as the variable display mode after the first special game state ends. In other words, regardless of which jackpot result is obtained, after returning to the normal game state via the first special game state, the game will progress mainly with the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d.

In the following explanation, the normal game state in which the win/loss selection mode is the low probability mode, the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and the change display mode is the first change display mode is referred to as the "first normal game state", the normal game state in which the win/loss selection mode is the high probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the change display mode is the second change display mode is referred to as the "second normal game state", the normal game state in which the win/loss selection mode is the high probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the change display mode is the third change display mode is referred to as the "third normal game state", the normal game state in which the win/loss selection mode is the low probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the change display mode is the second change display mode is referred to as the "fourth normal game state", and the normal game state in which the win/loss selection mode is the low probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the change display mode is the third change display mode is referred to as the "fifth normal game state".

Figure 41 (a) shows the display mode of the display screen 75a in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. In these normal game states, a blue effect is displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a, and the word "CHANCE" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 75a as a message suggesting that the state is favorable to the player. In the second normal game state, a background image imitating "underwater" is displayed on the display screen 75a, and in the fourth normal game state, a background image imitating "beach" is displayed on the display screen 75a, thereby distinguishing between the two normal game states. Although not shown, a counter indicating the number of remaining games is displayed in the corner of the display screen 75a, and the number of remaining games for which the second normal game state will continue or the number of remaining games for which the fourth normal game state will continue is displayed.

Figure 41 (b) shows the display state of the display screen 75a in the third normal game state and the fifth normal game state. In these normal game states, a red effect is displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a, and the words "BIG CHANCE" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen 75a as a message suggesting that the player is in an even more advantageous state. In the third normal game state, a background image that imitates "underwater" is displayed on the display screen 75a, and in the fifth normal game state, a background image that imitates "beach" is displayed on the display screen 75a, thereby distinguishing between the two normal game states. Although not shown, in the third normal game state, a counter indicating the number of remaining games is displayed in a corner of the display screen 75a.

Next, referring to the flowcharts in Figures 42 and 43, the control process for the first ball entry section and the control process for the second ball entry section executed as part of the game round control process by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 in this embodiment will be described. The control process for the first ball entry section is a partial modification of the control process for the first operating port in the first embodiment, and the control process for the second ball entry section is a partial modification of the control process for the second operating port in the first embodiment. The following explanation will focus on the changes from the first embodiment, and some of the common parts will be omitted.

(Control process for first ball entry section)
As shown in FIG. 42, in the control process for the first ball entry section, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a game related to the first ball entry section 63d is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display section D1 for the first ball entry section of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game round flag (first game round flag) for the first ball entry section is stored (stored) in a game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The first game round flag is stored when the variable display of the pattern is started in the display section D1 for the first ball entry section, and is erased when the pattern is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S2001 and the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is judged whether a game is in progress for the second ball entry section 63e. Specifically, it is judged whether the display section D2 for the second ball entry section of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game is being played. This judgment is made by judging whether a game turn flag (second game turn flag) for the second ball entry section is stored (stored) in the game turn flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game turn flag for the second ball entry section is stored when a variable display is started in the display section D2 for the second ball entry section, and is erased when a picture or the like corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the second ball entry section 63e. If a positive judgment is made in step S2003, the control process for the first ball entry section is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2003 or step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced to judge whether the reserved memory number CRN for the first ball entry section, which is the number of reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the number of reserved information related to the first ball entry section 63d), is "0" or not. If the reserved memory number CRN for the first ball entry section is "0", the game number control process ends as is. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the first ball entry section is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, data setting process is performed.

In the data setting process for the first ball entry section 63d, first, the reserved memory number CRN for the first ball entry section is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first ball entry section is moved to the first execution area AE1, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first ball entry section. Note that although the names are different, the reserved area Ra for the first ball entry section and the first execution area AE1 are the same as the reserved area Ra for the first operating port and the first execution area AE1 (see Figure 8) shown in the first embodiment.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first through fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first ball entry section is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the reserved number display unit S1 for the first ball entry section are turned off in order from the bottom, in the opposite order to the light-on process that is executed when reserved information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S2006, the change start process for the first ball entry section (change start process for the first ball entry section) is executed to start the changing display of the image in the display section D1 for the first ball entry section and the changing display of the pattern in the pattern display device 75, and then this game round control process is terminated. The change start process for the first ball entry section is explained below, but the basic flow of this process is the same as the change start process for the first operating port (Figure 16) shown in the first embodiment above.

(First ball entry section fluctuation start processing)
In the first ball entry section variation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed. In the win/loss determination process, by referring to the win/loss table for the first ball entry section, it is determined whether the information for win/loss determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information obtained from the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the determination result is a jackpot result, a type determination process is executed.

In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information obtained from the winning type counter C2, is grasped. Also, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is determined whether the above-mentioned grasped type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 6R variable jackpot result, or the information group corresponding to the 16R variable jackpot result. After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (first ball entry section display section D1) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is identified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in the RAM 604. Also, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a 6R normal jackpot result, a 16R normal jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result, or a 16R special jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the result is a 6R normal jackpot result, a 6R normal flag is stored; if the result is a 16R normal jackpot result, a 16R normal flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot flag is stored; if the result is a 16R special jackpot result, a 16R special jackpot flag is stored; if the result is a 16R special jackpot result, a 16R special jackpot flag is stored.

After the above setting process is executed, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e is being played. If the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e is being played, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e (changing display of the pattern) is being played, the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e (changing display of the pattern) will be forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d corresponds to a jackpot result and the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e can be executed beyond the timing of the confirmation display in that game round, the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e is shortened and the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e will end together with the end of the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d. In such a case, the pattern stopped and displayed in the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e corresponds to a miss result.

If the result of the above-mentioned win/loss judgment is a loss result, a stop result setting process for a loss result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (first winning section display section D1) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for loss results pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604.

After each stop result setting process is executed, a process for setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed. Specifically, a value corresponding to the variable display time is set in a variable display time counter for the first ball entry section (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display time counter) provided in the various counter area 634 of AM604. The first variable display time counter is updated (decremented) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After executing the process of setting the variable display time, a variable start command and a type command are set. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach does not occur is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach occurs. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the control device on the sub side, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After the setting process of the change start command and the type command is executed, the change display of the first ball entry section display section D1 in the main display unit 81 is started, and the above-mentioned first game round flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a game round (e.g., change display) related to the first ball entry section 63d is currently being executed. Note that in this embodiment, the change display of the pattern in the first ball entry section display section D1 and the pattern in the pattern display device 75 is configured to start in accordance with the lottery, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the change display of the pattern and the pattern to start before the lottery.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 42, if a positive judgment is made in step S2001, that is, if it is judged that the game is being played in the first ball entry section 63d, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, it is judged whether it is the timing to stop and display the image corresponding to the big win result in the game play in the second ball entry section 63e. If a negative judgment is made in step S2007, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is judged whether it is the timing when the set variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is judged whether the value of the first variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S2008, the variable display process is executed in step S2009, and then the control process for the first ball entry section is terminated. In the variable display process in step S2009, the LEDs constituting the display section D1 for the first ball entry section are turned on and off, thereby displaying the image in a variable manner.

Returning to the explanation of step S2008, if the value of the first variable display time counter is "0", a positive judgment is made in step S2008 and the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not a fixed display is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag (first fixed display flag) for the first ball entry section is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative judgment is made in step S2010, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, a variable end process for the first ball entry section is executed.

In the first ball entry section variation end process, a variation end command for the first ball entry section (called the first variation end command) is first set. This first variation end command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 in normal processing. The notification/performance control device 143 executes processing to end the performance for that game round based on receiving the first variation end command. The first variation end command is also sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/performance control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the first variation end command and displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game results of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 (final stop display). Note that the first variation end command may not be sent, and the notification/performance control device 143 or the display control device 710 may end the performance for the game round independently.

After the first variable end command is set, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed on the display unit D1 for the first ball entry section in a previously determined manner. For example, if the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, a confirmed display of the image corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value equivalent to the confirmed display time (1 sec) is set in the confirmed display time counter for the first ball entry section (first confirmed display time counter) provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. The first confirmed display time counter is updated (decremented) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After setting the confirmed display time, the first confirmed display flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This first confirmed display flag is cleared when the value of the first confirmed display time counter becomes "0".

After executing the variation end process in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, it is determined whether the current game state is the second normal game state, the fourth normal game state, or the fifth normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the process proceeds to step S2013. If a positive determination is made in step S2012, the process proceeds to step S2013.

In this embodiment, a play count counter is provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 to keep track of the number of times a game involving the first ball entry section 63d has been played in the second normal game state, the fourth normal game state, and the fifth normal game state. In the play count counter update process of step S2013, the value of this play count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the play count counter is decremented by "1."

In the following step S2014, it is determined whether the number of plays counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2014, the control process for the first ball entry section is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2014, the process proceeds to step S2015, where a variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game round for which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends, the variable display time table is switched. Specifically, if the variable display time table that had been referred to until then was the second variable display time table, it is switched to the third variable display time table, and if the variable display time table that had been referred to until then was the fourth variable display time table or the fifth variable display time table, it is switched to the first variable display time table.

In the following step S2016, it is determined whether the current game state is the fourth normal game state or the fifth normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2016, the control process for the first ball entry section is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2016, the process proceeds to step S2017, where the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 is erased, and the control process for the first ball entry section is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2010, if a positive judgment is made in step S2010, i.e., if the first confirmation display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S2018. In step S2018, it is judged whether the value of the first confirmation display time counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S2018, the control process for the first ball entry section is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2018, a flag erasing process is executed in step S2019, and then the control process for the first operating port is terminated. In this flag erasing process, the first game round flag and the first confirmation display flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 are erased.

Returning to the explanation of step S2007, if a positive judgment is made in step S2007, that is, if it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e, the process proceeds to step S2020. In step S2020, a process of rewriting the stopped image is executed. In the process of rewriting the stopped result, the stopped image determined in the process of starting the variation for the first ball entry section is rewritten to an image corresponding to a miss result. Specifically, if the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d results in a miss result, the stopped image is stopped, whereas if the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d results in a win result, the stopped image is rewritten to an image corresponding to a miss result. In addition, the first variation display time counter is reset.

After executing the processing of step S2020, various processes related to the end of the game round from step S2010 onwards are executed, and then the control processing for the first ball entry section is terminated.

Next, the control process for the second ball entry section will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 43.

(Control process for second ball entry section)
In the control process for the second ball entry section, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the second ball entry section 63e is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display section D2 for the second ball entry section of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game round of play is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not the above-mentioned second game round flag is stored (stored) in the game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The second game round flag is stored when the variable display of the pattern is started in the display section D2 for the second ball entry section, and is erased when the pattern is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game round is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S2101 and the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, it is judged whether a game round related to the first ball entry section 63d is in progress. Specifically, it is judged whether the display section D1 for the first ball entry section of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game round is being played. This judgment is made by judging whether the above-mentioned first game round flag is stored (stored) in the game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is judged whether it is the timing to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a jackpot result or a pattern corresponding to a special win result in the first ball entry section 63d. If a positive judgment is made in step S2103, the control process for the second ball entry section is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103 or step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced to judge whether the reserved memory number CRN for the second ball entry section, which is the number of reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the number of reserved information related to the second ball entry section 63e), is "0" or not. If the reserved memory number CRN for the second ball entry section is "0", the game number control process ends as is. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the second ball entry section is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2105 and data setting process is performed.

In the data setting process for the second ball entry section 63e, first, the reserved memory number CRN for the second ball entry section is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second ball entry section is moved to the second execution area AE2, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second ball entry section. Note that although the names are different, the reserved area Rb for the second ball entry section and the second execution area AE2 are the same as the reserved area Rb for the second operating port and the second execution area AE2 (see Figure 8) shown in the first embodiment.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first through fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second ball entry section is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the reserved number display unit S2 for the second ball entry section are turned off in order from the bottom, in the opposite order to the light-on process that is executed when reserved information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S2106, the change start process for the second ball entry section (change start process for the second ball entry section) is executed to start the changing display of the image in the display section D2 for the second ball entry section and the changing display of the pattern in the pattern display device 75, and then this game round control process is terminated. The change start process for the second ball entry section is explained below, but the basic flow of this process is the same as the change start process for the second operating port (Figure 18) shown in the first embodiment above.

(Variation start process for second ball entry section)
In the second ball entry section variation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed. In the win/loss determination process, by referring to the win/loss table for the second ball entry section, it is determined whether the information for win/loss determination among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the result of this determination is a jackpot result, a type determination process is executed.

In the type determination process, the type determination information among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the winning type counter C2 and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result, or the information group corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result. After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the second ball entry display section D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D) in the relevant game round is identified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in the RAM 604. This jackpot result stop result table has a plurality of images that are displayed in a stopped state on the second ball entry display D2, and information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Also, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a 6R normal jackpot result, a 16R normal jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result, or a 16R special jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the result is a 6R normal jackpot result, a 6R normal flag is stored, if the result is a 16R normal jackpot result, if the result is a 6R special jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot flag is stored, and if the result is a 16R special jackpot result, a 16R special jackpot flag is stored.

After the above setting process is executed, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d is being executed. If it is determined that the game round is being executed, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d (changing display of the pattern) is being executed, the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d (changing display of the pattern) will be forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e corresponds to a jackpot result and the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d (corresponding to a miss result) may be executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in the game round, the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d is shortened and the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d will also end together with the end of the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e. In such a case, the pattern displayed in the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d corresponds to the miss result.

Returning to the explanation of the win/lose lottery described above, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a special win result, a stop result setting process for the special win result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally displayed on the main display section D (display section D2 for the second ball entry section) of the main display unit 81 in that game round is identified from a stop result table for the special win result pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. If the game result this time is a special win result, a special win flag is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604.

If the result of the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery is a losing result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (display section D2 for the second winning section) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for a losing result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. After executing the stop result setting process, a setting process for the fluctuation display time (display duration) is executed.

After the variable display time setting process is executed, the variable start command and the type command are set. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrence. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on the occurrence of a reach, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the occurrence of a reach from the information on the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating the occurrence of a reach. Note that the variable start command may include information directly indicating the occurrence of a reach. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the variable display of the pattern in the second operating port display unit D2 and the pattern in the pattern display device 75 is configured to start in accordance with the lottery, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the variable display of the pattern and the pattern to start before the lottery.

After executing the setting process of the fluctuation start command and the type command, the fluctuation display of the second operating port display section D2 in the main display unit 81 is started, and the above-mentioned second game round flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and then the fluctuation start process for the second ball entry section is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 43, if a positive determination is made in step S2101, i.e., if it is determined that a game round related to the second actuation port 63a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the first actuation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

In step S2108, it is determined whether it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the special winning result in the game round related to the first actuation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the second variable display time counter provided in the various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2109, a variable display process is executed in step S2110, and then the second operating port control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S2110, the image is displayed variably by performing a process of turning on/off each LED that constitutes the second operating port display section D2.

Returning to the explanation of step S2109, if the value of the second variable display time counter is "0", a positive judgment is made in step S2109 and the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not a fixed display is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag (second fixed display flag) for the second operating port is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604. If a negative judgment is made in step S2111, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, a variable end process for the second operating port is executed.

In the second operation port fluctuation end process, a fluctuation end command (second fluctuation end command) for the second operation port is first set. This second fluctuation end command is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). Based on receiving the second fluctuation end command, the notification/presentation control device 143 executes a process to end the presentation for that game round. In addition, the second fluctuation end command is sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/presentation control device 143, and by receiving the second fluctuation end command, the display control device 710 displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 as a final display (final stop display). Note that the second fluctuation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 143 or the display control device 710 may independently end the presentation for the game round.

After the second variation end command is set, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed on the second operating port display section D2 in a previously determined manner. For example, if the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, a confirmed display of the image corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value equivalent to the confirmed display time (1 sec) is set in a confirmed display time counter for the second operating port (second confirmed display time counter) provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. The second confirmed display time counter is updated (decremented) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After the confirmed display time is set, the second confirmed display flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This second confirmed display flag is cleared when the value of the second confirmed display time counter becomes "0".

After executing the variation end processing in step S2112, the process proceeds to step S2113. In step S2113, it is determined whether the current game state is the second normal game state, the fourth normal game state, or the fifth normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2114. If a positive determination is made in step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2114.

In this embodiment, a play count counter is provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 to keep track of the number of times a game involving the first ball entry section 63d has been played in the second normal game state, the fourth normal game state, and the fifth normal game state. In the play count counter update process of step S2114, the value of this play count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the play count counter is decremented by "1."

In the following step S2115, it is determined whether the number of plays counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S22115, the control process for the second ball entry section is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2115, the process proceeds to step S2116, where a variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game round for which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends, the variable display time table is switched. Specifically, if the variable display time table that had been referred to until then was the second variable display time table, it is switched to the third variable display time table, and if the variable display time table that had been referred to until then was the fourth variable display time table or the fifth variable display time table, it is switched to the first variable display time table.

In the following step S2117, it is determined whether the current game state is the fourth normal game state or the fifth normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2117, the control process for the second ball entry section is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2117, the process proceeds to step S2118, where the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 is erased, and the control process for the second ball entry section is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2111, if a positive judgment is made in step S2111, i.e., if the second confirmation display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, it is judged whether the value of the second confirmation display time counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S2119, the control process for the second ball entry section is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2119, a flag erasure process is executed in step S2120, and then the control process for the second ball entry section is terminated. In this flag erasure process, the second game round flag and the second confirmation display flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 are erased.

Returning to the explanation of step S2107, if a positive judgment is made in step S2107, that is, if it is time to stop and display the image corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d, the process proceeds to step S2121. In step S2121, a process of rewriting the stopped image is executed. In the process of rewriting the stopped result, the stopped image determined in the process of starting the variation for the second ball entry section is rewritten to an image corresponding to a miss result. Specifically, if the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e results in a miss result, the stopped image is stopped, whereas if the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e results in a win result, the stopped image is rewritten to an image corresponding to a miss result. In addition, the second variation display time counter is reset.

After executing the processing of step S2121, various processes related to the end of the game round from step S2111 onwards are executed, and then the control processing for the second ball entry section is terminated.

Next, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends in this embodiment, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 44.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the first winning mode. If it corresponds to the first winning mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S2301 and the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the advantageous ball entry portion 314 during the current special game state.

In this embodiment, a continuous probability jackpot counter that stores the number of consecutive probability jackpots is provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. The continuous probability jackpot counter is updated (incremented) each time a continuous probability jackpot result occurs and a ball lands in the favorable ball entry section 314 described above, and is reset when a normal jackpot result occurs or when the number of consecutive probability jackpot results reaches the upper limit (7 times). In this transition process, this continuous probability jackpot counter is referenced to determine whether the number of consecutive probability jackpot results has reached the upper limit (7 times).

Specifically, if a positive judgment is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303, where the continuous probability bonus counter is updated. More specifically, the value of the continuous probability bonus counter is incremented by "1". After the continuous bonus counter update process is performed, the process proceeds to step S2304, where it is determined whether the value of the continuous probability bonus counter has reached its upper limit. If the continuous bonus has not reached its upper limit, a negative judgment is made in step S2304, and the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the special game state and the continuous number of the continuous probability bonus jackpots has not reached its upper limit, the process transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode after the special game state ends.

In the next step S2306, a variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Details will be described later, but by setting this variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode, the variable display time of the image in the first operating port display section D1 is extended and the variable display time of the image in the second operating port display section D2 is shortened. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set, other variable display time table reference flags are erased.

Returning to the explanation of step S2302, if no ball has entered the advantageous ball entry section 314 in the current special game state, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the continuous chance count counter is reset (set to 0). Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S2304, the continuous count counter is reset (set to 0) in step S2307. Then, in step S2306, a variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set, other variable display time table reference flags are erased.

After the second normal play state variable display time table reference flag is set in step S2306, the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the above-mentioned play count counter setting process is performed. In this embodiment, the play count counter is shared by the first actuation port 62a and the second actuation port 63a, and in this setting process, a predetermined number (specifically, "100") is set in the play count counter.

After executing the setting process of step S2308, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, the various flags for the special game state (e.g., the prize mode flag, the big win flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the transition process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2301, if a negative judgment is made in step S2301, i.e., if the current special game state corresponds to the second winning mode, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the trigger for transition to the current special game state is the second special winning result. If a negative judgment is made in step S2310, the transition process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2311.

In step S2311, a variable display time table reference flag for the third variable display mode is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Details will be described later, but by setting this variable display time table reference flag for the third variable display mode, the variable display time of the image in the first operating port display section D1 is extended and the variable display time of the image in the second operating port display section D2 is shortened. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the third variable display mode is set, other variable display time table reference flags are erased.

After that, in step S2309, the various flags for the special game state (e.g., the prize mode flag, the big win flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and this transition process is terminated.

Next, we will provide additional information about the relationship between each variable display mode and the variable display time that is set, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 45.

(1) First variable display mode The first variable display mode is a variable display mode corresponding to the first normal game state.

When the game round related to the first winning section 63d corresponds to a miss result (complete miss result) that does not support the reach display, if the number of stored pending information (pending information related to the first winning section 63d) is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12 sec", "13 sec", or "14 sec", if the number of stored pending information is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7 sec", "8 sec", or "9 sec", and if the number of stored pending information is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to one of "3 sec", "4 sec", or "5 sec".

If the game round related to the first winning section 63d corresponds to a miss result, a special win result, or a big win result corresponding to the reach display, the variable display time is set to "15 sec" to "20 sec."

Regarding the variable display time of the display section D2 for the second ball entry section in the first variable display mode, regardless of whether the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e is a miss result not compatible with reach display, a miss result compatible with reach display, a special win result, or a big win result, the variable display time is set to "600 sec" regardless of the number of pending information stored (pending information related to the second ball entry section 63e).

In addition, in the first variable display mode, the fixed display time of the pattern on each display section D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are specified to be "1 sec."

(Second variable display mode)
The second variable display mode is a variable display mode which is entered after the first special game state ends when a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is obtained, and corresponds to the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state.

In the second variable display mode, the variable display time for the first ball entry section 63d and the variable display time for the second ball entry section 63e are both shorter than in the first variable display mode, but the relationship in which the variable display time for the first ball entry section 63d is shorter than the variable display time for the second ball entry section 63e is maintained.

When the game round related to the first winning section 63d corresponds to a miss result (complete miss result) that does not support the reach display, if the number of stored pending information (pending information related to the first winning section 63d) is "0", the variable display time is set to either "6 sec", "7 sec", or "8 sec", if the number of stored pending information is "1", the variable display time is set to either "4 sec" or "5 sec", if the number of stored pending information is "2", the variable display time is set to either "1 sec" or "2 sec", and if the number of stored pending information is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec".

If the game round related to the first winning section 63d corresponds to a miss result, a special win result, or a big win result corresponding to the reach display, the variable display time is set to "15 sec" to "20 sec."

Regarding the variable display time of the display section D2 for the second ball entry section in the second variable display mode, regardless of whether the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e is a miss result not compatible with reach display, a miss result compatible with reach display, a special win result, or a big win result, the variable display time is set to "60 sec" regardless of the number of pending information stored (pending information related to the second ball entry section 63e).

In addition, in the second variable display mode, the fixed display time of the pattern on each display section D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are specified to be "1 sec."

(Third variable display mode)
The third variable display mode is a variable display mode corresponding to the third normal game state and the fifth normal game state which are entered when the number of games played in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state reaches a predetermined number.

In the third variable display mode, the variable display time for the first ball entry section 63d is longer than in the first and second variable display modes, and the variable display time for the second ball entry section 63e is shorter. As a result, the relationship between the variable display time for the first ball entry section 63d and the variable display time for the second ball entry section 63e is reversed, and the variable display time for the second ball entry section 63e is shorter than the variable display time for the first ball entry section 63d.

Regarding the variable display time of the display section D1 for the first ball entry section in the third variable display mode, regardless of whether the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d is a miss result not compatible with reach display, a miss result compatible with reach display, a special win result, or a big win result, the variable display time is set to "60 seconds" regardless of the number of pending information stored (pending information related to the first ball entry section 63d).

When the game round related to the second winning section 63e corresponds to a miss result (complete miss result) that does not support the reach display, if the number of stored pending information (pending information related to the second winning section 63e) is "0", the variable display time is set to either "6 sec", "7 sec", or "8 sec", if the number of stored pending information is "1", the variable display time is set to either "4 sec" or "5 sec", if the number of stored pending information is "2", the variable display time is set to either "1 sec" or "2 sec", and if the number of stored pending information is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec".

If the game round related to the second winning section 63e corresponds to a miss result, a special win result, or a big win result corresponding to the reach display, the variable display time is set to "15 sec" to "20 sec."

In addition, in the third variable display mode, the fixed display time of the pattern on each display section D1, D2 and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are specified to be "1 sec."

Next, we will explain the basic flow of the game with reference to Figure 46. Figure 46 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

(Game Flow)
In a first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, the low frequency support mode, and the first variable display mode, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the left route where the lower operating ball entry part 62 is arranged rather than the right route where the right operating ball entry part 63 is arranged.

Specifically, in the first normal game state, the support mode of the electric device 71 attached to the lower operating ball entry section 62 is set to the low-frequency support mode, so that even if the game ball is shot to the right route, the ball rarely enters the lower operating ball entry section 62, and the probability of the ball entering the right operating ball entry section 63 when the game ball is shot to the left route is lower than the probability of the ball entering the lower operating ball entry section 62 when the game ball is shot to the left route. In other words, although it is possible to progress in the game by shooting the game ball to the right route in the first normal game state, this requires a larger investment, and the profit that can be expected from the investment is smaller than when the game ball is shot to the left route.

If any type of jackpot result occurs in the first normal game state, the game will transition to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). In the first special game state, the opening time of the favorable ball entry section 314 is determined according to the type of jackpot result. If a ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the game will transition to the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode, high frequency support mode, and second variable display mode, after the first special game state ends.

The number of times that the game can be continued in the second normal game state is set to an upper limit (100 times), and the second normal game state will continue until the total number of times that the game is played in the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e reaches the upper limit of 100 times, or until a jackpot result is achieved in the second normal game state.

If the upper limit is reached without a jackpot result in the second normal game state, the game transitions to a third normal game state that corresponds to a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and a third variable display mode. In other words, the third normal game state is configured such that the win/lose selection mode and support mode are inherited from the second normal game state, while the variable display mode is switched from the second variable display mode to the third variable display mode.

As already explained, in the second variable display mode, the display time of the image change in the display section D1 for the first ball entry section is shorter than the display time of the image change in the display section D2 for the second ball entry section, and the game progresses mainly with the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d. In contrast, in the third variable display mode, the display time of the image change in the display section D2 for the second ball entry section is shorter than the display time of the image change in the display section D1 for the first ball entry section, and the game progresses mainly with the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e.

The second and third normal game states correspond to the high frequency support mode, and most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right-side actuation ball entry section 63 (right actuation port 63a). Game balls that enter the right actuation port 63a are alternately distributed to the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e. In other words, the ball entry ratio between the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e is 1:1.

As mentioned above, the probability of a winning jackpot result in a lottery based on a ball entering the first ball entry section 63d is 50%, and the probability of a winning jackpot result in a lottery based on a ball entering the second ball entry section 63e is 65%. In other words, when comparing the two ball entry sections 63d and 63e, a difference is provided so that the second ball entry section 63e is more advantageous to the player than the first ball entry section 63d.

In the second variable display mode, the game progresses mainly through the game times related to the first ball entry section 63d, so the actual probability of a special jackpot result is just over 50%. In contrast, in the third variable display mode, the game progresses mainly through the game times related to the second ball entry section 63e, so the actual probability of a special jackpot result is just under 65%. In other words, the third normal game state corresponding to the third variable display mode is favored to have a higher probability of a special jackpot result than the second normal game state corresponding to the second variable display mode.

The second normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, so the loss of balls is less severe than in the first normal game state, but the loss of balls becomes more noticeable as the game continues for a long time in the second normal game state. Furthermore, there is concern that the fact that no next jackpot occurs despite a guaranteed jackpot result and transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will reduce the player's motivation to play.

In this regard, when the number of plays executed in the second normal game state without resulting in a jackpot (the total number of plays involving the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e) reaches the upper limit, the game state transitions to the third normal game state, which has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot with a special jackpot than the second normal game state, thereby increasing the expectation of consecutive jackpots with a special jackpot. This rescue function can effectively prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, a transition trigger different from the upper limit is provided as a transition trigger from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. Specifically, a special winning result may occur in the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d, and a part of this special winning result (specifically, the second special winning result) is a transition trigger to the third normal game state. The special winning result and the second special game state transitioned based on the special winning result are configured not to contribute to the switching of the win/lose lottery mode or the support mode. Here, the first special winning result and the second special game state transitioned based on the first special winning result are configured not to contribute to the switching of the variable display mode, whereas the second special winning result and the second special game state transitioned based on the second special winning result are configured to contribute to the switching of the variable display mode. Specifically, if the second special winning result occurs in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state, the variable display mode becomes the third variable display mode after the second special game state ends. More specifically, if the second special win occurs during the second normal game state, the variable display mode will switch to the third variable display mode. In other words, when the game is progressing toward the upper limit, the game may suddenly switch to the third normal game state midway through.

In this way, by diversifying the triggers for transitioning to the third normal gaming state and configuring it so that the third normal gaming state can be transitioned to before the upper limit is reached, it is possible to increase tension in the second normal gaming state.

As described above in detail, the transition from the second normal game state (second variable display mode) to the third normal game state (third variable display mode) is triggered by reaching the upper limit or the second special winning result. In the latter of these two triggers, the image corresponding to the losing result is displayed on the second entry section display section D2 at the same time that the image corresponding to the second special winning result is displayed on the first entry section display section D1, and after the second special game state ends, the display of the images on each display section D1 and D2 begins in a manner corresponding to the third variable display mode. In other words, there is no substantial time lag between the transition to the third variable display mode and the start of play in the third variable display mode, with the main play round relating to the second entry section 63e.

In contrast, in the former of the two above mentioned triggers, even if the image is displayed as a fixed image on the display unit D1 for the first ball entry section, the variable display of the image on the display unit D2 for the second ball entry section continues. Therefore, even if the mode is switched to the third variable display mode, the variable display time of the image on the display unit D2 for the second ball entry section is not immediately shortened, and the effects of the second variable display mode may remain. In other words, a certain amount of time lag may occur before the start of play with the main game round related to the second ball entry section 63e in the third variable display mode. This time lag depends on the variable display time of the image on the display unit D2 for the second ball entry section set in the second variable display mode (60 sec in this embodiment).

If, despite transitioning to the third normal game state (third variable display mode), game play in the third normal game state does not commence promptly, this is undesirable as it can cause discomfort to the player. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to prevent such inconveniences from occurring. Below, this design is explained with reference to Figure 47. Figure 47 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state upon reaching the upper limit.

At the timing of tc1, the first special game state corresponding to the result of the special jackpot is transitioning to the second normal game state. In conjunction with this, the word "CHANCE" is displayed at the top of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as a message suggesting that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, more specifically, as a message indicating that the game state is the second normal game state (see FIG. 41(a)). In addition, an image that resembles "under the sea" is displayed as a background image on the display screen 75a, and a blue effect is added to the outer edge of the display screen 75a. Furthermore, a counter indicating the number of remaining games until the second normal game state is continued is displayed in the corner of the display screen 75a. Thereafter, the counter is decremented as the number of games is played.

In the second normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the first ball entry section 63d, and at the timing of tc2, the number of games played in the second normal game state without a jackpot result has reached the upper limit (100 times). At this timing of tc2, the display unit D1 for the first ball entry section has completed the final display of the image corresponding to the miss result and switched to the third variable display mode, but the display unit D2 for the second ball entry section continues to display the variable images. In other words, at the timing of tc2, the display unit D1 for the first ball entry section starts displaying the variable images, while the display unit D2 for the second ball entry section continues to display the variable images across the second normal game state (second variable display mode) and the third normal game state (third variable display mode).

At timing tc2, a promotion suggestion effect is started on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, which suggests a transition (promotion) to the third normal game state. In this promotion suggestion effect, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a is changed from "CHANCE" to "STANDBY," and a video corresponding to the promotion is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a.

This promotion suggestion effect continues until the timing of tc3 when the final display of the image begins on the second ball entry display unit D2. The timing when the number of plays reaches the upper limit varies. Therefore, at the timing of tc2 when the final display of the image is completed on the first ball entry display unit D1, the remaining variable display time on the second ball entry display unit D2 is identified, and the execution time of the promotion suggestion effect is determined according to the identification result, thereby avoiding an excess or deficiency in the execution time of the promotion suggestion effect.

At the same time that the confirmation display on the second ball entry display section D2 starts at timing tc3, the promotion display starts on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the message displayed on the top of the display screen 75a alternates between "STANDBY" and "BIG CHANCE," which indicates that the third normal game state is being played. At the same time, the effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a alternates between blue and red.

At the timing tc4 when the final display of the image is completed on the second ball entry display D2, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a changes to "BIG CHANCE", and the effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a changes to red. The counter displayed in the corner of the display screen 75a then displays "∞" instead of numbers.

In this way, by using the remaining time on the second ball entry display D2 to execute a promotion suggestion effect, etc., it is possible to build up anticipation for the transition to the third normal game state. This is preferable in that it prevents the player from getting the impression that the transition to the game state is sluggish.

Incidentally, when transitioning to the third normal game state, if the timing at which the final display of the image in the first ball entry display section D1 ends coincides with the timing at which the final display of the image in the second ball entry display section D2 ends, there is no time to execute the promotion suggestion effect described above. In such a case, the promotion suggestion effect is skipped and the promotion display is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the first special game state in FIG. 46, if no ball enters the favorable ball entry area 314 during the first special game state, after the first special game state ends, the game state transitions to a fourth normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or a second variable display mode.

The number of plays that can be continued in the fourth normal game state is set to an upper limit (100 plays) as in the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state will continue until the total number of plays in the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e reaches the upper limit of 100 plays, or until a jackpot result is achieved in the fourth normal game state.

Here, if the upper limit is reached in the fourth normal game state without a jackpot result, the game will transition to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, low frequency support mode, and first variable display mode. In contrast, if the second special jackpot result described above is achieved during the fourth normal game state, the game will transition to the second special game state and then switch from the variable display mode to the third variable display mode. From this point on, the game will progress mainly with the number of plays related to the second ball entry section 63e until the total number of plays in the fourth normal game state and the fifth normal game state reaches the upper limit. In other words, the probability of a guaranteed jackpot result increasing when a jackpot result is achieved.

As described above in detail, the transition from the fourth normal game state (second variable display mode) to the fifth normal game state (third variable display mode) is triggered by the second special winning result. This trigger occurs when a pattern corresponding to the second special winning result is definitively displayed on the display section D2 for the second ball entry section at the same time that a pattern corresponding to the losing result is definitively displayed on the display section D1 for the first ball entry section, and after the second special game state ends, the variable display of the patterns on each display section D1, D2 begins in a manner corresponding to the third variable display mode. In other words, there is no substantial time lag between the transition to the third variable display mode and the start of play in the third variable display mode, with the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e as the main play.

In contrast, the transition from the fourth normal game state (second variable display mode) to the first normal game state (first variable display mode) is triggered by reaching the upper limit. At this time, even if the image is displayed as a fixed image on the first ball entry section display section D1, the variable display of the image on the second ball entry section display section D2 continues. Therefore, even if the transition to the first variable display mode is made, the variable display time of the image on the second ball entry section display section D2 is not immediately extended, and the effects of the second variable display mode may remain. However, in both the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode, the game progresses mainly with the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d, and even if the above-mentioned effects remain, it does not hinder the smooth progress of the game.

The transition from the fifth normal game state (third variable display mode) to the first normal game state (first variable display mode) is also triggered by reaching the upper limit. In the third variable display mode, the game progresses with the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e as the main round, and in the first variable display mode, the game progresses with the game round related to the first ball entry section 62d as the main round. In other words, the main ball entry section in the game progresses is different in these two variable display modes. Therefore, as in the transition from the second normal game state (second variable display mode) to the third normal game state (third variable display mode), a certain amount of time lag may occur in the first variable display mode until the game mainly focuses on the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d. This time lag depends on the variable display time of the picture in the first ball entry section display section D1 set in the third variable display mode (60 sec in this embodiment).

If, despite transitioning to the first normal game state (first variable display mode), game play in the first normal game state does not commence promptly, this is undesirable as it can cause discomfort to the player. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been designed to prevent such inconveniences from occurring. This design is similar to the design used when transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, so an overview of it will be provided below.

When the first special game state corresponding to a normal jackpot result is transitioned to the fourth normal game state, the word "CHANCE" is displayed at the top of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as a message suggesting that the state is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, more specifically, as a message indicating that the state is the fourth normal game state (see FIG. 41(a)). In addition, an image resembling a "beach" is displayed as a background image on the display screen 75a, and a blue effect is added to the outer edge of the display screen 75a. Furthermore, a counter indicating the number of remaining games to continue in the second normal game state is displayed in the corner of the display screen 75a. Thereafter, the counter is decremented as the number of games is played.

In the fourth normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d, and if the second special winning result occurs in that game round, the game transitions to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, high frequency support mode, and third variable display mode. As already explained, in the fifth normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e. Note that the value of the counter displayed on the display screen 75a is decremented in accordance with the consumption of game rounds in the fifth normal game state as in the fourth normal game state.

After that, when the total number of plays in the fourth normal game state and the fifth normal game state reaches the upper limit, the game state transitions to the low probability mode, the low frequency support mode, and the first normal game state corresponding to the first variable display mode. Here, when the number of plays reaches the upper limit (100 plays) in the game play related to the second ball entry section 63e, the display section D1 for the first ball entry section completes the final display of the image corresponding to the miss result and switches to the first variable display mode, but the display section D1 for the first ball entry section may continue to display the variable image. In other words, the display section D2 for the second ball entry section starts displaying the variable image, while the display section D1 for the first ball entry section may continue to display the variable image across the fifth normal game state (third variable display mode) to the first normal game state (first variable display mode).

On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a demotion suggestion effect is started that suggests a transition to the first normal game state (demotion) at the timing when the final display of the symbol is completed on the second ball entry display section D2. In this demotion suggestion effect, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a is changed from "BIG CHANCE" to "CAUTION", and a video corresponding to demotion is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a.

This demotion suggestion effect continues until the timing when the final display of the image begins on the display unit D1 for the first ball entry section. The timing when the number of plays reaches the upper limit varies. Therefore, when the final display of the image is completed on the display unit D2 for the second ball entry section, the remaining variable display time on the display unit D1 for the first ball entry section is identified, and the execution time of the demotion suggestion effect is determined according to the identification result, thereby avoiding an excess or deficiency in the execution time of the demotion suggestion effect.

When the confirmation display on the first ball entry display section D1 starts, the demotion display starts on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the message displayed on the top of the display screen 75a and the effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a flash.

When the final display of the image on the first ball entry display section D1 is completed, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a, the effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a, and the counter displayed in the corner of the display screen 75a are hidden, and it is clearly indicated that the game has transitioned to the first normal game state.

Incidentally, when transitioning to the first normal game state, if the timing at which the display of the image on the second ball entry display section D2 ends coincides with the timing at which the display of the image on the first ball entry display section D1 ends, there is no time to execute the demotion suggestion effect described above. In such a case, the demotion suggestion effect is skipped and the demotion display is executed.

The second embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In this embodiment, the second normal game state and the third normal game state are provided as normal game states corresponding to the high probability mode, and in these second normal game state and the third normal game state, the probability of a jackpot result is three times higher than, for example, the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode. Here, in the second normal game state, the display time of the changing pattern in the first ball entry section display unit D1 is shorter than the display time of the changing pattern in the second ball entry section display unit D2, and the main target of the game progress is the game round related to the first ball entry section display unit D1. In contrast, in the third normal game state, the display time of the changing pattern in the second ball entry section display unit D2 is shorter than the display time of the changing pattern in the first ball entry section display unit D1, and the main target of the game progress is the game round related to the second ball entry section display unit D2. In other words, when transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the high probability mode is continued, but the main game round changes. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous in the high probability mode, and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

When comparing the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e, the second ball entry section 63a is favored in terms of the distribution probability of a guaranteed jackpot result. Therefore, by transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the main target of game progress is shifted from the game round related to the first ball entry section 63d, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, to the game round related to the second ball entry section 63e, which is relatively advantageous. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player's advantage further changes (increases) even in the high probability mode, even if the game progresses without a jackpot result despite transitioning to the high probability mode, the player's expectations can be directed toward transitioning to the fourth normal game state. By having such a rescue function, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the player's desire to play when staying in the high probability mode for a long time.

In this embodiment, when the number of plays in the second normal game state (the total number of plays related to the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e) reaches the upper limit, the game state transitions to the third normal game state. Here, there is a possibility that a certain degree of bias will occur in the frequency with which game balls flowing down the game area PE enter the right-side actuated ball entry section 63. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if the game state transitions to the third normal game state when the total number of plays related to both ball entry sections 63d, 63e reaches the upper limit, it is possible to prevent the transition function to the fourth normal game state from not being properly performed.

As described above, the game balls that flow into the right-side operating ball entry section 63 are alternately distributed to the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e. This configuration reduces the chances that a game round related to only one ball entry section progresses independently, and the coordination of the game rounds related to the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e can be used to ideally diversify the normal game state in a high probability mode.

The configuration of distributing game balls that flow into the right-side operating ball entry section 63 alternately (in a predetermined order) to the first ball entry section 63d/second ball entry section 63e is an obstacle to ensuring the number of game balls that enter when viewed from one of the ball entry sections. This is not desirable in terms of diversifying the game by utilizing the simultaneous progression of game times. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the support mode of the electric device 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is set to a high-frequency support mode in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and the configuration is configured to compensate for the shortage of the number of balls that enter, thereby preferably solving the above problem.

If the second special win occurs in the second normal gaming state, the game will transition to the third normal gaming state before the upper limit on the number of plays is reached. In this way, by diversifying the trigger for transition to the third normal gaming state, the upper limit can be set to a certain degree, and the degree of freedom in setting the upper limit can be increased, thereby ideally realizing diversification of games.

In addition, in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly on the game times related to the first ball entry section 63d. Here, if the second special winning result is obtained during the fourth normal game state, the game will transition to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. This fifth normal game state will continue until the high frequency support mode ends and transitions to the first normal game state. In the fifth normal game state, the game progresses mainly on the game times related to the second ball entry section 63e. Therefore, if a jackpot result is obtained in the fifth normal game state, expectations for a guaranteed jackpot result will increase. In this way, by diversifying the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (so-called time-saving game state) while keeping the same changes in the balls held and the jackpot probability, it is possible to contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

<Modification 1>
In the above second embodiment, the advantage of the third normal game state is ensured by increasing the distribution probability of the probability of the special jackpot result in the third normal game state compared to the distribution probability of the probability of the special jackpot result in the second normal game state, but it is sufficient that the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and the specific configuration is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the advantage of the third normal game state by configuring the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the case of a jackpot result to be greater in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state. In addition, as a rescue measure when the game progresses without a jackpot result in the second normal game state, it may be configured so that all jackpot results in the third normal game state are probability jackpot results.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the condition is met by configuring the game state to transition to the third normal game state when the number of games played in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit of "100 times," and by configuring the game state to transition to the first normal game state when the number of games played in the fourth normal game state reaches the upper limit of "100 times," but the present invention is not limited to this. The upper limit for the second normal game state and the upper limit for the fourth normal game state may be different. For example, the upper limit for the second normal game state may be larger or smaller than the upper limit for the fourth normal game state.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the game state is shifted from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the sum of the number of times of play related to the first ball entry section 63d and the number of times of play related to the second ball entry section 63e reaches the upper limit of "100 times", but this is not limited to this. For example, the game state may be shifted from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of times of play related to the first ball entry section 63d reaches the first upper limit, or the game state may be shifted from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of times of play related to the second ball entry section 63e reaches the second upper limit.

It is also possible to use the upper limit for the first ball entry section 63d and the upper limit for the second ball entry section 63e together, and when the upper limit for the first ball entry section 63d is reached, the game state is shifted from the second normal game state to a predetermined normal game state A that is more advantageous to the player (by switching the variable display time table to be referenced), and when the upper limit for the second ball entry section 63e is reached, the game state is shifted from the predetermined normal game state A to the predetermined normal game state B (by switching the variable display time table to be referenced).

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment described above, a transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, or a transition from the fourth normal game state to the fifth normal game state occurs when the support mode of the electric device 71 is in the high-frequency support mode, but it is optional whether or not to set the high-frequency support mode as a prerequisite for causing these transitions.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, the game balls are alternately distributed between the first ball entry section 63d and the second ball entry section 63e, but the order of distribution of the game balls is arbitrary. It is also possible to generate a bias such that the number of balls entering one of the sections is greater than the other.

Third Embodiment
In the second embodiment described above, after the second normal game state is shifted to the third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, the third normal game state continues until the next big win is obtained, and the shift to the second normal game state is avoided. In contrast, the present embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that after the shift to the third normal game state, the second normal game state can be shifted to before the next big win is obtained. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for realizing such a state shift will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48(a) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the second ball entry section 63e stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603, and FIG. 48(b) is a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode corresponding to the second ball entry section 63e stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603.

As already explained, in the third normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second ball entry section 63e. As shown in FIG. 48, in the winning/losing lottery based on the ball entry into the second ball entry section 63e, in addition to the first special winning result, the third special winning result can be won as a special winning result. The third special winning result is an opportunity to switch the referenced variable display time table from the third variable display time table to the second variable display time table, and at the end of the second special game state corresponding to the third special winning result, the variable display mode is switched from the third variable display mode to the second variable display mode. In this way, by configuring the game to be able to be demoted to the second normal game state even after being promoted to the third normal game state, the tension of the game in the third normal game state can be appropriately increased.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the third normal game state is changed to the second normal game state, but instead of or in addition to this, after the fourth normal game state is changed to the fifth normal game state, the fourth normal game state can be changed to the fifth normal game state before the upper limit of the number of times of play is reached. Specifically, when the third special winning result is won during the fifth normal game state, the variable display time table can be switched from the third variable display time table to the second variable display time table.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (demotion) from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is lower than the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (promotion) from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (demotion) from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state may be higher than the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (promotion) from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, or the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (demotion) from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state may be the same as the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (promotion) from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, when the third normal gaming state is reached, the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (demotion) to the second normal gaming state is lower than the probability of a jackpot result, but this is not limited to the above. When the third normal gaming state is reached, the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (demotion) to the second normal gaming state may be higher than the probability of a jackpot result, or when the third normal gaming state is reached, the probability of a special win resulting in a transition (demotion) to the second normal gaming state may be the same as the probability of a jackpot result.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the above-mentioned third embodiment, a transition from the third normal game state to the second normal game state is made when a third special win result is obtained in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry section 63e. However, in this embodiment, the configuration relating to the transition from the third normal game state to the second normal game state differs from that of the third embodiment.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the third special winning result is not provided in the winning/losing table corresponding to the second ball entry section 63e stored in the winning/losing table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. Instead, the third special winning result is added to the winning/losing table corresponding to the first ball entry section 63d stored in the winning/losing table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. In other words, when the third special winning result is obtained based on a ball entering the first ball entry section 63d, the variable display mode is switched from the third variable display mode to the second variable display mode via the second special game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a special jackpot result from the allocation lottery based on a ball entering the first ball entry section 63d is 50%, and the probability of a special jackpot result from the allocation lottery based on a ball entering the second ball entry section 63e is 100%. In other words, when the game ball is shot to the right route in the second normal game state, there is a probability of just over 50% of the special jackpot result, and when the game ball is shot to the right route in the third normal game state, there is a probability of just under 100% of the special jackpot result.

In the third normal game state, if the winning/losing lottery involving the second ball entry section 63e results in a winning jackpot, the winning jackpot result is guaranteed, so this is a game state in which hopes for a winning streak are high. However, if the game state is downgraded to the second normal game state due to the inclusion of a play involving the first ball entry section 63d, the probability of winning the winning jackpot result drops to just over 50%, so it is expected that the player will play in the hope that the third normal game state will continue.

Here, the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 knows the time when the image variation display is executed on the display unit D1 for the first ball entry section, and from this known time, it is possible to specify the time period during which the possibility of demotion from the third normal game state is "0" (hereinafter referred to as the "avoidance section"). The notification/performance control device 143 performs a process to notify that it is a time period during which demotion is avoided as part of the control process for the pattern display device 75 and the speaker unit 29. Specifically, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 49, the color of the effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 is changed from "red" to "gold," and the speaker unit 29 outputs background music corresponding to the time period during which demotion is avoided. Then, a girl character image is displayed so as to overlap the variation display area of the display screen 75a (more specifically, so as to be positioned behind the image), and a timer counter indicating the remaining time in the avoidance section is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 75a.

These notifications indicating demotion avoidance (demotion avoidance notifications) are executed in the interval in which the image can be definitively displayed on the second ball entry section display section D2 before the image is definitively displayed on the first ball entry section display section D1, more specifically, in the interval obtained by subtracting the shortest variable display time (0.5 sec) of the image on the second ball entry section display section D2 from the timing when the image is definitively displayed on the first ball entry section display section D1. Then, when the interval ends, the color of the effect is changed from "gold" to "red", the background music from the speaker section 29 is changed to background music that corresponds to outside the avoidance interval, the girl's character image is hidden, and the word "CAUTION" is displayed in place of the timer counter as a message indicating the possibility of demotion.

As described above, in a configuration in which the third normal game state can be transitioned to the second normal game state, the player can be kept tense, but there is concern that excessive continuation of this tension could cause the player to become fatigued. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the above concerns can be eliminated by providing a configuration in which at least a time period in which transition to the second normal game state is avoided is notified.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the demotion avoidance notification is executed in the time obtained by subtracting the shortest variable display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern in the second ball entry section display section D2 from the time until the pattern is confirmed and displayed in the first ball entry section display section D1, but this is not limited to the above. The variable display time of the pattern in the second ball entry section display section D2 varies depending on the number of reserved balls in the second ball entry section 63e. In consideration of such circumstances, the demotion avoidance notification may be executed in the time obtained by subtracting the longest variable display time (e.g., 8 sec) of the pattern in the second ball entry section display section D2 from the time until the pattern is confirmed and displayed in the first ball entry section display section D1. When the demotion avoidance notification is executed based on the longest variable display time, the actual variable display time in the second ball entry section display section D2 may be shorter than that. In such a case, after the expected time has elapsed, the timer counter will display "???.??? sec" and this display will continue until the actual remaining time falls below the shortest variable display time described above.

Fifth embodiment
In the second to fourth embodiments, the second variable display mode is switched to the third variable display mode, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to switch to the third variable display mode regardless of the variable display mode in which the player is staying. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 49, a specific configuration for realizing the behavior shown in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the second to fourth embodiments. FIG. 50(a) is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for the first ball entry section 63d stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, FIG. 50(b) is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for the second ball entry section 63e stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, and FIG. 50(c) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the big win result and the transition destination.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), the distribution table for the first ball entry section 63d is provided with distributions for a 6R normal jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result A, a 6R special jackpot result B, and a 16R special jackpot result. Also, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the distribution table for the second ball entry section 63e is provided with distributions for a 16R normal jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result B, and a 16R special jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 50(c), the 6R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the normal game state to which the game transitions after the first special game state ends is the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, high frequency support mode, and second variable display mode. The 16R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the normal game state to which the game transitions after the first special game state ends is the fifth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, high frequency support mode, and third variable display mode. In other words, in some cases where a normal jackpot result is obtained, the game starts from the fifth normal game state. In these fourth and fifth normal game states, the probability of a jackpot result and the support mode by the electric role 71 do not change, but there is a difference in the distribution probability of a guaranteed jackpot result. Therefore, by transitioning directly to the fifth normal game state without passing through the fourth normal game state, there is a chance to win many balls.

6R special jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the normal game state to which the player transitions after the first special game state ends is the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode, high frequency support mode, and second variable display mode. 6R special jackpot result B and 16R special jackpot result are jackpot results in which the normal game state to which the player transitions after the first special game state ends is the third normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode, high frequency support mode, and third variable display mode. In other words, in some cases where a special jackpot result is obtained, the game starts from the third normal game state. Although the probability of a jackpot result itself does not change, there is a difference in the distribution probability of a special jackpot result. Therefore, by transitioning directly to the third normal game state without passing through the second normal game state, there is a chance to win many balls.

In a configuration in which the player's advantage is increased by stepping up from the first normal game state to the second normal game state to the third normal game state, or from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state to the fifth normal game state, the diversification of game states can prevent the game from becoming monotonous. However, having many steps to move to the most advantageous state in each route (the third normal game state or the fifth normal game state) gives the impression that the hurdle is high, and there is a concern that this will hinder the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, by using a configuration in which the player can skip steps along the way and move directly to the most advantageous state, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

Sixth embodiment
One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the first special game state. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the configuration of the game board 60 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 51. Figure 51 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game Board 60)
A general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. are disposed in each opening formed in the game board 60. When a ball enters an entry section such as the general winning opening 61, the operational winning sections 62, 63, or the variable winning devices 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player based on the detection result.

In this embodiment, the general winning openings 61 are disposed on the left and right routes. Of these general winning openings 61, the general winning opening 61 disposed on the right route (hereinafter referred to as the right general winning opening 61R) is located between the through gate 66 and the upper variable winning device 64, specifically near the upper variable winning device 64. More specifically, the right general winning opening 61R is located on the flow path toward the upper variable winning device 64, and is therefore configured such that some of the game balls shot toward the upper variable winning device 64 will win in the right general winning opening 61R.

Details will be given later, but one of the features of this embodiment is that it encourages the launch of game balls aimed at the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R during the first special game state, and performs a predetermined display performance based on winning in the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R. The upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R are positioned to the side of the pattern display device 75 (display screen 75a) in order to reduce the amount of movement of the line of sight when viewing the display screen 75a and the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) are provided with different probabilities of winning a jackpot in a winning/losing lottery based on balls entering the operational ball entry sections 62, 63, and the hall manager is allowed to change these setting values. In more detail, the setting value can be changed by inserting a setting change key into the setting key switch provided in the main control device 162, placing the setting change key in the ON position, and operating the setting change switch.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the setting values mentioned above. The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in a win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 603. The win/loss table is similar to the first embodiment described above in that a win/loss table for low probability mode (win/loss information group for low probability) and a win/loss table for high probability mode (win/loss information group for high probability) are set.

A win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode are provided for each setting value, and in particular for the win/loss table for the low probability mode, the probability of a jackpot is set differently depending on the setting value (see FIG. 53). Specifically, when the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 1 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot is 1/260, when the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 2 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot is 1/280, and when the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 3 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot is 1/300. In this way, the differences are set in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1 to give players an advantage, and it is assumed that players who want to play with even the slightest advantage will play in the hope of setting 1.

When the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced, the jackpot probability is the same at 1/30 for settings 1 to 3, which is different from when the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and there is no difference between settings 1 to 3. Incidentally, it is also possible to match the advantage/disadvantage relationship in the high probability mode to the advantage/disadvantage relationship in the low probability mode. In other words, it is possible to set the order so that the jackpot probability increases in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot results: 16R normal jackpot result, 16R special jackpot result A, and 16R special jackpot result B. The allocation probabilities for these jackpot results are the same for settings 1 to 3.

Next, we will provide additional information about the electrical configuration for controlling the display of the pattern display device 75, with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 52.

(Electrical configuration related to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710)
An MPU 652 is mounted on the notification/performance control board 651 provided in the notification/performance control device 143. The MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 652, a RAM 654 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 653, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. It is not essential that the ROM 653 and the RAM 654 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 652, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 652 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652, and receives game play control commands (game play control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, opening and closing execution mode commands (opening and closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 652 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 710. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 143 are sent to the display control device 710 with the information format maintained as is.

The display control device 710 includes an MPU 712, which is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 711 on which a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 713 and the work RAM 714 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 712, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/presentation control device 143, or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the various commands received, to control the VDP 715 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 715). More specifically, the MPU 712 executes a process to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 75 based on the commands sent from the notification/presentation control device 143, as well as a process related to the hold notice described below, and executes drawing processing for the VDP 715 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75.

The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 712, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 712 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 714.

The VDP715 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 75. The VDP715 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP715 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU712, video RAM717, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM717 from the character ROM716 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 716 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 716 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 716 and have each character ROM 716 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 716 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 713.

The video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display contents on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 717. Below, with reference to Figure 54, a supplementary explanation of the display contents on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is provided. Figure 54(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents in the normal game state, and Figure 54(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents in the first special game state.

In the normal game mode, as shown in FIG. 54(a), three symbol rows, left, center, and right, are displayed in the center of the display screen 75a. On the display screen 75a, the symbols in each of these symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom). The variable display then stops in the order of the left symbol row → right symbol row → center symbol row, and the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the pay line, thereby announcing the lottery result. For example, if the current lottery result corresponds to a jackpot result, the same symbols are displayed statically for each symbol row. After that, a confirmation display is displayed, and an opening video or the like is displayed indicating a transition to a special game state (first special game state) corresponding to the jackpot result.

As shown in Figure 55, the effects executed during the first special game state (hereinafter referred to as special effects) are broadly divided into three parts: an opening part in which the above opening video is displayed, a main part executed during round play from round 1 to round 16, and an ending part in which an ending video is displayed. As shown in Figure 54(b), in the main part, a girl character is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a (the area where the patterns are displayed in the normal game state), and the current round and the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out in this special game state (total number paid out) are displayed in the corners of the display screen 75a.

The main part is composed of a first half part (a stock part that accumulates information related to determining the setting suggestion conditions based on the number of balls that enter the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning port 61R) and a second half part (a battle part that notifies the result of the battle performance as to whether the setting suggestion conditions are met based on the information accumulated in the stock part), and one of its features is that if the setting suggestion conditions are met in the main part, the currently set setting value is suggested in the ending part. Details of the setting suggestion conditions will be described later, but the more balls that enter the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning port 61R, the higher the possibility of the setting suggestion conditions being met.

Now, with reference to Figures 56 to 60, we will explain the control process for special effects (control process for the first special game state) that is executed as part of the regular schedule by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143.

(Control process for first special game state)
As shown in the flowchart of Figure 56 (a), the control processing for the first special game state is composed of three main processes: processing for the opening part (step S3001), processing for the main part (step S3002), and processing for the ending part (step S3003).

(Opening part processing)
As shown in the flowchart of Figure 56 (b), in the opening part processing, first in step S3101, it is determined whether or not an opening video is currently being displayed in the opening part. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3102. In step S3102, it is determined whether or not an opening command corresponding to the first special game state has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the opening part processing is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, an opening part start process is executed. In the opening part start process, an opening command is transferred to the display control device 710, light emission control is performed so that the light emission state of the lamp unit 26 becomes a light emission state corresponding to the opening, and sound control is performed so that background music and sound effects corresponding to the opening are output from the speaker unit 29.

After the setting suggestion lottery table is determined in the following step S3014, the processing for this opening part is terminated. In the setting suggestion lottery described below, the value of the lottery counter provided in the RAM 654 (various counter area 675) of the notification/performance control device 143 and the setting suggestion lottery table are referenced to determine whether or not a setting can be suggested. Here, the relationship between the lottery counter and the setting suggestion lottery table is described with reference to FIG. 57(a).

The lottery counter is configured to increment by "1" if a ball lands in the upper variable winning device 64 during a round, and to increment by "10" if a ball lands in the right general winning port 61R during the interval between rounds.

The ROM 653 (lottery table storage area 661) of the notification/performance control device 143 stores setting suggestion lottery table A to setting suggestion lottery table C.

The setting suggestion lottery table A is specified so that when the lottery counter value is between 0 and 149, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 0%, when the lottery counter value is between 150 and 199, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 10%, when the lottery counter value is between 200 and 249, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 40%, when the lottery counter value is between 250 and 299, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 70%, and when the lottery counter value is greater than 300, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 100%.

The setting suggestion lottery table B is specified so that when the lottery counter value is between 0 and 149, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 0%, when the lottery counter value is between 150 and 199, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 20%, when the lottery counter value is between 200 and 249, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 50%, when the lottery counter value is between 250 and 299, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 80%, and when the lottery counter value is greater than 300, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 100%.

The setting suggestion lottery table C is specified so that when the lottery counter value is between 0 and 149, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 0%, when the lottery counter value is between 150 and 199, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 30%, when the lottery counter value is between 200 and 249, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 60%, when the lottery counter value is between 250 and 299, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 90%, and when the lottery counter value is greater than 300, the probability of the setting suggestion being selected is 100%.

In other words, for setting suggestion lottery tables A to C, the probability of a setting suggestion occurring increases as the number of balls entering the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning port 61R increases, and they are differentiated so that the probability of a setting suggestion occurring increases in the following order: setting suggestion lottery table A < setting suggestion lottery table B < setting suggestion lottery table C.

In addition, since balls entering the right general winning opening 61R are given preferential treatment in updating the lottery counter for setting suggestions compared to balls entering the upper variable winning device 64, and since there is little difference in the number of balls entering the upper variable winning device 64 in the first special game state, the contribution rate to setting suggestions is higher for the right general winning opening 61R than for the upper variable winning device 64.

When the first special game state is triggered by a 16R normal jackpot result, the probability that setting suggestion lottery table A will be selected is 30%, the probability that setting suggestion lottery table B will be selected is 30%, and the probability that setting suggestion lottery table C will be selected is 40%, with the selection of setting suggestion lottery table C being favored.

When the first special game state is triggered by a 16R special jackpot result A, there is a 30% probability that setting suggestion lottery table A will be selected, a 40% probability that setting suggestion lottery table B will be selected, and a 30% probability that setting suggestion lottery table C will be selected, with setting suggestion lottery table B being favored.

When the first special game state is triggered by 16R special jackpot result B, there is a 40% probability that setting suggestion lottery table A will be selected, a 30% probability that setting suggestion lottery table B will be selected, and a 30% probability that setting suggestion lottery table C will be selected, with the selection of setting suggestion lottery table A being favored.

In other words, in the first special game state, the probability of a setting suggestion occurring is configured to be higher in the following order: 16R special jackpot result B < 16R special jackpot result A < 16R normal jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the ending images (videos) displayed in the ending part in the first special game state include setting suggestion-compatible ending images X1 to X3 that are displayed if the setting suggestion lottery is won, and setting suggestion-non-compatible ending images Y1 to Y3 that are displayed if the setting suggestion lottery is lost.

Ending image Y1, which does not support setting suggestions, is an image that resembles a morning sun, and is displayed when the number of consecutive jackpots is between 0 and 4. Ending image Y2 is an image that resembles a sunset, and is displayed when the number of consecutive jackpots is between 5 and 9. Ending image Y3 is an image that resembles a moonlit night, and is displayed when the number of consecutive jackpots is 10 or more.

The setting suggestion corresponding ending images X1 to X3 are images that display female characters, and the number of characters displayed in ending image X1 is 3, the number of characters displayed in ending image X2 is 5, and the number of characters displayed in ending image X3 is 7.

If the setting suggestion is successful in setting 1, ending image X1 is excluded from the selection candidates, there is a 50% chance that ending image X2 will be selected, and a 50% chance that ending image X3 will be selected. If the setting suggestion is successful in setting 2, there is a 30% chance that ending image X1 will be selected, a 50% chance that ending image X2 will be selected, and a 20% chance that ending image X3 will be selected. If the setting suggestion is successful in setting 3, there is a 50% chance that ending image X1 will be selected, a 50% chance that ending image X2 will be selected, and ending image X3 is excluded from the selection candidates.

For this reason, if the frequency of appearance of ending image X3 is high, the possibility of setting 1 increases, and if the frequency of appearance of ending image X1 is high, the possibility of setting 3 increases, allowing the player to predict the setting value based on the frequency of appearance of ending images X1 to X3.

Returning to the explanation of step S3101 in FIG. 56(b), if a positive judgment is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not an opening command corresponding to the first round has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S3105, the process for this opening part is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3106.

In step S3106, a transition process to the main part is executed. In this transition process, an opening command corresponding to the first round is transferred to the display control device 710, the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched to one corresponding to the main part, and the background music and sound effects output from the speaker unit 29 are switched to one corresponding to the main part.

In the following step S3107, the main part flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, and the opening part processing ends. By setting this main part flag, various processes of the main part processing constituting the first special game state processing are executed. Below, the main part processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 58.

(Main part processing)
In the main part processing, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a main part flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a main part flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3201, and the main part processing is terminated. If a main part flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3202, where it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 162. If a positive determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, it is determined whether or not an open command corresponding to the 16th round has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S3203, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not a round is in progress. If a round is in progress, a positive determination is made in step S3204, the process proceeds to step S3205, and after executing the round processing in step S3205, the main part processing is terminated. Here, the round processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 59.

(Round processing)
In the round processing, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a close command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a negative determination is made in step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether or not a winning command related to the upper large winning port 311 has been received from the main control unit 162. If a positive determination is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303, where an update process for the total payout number is executed.

Specifically, a winning command related to the upper large winning opening 311 is transferred to the display control device 710, and a sound effect corresponding to the winning is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 updates the total payout number displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 (by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the upper large winning opening 311).

In the next step S3304, an update process is performed for the first stock icon SI1 displayed on the display screen 75a based on the winning of the upper large winning slot 311. Here, referring to FIG. 54(b), a supplementary explanation of the configuration of the first stock icon SI1 is provided. FIG. 54(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents on the display screen 75a during the round part.

(First stock icon)
The first stock icon SI1 is an image that resembles a blue bullet, and the left part of the display screen 75a is provided with a first stock icon display area ST1 in which a plurality of first stock icons SI1 can be displayed vertically. Each time the number of game balls that enter the upper large winning hole 311 during a round in the first special game state reaches a first predetermined number (10 balls), one first stock icon SI1 is additionally displayed in the first stock icon display area ST1. In detail, when the additional display of one first stock icon SI1 is completed, the outer frame of the first stock icon SI1 that is to be additionally displayed next is displayed above the first stock icon SI1. After that, each time a ball enters the upper large winning hole 311, the blue colored portion expands in the area surrounded by the outer frame, and when the number of balls that enter reaches the first predetermined number, the entire area is filled with blue, and the additional display of the first stock icon SI1 is completed.

In the first special game state, the round end conditions are set as the number of balls entering the upper large winning hole 311 reaching 10 and the opening time reaching 30 seconds. When the upper variable winning device 64 is in the open state, most of the game balls launched to the right route will enter the upper large winning hole 311. Since the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, in each round, basically 10 balls will enter before the opening time reaches 30 seconds. Therefore, one additional first stock icon SI1 is displayed in most rounds, and in the case of a 16R jackpot result, approximately 15 additional first stock icons SI1 are displayed by the end of the 15th round.

After executing the stock icon update process in step S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the suggestion lottery counter provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654 is incremented by "1".

After the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter is incremented in step S3305, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3302 (if a winning command for the upper large winning slot 311 has not been received), the process proceeds to step S3306. In step S3306, it is determined whether or not a winning command for the right general winning slot 61R has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S3306, the processing for this round is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3306, the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, the process of updating the total payout number is executed. Specifically, the winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R is transferred to the display control device 710, and a sound effect corresponding to the winning is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 updates the total payout number displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 (by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the right general winning opening 61R).

Returning to the explanation of step S3301, if a positive determination is made in step S3301, i.e., if a close command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3308. In step S3308, the process of switching the stock target is executed.

In the process of switching the stock target, the close command received from the main control unit 162 is transferred to the display control unit 710. Based on receiving the close command from the notification/performance control unit 143, the display control unit 710 displays on the display screen 75a a message indicating that the stock target has been switched. Details of this display will be described later.

In the next step S3309, a round end process is executed. Specifically, the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched from that corresponding to a round to that corresponding to an interval, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched from that corresponding to a round to that corresponding to an interval. After that, in step S3310, an interval flag is set in the various flags storage area 676 of the RAM 654, and the process for this round is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S3204 in FIG. 58, if it is determined in step S3204 that a round is not in progress, i.e., if an interval flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S3206. After the interval processing is executed in step S3206, the main part processing ends. Below, the interval processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 60.

(Interval processing)
In the interval process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not an open command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402. In step S3402, it is determined whether or not a winning command related to the upper large winning port 311 has been received from the main control unit 162. If a positive determination is made in step S3402, the process proceeds to step S3403, where an update process for the total payout number is executed.

Specifically, a winning command related to the upper large winning opening 311 is transferred to the display control device 710, and a sound effect corresponding to the winning is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 updates the total payout number displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 (by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the upper large winning opening 311).

After executing the update process of step S3403, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3402, proceed to step S3404. In step S3404, it is judged whether or not a winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R has been received from the main control unit 162. If a negative judgment is made in step S3404, the interval process ends as it is. If a positive judgment is made in step S3404, proceed to step S3405. In step S3405, the total number of payouts is updated. Specifically, the winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R is transferred to the display control unit 710, and a sound effect corresponding to the winning is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the fact that the winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R has been received, the display control unit 710 updates the total number of payouts displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display unit 75 (adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the right general winning opening 61R).

In the following step S3406, the second stock icon SI2 is added based on the ball entering the right general winning slot 61R. Here, a supplementary explanation of the configuration of the second stock icon SI2 will be provided with reference to FIG. 54(b) above.

(Second Stock Icon)
The second stock icon SI2 is an image imitating a red bullet, and a second stock icon display area ST2 in which a plurality of second stock icons SI2 can be displayed vertically is provided on the right side of the display screen 75a (the area adjacent to the right general winning hole 61R). When a ball enters the right general winning hole 61R during an interval in the first special game state, one second stock icon SI2 is additionally displayed in the second stock icon display area ST2 for each ball that enters.

In the first special game state, the interval time is 3 seconds, and approximately 1/10 of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right general winning opening 61R. Considering that the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, a ball will enter the right general winning opening 61R approximately once every 2 to 3 intervals. In other words, if game balls continue to be launched to the right route for all 15 intervals, approximately 7 to 8 balls will enter the right general winning opening 61R in one first special game state. In other words, 7 to 8 additional second stock icons SI2 can be displayed in one first special game state.

After the additional display of the image corresponding to the right general winning slot 61R is completed in step S3406, proceed to step S3407. After the increment process of the lottery counter for setting suggestions in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is executed in step S3407, this interval process ends. In the increment process of the lottery counter for setting suggestions, the value of the lottery counter for setting suggestions is incremented by "10". This incremented value is greater than the value incremented based on a ball entering the upper large winning slot 311 during a round.

Returning to the explanation of step S3401, if a positive determination is made in step S3401, i.e., if an open command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3408. In step S3408, the process of switching the stock target is executed.

In the process of switching the stock target, the open command received from the main control unit 162 is transferred to the display control unit 710. Based on receiving the open command from the notification/performance control unit 143, the display control unit 710 displays on the display screen 75a a message indicating that the stock target has been switched. Details of this display will be described later.

In the next step S3409, a round start process is executed. Specifically, the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched from that corresponding to an interval to that corresponding to a round, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched from that corresponding to an interval to that corresponding to a round. After that, in step S3410, the interval flag stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654 is erased, and the interval process is terminated.

Here, referring to Figure 61, we will explain the difference in display related to stock icons during a round and during an interval. Figure 61(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display during a round, and Figure 61(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display during an interval.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), during a round, the first stock icon display area ST1 on the left side of the display screen 75a is illuminated brightly (blackout is released), and the second stock icon display area ST2 on the right side of the display screen 75a is blacked out. The word "Lock" is displayed above the blacked out second stock icon display area ST2. This suggests that during a round, the first stock icon SI1 is obtained when a ball enters the upper large winning opening 311, but the second stock icon SI2 is not obtained even if a ball enters the right general winning opening 61R. Note that even if a ball enters the upper large winning opening 311 during a round, the second stock icon SI2 is not obtained, and even if a ball enters the right general winning opening 61R, the first stock icon SI1 is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), during the interval, the first stock icon display area ST1 on the left side of the display screen 75a is darkened, and the second stock icon display area ST2 on the right side of the display screen 75a is brightly lit (the darkening is lifted). The word "Lock" is displayed above the darkened first stock icon display area ST1. This suggests that during the interval, the second stock icon SI2 is obtained when a ball enters the right general winning opening 61R, but the first stock icon SI1 is not obtained even if a ball enters the upper large winning opening 311. Note that even if a ball enters the upper large winning opening 311 during the interval, the second stock icon SI2 is not obtained, and even if a ball enters the right general winning opening 61R, the first stock icon SI1 is not obtained.

Returning to the explanation of step S3203 in FIG. 58, if a positive judgment is made in step S3203, that is, if an opening command corresponding to the 16th round has been received, the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, a lottery process for setting suggestions is executed. In the lottery process for setting suggestions, the lottery table for setting suggestions set in the above step S3104 (see FIG. 57(b)) and the value of the lottery counter for setting suggestions updated in steps S3305 and S3407 are referenced to determine whether or not to make a setting suggestion by lottery.

If the lottery result in step S3207 is not compatible with setting suggestions, a negative judgment is made in step S3208 and the process proceeds to step S3209, where the transition process to a battle part that is not compatible with setting suggestions is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result in step S3207 is compatible with setting suggestions, a positive judgment is made in step S3208 and the process proceeds to step S3210, where the transition process to a battle part that is compatible with setting suggestions is performed.

By executing the transition process of steps S3209 to S3210, the background music output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to background music corresponding to the battle part, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the battle part. In addition, in these transition processes, information indicating the result of the setting suggestion lottery is added to the opening command corresponding to the 16th round sent from the main control unit 162, and the command is transferred to the display control unit 710. Based on receiving the opening command corresponding to the 16th round, the display control unit 710 transitions to a battle part that does not support setting suggestions or a battle part that supports setting suggestions.

Here, the display during the battle part will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display content at the start of the battle part, and FIG. 62(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display content at the end of the battle part corresponding to the setting suggestion.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), when the game moves to the battle part, multiple target images TF that resemble helicopters are displayed in the center of the display screen 75a. The stock icons SI1 and SI2 acquired in the stock part are carried over from the stock part to the battle part. In the battle part, the displayed stock icons SI1 and SI2 are fired toward the target images TF. When the stock icons SI1 and SI2 hit the target image TF, the target image TF is erased (the helicopter is shot down). In the battle part that supports setting suggestions, the number of target images TF displayed eventually becomes 0, and a notification is issued that the helicopter has been shot down successfully (see FIG. 62(b)). In contrast, in the battle part that does not support setting suggestions, some target images TF are ultimately left remaining, and a notification is issued that the helicopter has been shot down unsuccessfully.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 58, after executing the transition process of step S3209 or step S3210, the process proceeds to step S3211, where the setting suggestion lottery counter is reset (cleared to 0). In the following step S3212, the interval flag stored in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654 is erased, and the process for this main part is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S3202, if a positive judgment is made in step S3202, that is, if an ending command is received from the main control device 162, the process proceeds to step S3213. In step S3213, it is judged whether or not the setting suggestion has been won in the lottery process in step S3207. If a negative judgment is made in step S3213, the process for the main part is terminated after executing a process for transition to an ending part that does not support setting suggestions in step S3214. In the process for transition to an ending part that does not support setting suggestions, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to BGM for an ending part that does not support setting suggestions, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched to a light emission mode for an ending part that does not support setting suggestions.
On the other hand, if the determination in step S3213 is affirmative, the process for the main part is terminated after executing the process for transition to the ending part corresponding to the setting suggestion in step S3215. In the process for transition to the ending part corresponding to the setting suggestion, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the BGM for the ending part corresponding to the setting suggestion, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched to the light emission mode for the ending part corresponding to the setting suggestion.

Here, in the process for the ending part shown in step S3003 of FIG. 56(a), in the ending part corresponding to the setting suggestion, the ending image determination table shown in FIG. 57(b) is referenced to determine by lottery which of the ending images X1 to X3 corresponding to the setting suggestion will be displayed, and in the ending part not corresponding to the setting suggestion, the ending image determination table shown in FIG. 57(b) is referenced to determine which of the ending images Y1 to Y3 not corresponding to the setting suggestion will be displayed according to the number of consecutive jackpots. Then, information indicating the determined ending image is added to the ending command received from the main control device 162 and transferred to the display control device 710. When the display control device 710 receives this ending command, it starts displaying the ending image specified by the notification/performance control device 143. The ending image continues to be displayed until the game returns to the normal game state.

The sixth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In this embodiment, the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R are arranged on the right route, and a game ball launched aiming at the upper variable winning device 64 during the first special game state can also enter the right general winning opening 61R. Here, the upper variable winning device 64 can be switched between an open state (corresponding to an "accepting state") and a closed state (corresponding to a "non-accepting state"), and switching to the open state is repeated during the first special game state. Considering that the open state allows the ball to enter the upper variable winning device 64, it is assumed that game balls are launched during the time period when the upper variable winning device 64 is in the open state, and that launching of game balls is avoided during the time period when the upper variable winning device 64 is in the closed state.

As a result, the attention of the player is high during the time period when the opening is in progress, but when the opening is in the closed state, the attention of the player is likely to decrease. According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if a ball enters the right general winning hole 61R when the upper variable winning device 64 is in the open state in the first special game state, only a prize ball is paid out. However, when a ball enters the right general winning hole 61R when the upper variable winning device 64 is in the closed state in the first special game state, in addition to the prize ball, a bonus is given in which the probability of setting suggestions being executed is increased. This makes it possible to encourage players who expect setting suggestions to continue firing game balls, and to suitably suppress a decrease in attention during the time period when the opening is in the closed state. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the interval time during which the closed state is maintained, and even if the interval time is extended to a certain extent, the soundness of the game can be enhanced while suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game machine.

If the time that the ball is closed is shorter than the time that the ball is open, it becomes difficult to earn the number of balls that enter the right general winning opening 61R while the opening is closed. In particular, if the time that the ball is closed is short, there may be a bias in which balls do not enter the opening due to variations in the behavior of the game balls, and it would be cruel to the player to have to decide whether to award a bonus after each closed state. Therefore, the impact of the bias described above can be mitigated by carrying over the count value corresponding to the balls that enter the right general winning opening 61R until the end of the first special game state, and then by determining the setting suggestion by looking at the overall ball entry situation in the first special game state. This is a preferable configuration for encouraging continued firing during the interval.

The setting suggestion lottery counter used to draw setting suggestions is updated (incremented) by balls that enter the upper variable winning device 64 during a round, and is updated (incremented) by balls that enter the right general winning port 61R during an interval. With this configuration, players hoping for setting suggestions can be encouraged to fire game balls both during rounds and intervals, and the effect of suppressing the decline in attention mentioned above can be effectively exerted.

As described above, in a configuration in which the setting suggestion is determined by integrating balls entering the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R, it is expected that a setting suggestion will also be made by a ball entering the upper variable winning device 64, and it cannot be denied that some players may refrain from firing game balls during the interval. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a difference so that a ball entering the right general winning opening 61R during the interval contributes more to the setting suggestion determination than a ball entering the upper variable winning device 64 during the round, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

During the first special game state, the first stock icon display area ST1 (first stock icon SI1) and the second stock icon display area ST2 (second stock icon SI2) are displayed throughout both the round and the interval. The first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2 switch between brightly emitting objects (highlighted objects) and darkened objects (non-highlighted objects) during the round and the interval. In this way, switching the stock icon display area that is the target of stocks according to the progress of the game can contribute to increasing attention to the game in the first special game state.

The display mode of each stock icon display area ST1, ST2 is switched in sync, and the change in display on the display screen 75a can be emphasized. This reduces the chance that the change in the target stock icon display area will be overlooked. Since the configuration is such that an additional stock icon is displayed in the stock icon display area in which the display is emphasized, it is also possible to prevent the additional display from being overlooked.

When one of the first stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2 is highlighted, the other remains displayed without being hidden. This configuration helps prevent the stock destination from becoming unclear.

By linking the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2, periods when there are no stock targets are eliminated, and notification of stock targets continues throughout both the round and the interval, encouraging the player to continue playing. This is preferable in terms of preventing the player from refraining from firing game balls in anticipation of the interval time when the upper variable winning device 64 is in the closed state (so-called stop shot).

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, when the number of balls entering the upper large winning opening 311 reaches a first predetermined number (10 balls), one first stock icon SI1 is added, and when the number of balls entering the right general winning opening 61R reaches a second predetermined number (1 ball), one second stock icon SI2 is added, but the timing for adding each stock icon SI1, SI2 may be changed as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), when a ball enters the upper large winning opening 311, one first stock icon SI1 may be added with a first probability (e.g., 10%), and when a ball enters the right general winning opening 61R, one second stock icon SI2 may be added with a second probability (e.g., 100%).

<Modification 2>
As long as it is possible to suggest to which of the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2 the stock icon is to be added, the specific configuration of the target suggestion is arbitrary. For example, the target to be added may be suggested by adding an effect to the stock icon display area to which the stock icon is to be added.

<Modification 3>
When the upper variable winning device 64 is in the closed state, even if the launch of the game balls is resumed from that timing, the interval time can be configured to end before the launched game balls reach the right general winning hole 61R. In other words, when a so-called stop shot is performed, it can be configured so that it is difficult to make the game balls enter the right general winning hole 61R at the right time even if the game balls are launched after visually confirming that the game balls are in the closed state. This makes it possible to appropriately encourage the player who expects the setting suggestion lottery counter to be updated (incremented) based on the balls entering the right general winning hole 61R during the closed state to continue launching the game balls.

<Modification 4>
In the sixth embodiment, the interval time is the same for all first special game states, but the length of the interval time may be different depending on the type of jackpot result. For example, if 16R normal jackpot result A and 16R normal jackpot result B are provided as jackpot results, the interval time for 16R normal jackpot result A may be longer than that for 16R normal jackpot result B.

<Modification 5>
In the sixth embodiment, all the interval times are the same in the first special game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval time may be different depending on the round. For example, the interval time may be longer in a specific round (e.g., the seventh round) than in the other rounds.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter is updated (incremented) when a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64 during a round, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the setting suggestion lottery counter not to update (increment) the value based on a ball entering the upper variable winning device 64 during a round.

<Modification 7>
In the sixth embodiment, the first stock icon SI1 and the second stock icon SI2 are made to have different colors to improve the distinguishability between them, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the first stock icon SI1 and the second stock icon SI2 have a common appearance.

<Modification 8>
In the sixth embodiment, the first stock icon display area ST1 corresponding to the upper variable winning device 64 is provided on the left part of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, and the second stock icon display area ST2 corresponding to the right general winning port 61R is provided on the right part of the display screen 75a, but the arrangement of these stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2 may be changed arbitrarily. For example, the stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2 may be configured to be displayed on the right part of the display screen 75a.

<Modification 9>
In the sixth embodiment, the timing of the switching display of the enabled target among the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2 is configured to coincide with the switching timing of the upper variable winning device 64 to the open state/close state, but this is not limited to this. For example, there is a certain delay in the timing when the game ball that has flowed into the upper large winning opening 311 reaches the attached detection sensor (detection position), and there is a certain delay in the timing when the game ball that has flowed into the right general winning opening 61R reaches the attached detection sensor (detection position). Taking these delays into account, it is also possible to configure the timing of the switching display to be delayed from the switching timing of the upper variable winning device 64 to the open state/close state. This reduces the chance that the ball entering the right general winning opening 61R or the upper variable winning device 64 seems to have been just in time and is invalidated.

Seventh embodiment
In the sixth embodiment, the first stock icon display area ST1 for displaying the stock icon (first stock icon SI1) acquired based on the ball entering the upper large winning opening 311 and the second stock icon display area ST2 for displaying the stock icon (second stock icon SI2) acquired based on the ball entering the right general winning opening 61R are provided separately, but in this embodiment, the configuration related to the display of the stock icon is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 63, the configuration related to the display of the stock icon in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment. Note that the specific configuration related to the lottery for setting suggestions is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

During the main part (first round to fifteenth round) of the first special game state, a girl character is displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75. Below this character, there is provided a stock icon display area ST which displays stock icons SI obtained based on balls entering the upper large winning opening 311 or the right general winning opening 61R in the order in which they are obtained. In other words, the stock icon display area ST shown in this embodiment is a combination of the two stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2 shown in the fifth embodiment.

The stock icon display area ST displays a frame that defines the outer edge of the stock icon display area ST, and this frame separates the stock icon display area ST from its surrounding area. This frame is displayed along with the girl character as the game moves from the opening part to the main part. While this character becomes invisible when the main part ends, the frame of the stock icon display area ST continues to be displayed until the ending part ends.

Here, in the above fifth embodiment, the trigger for obtaining the first stock icon SI1 during a round is a ball entering the upper large winning opening 311, and the trigger for obtaining the second stock icon SI2 during an interval is a ball entering the right general winning opening 61R. Of these two triggers, the former requires 10 balls to enter to obtain the first stock icon SI1, and the latter requires one ball to enter to obtain the second stock icon SI2. This embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment in that there is a difference in the number of balls that enter, which is the condition for obtaining a stock icon SI, but the type of stock icon SI obtained is the same regardless of the ball entry destination.

Approximately 2/3 of the game balls shot to the right route during a round enter the upper large winning hole 311. Therefore, in order to obtain a stock icon SI based on balls entering the upper large winning hole 311, approximately 15 game balls must be shot. In contrast, approximately 1/10 of the game balls shot to the right route during an interval enter the right general winning hole 61R. Therefore, in order to obtain a stock icon SI based on balls entering the right general winning hole 61R, approximately 10 game balls must be shot. If the number of balls entering during a round does not reach 10, the number of balls entering is carried over to the next round, and the number of stock icons SI obtained based on balls entering the upper large winning hole 311 is unlikely to vary. In contrast, balls entering the right general winning hole 61R during an interval are directly connected to the stock icon SI, and the above-mentioned carryover does not occur. In other words, overall, it is easier to obtain a stock icon during an interval than during a round, and there is less variation in obtaining a stock icon SI during a round than during an interval.

In this embodiment, in order to inform the player that it is easier to obtain stock icons SI during intervals compared to during rounds, the display mode is partially changed during intervals from that during rounds. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 63(b), an effect is added to the girl character that is displayed across rounds, and the words "High Stock Probability" are displayed above the stock icon display area ST. These displays are erased at the start of the next round.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the stock icon display area ST capable of displaying the stock icon SI is provided on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, but the location of the stock icon display area ST is arbitrary. For example, a lamp unit for displaying the stock may be provided around the display screen 75a.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the right general winning opening 61R is arranged upstream of the upper variable winning device 64 on the right route, and even when the upper variable winning device 64 is in an open state (accepting state), the ball can enter the right general winning opening 61R, but this is not limited to the above. For example, as shown in Fig. 64(a), it is also possible to arrange the right general winning opening 61R downstream of the upper variable winning device 64 on the right route, and when the upper variable winning device 64 is in an open state (accepting state), the upper variable winning device 64 prevents the ball from entering the right general winning opening 61R.

<Modification 3>
For the detection sensor in the upper variable winning device 64 and the detection sensor in the right general winning port 61R, a slight time lag occurs between when the game ball that has passed through the entrance reaches the detection sensor and when the ball is detected. In consideration of such a time lag, it is also possible to delay the timing of switching the stock target in the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2 shown in the sixth embodiment and the timing of switching between displaying and hiding the high stock probability shown in the seventh embodiment in accordance with the time lag.

<Modification 4>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting value is suggested to the player based on the ball entering the right general winning slot 61R, but it is sufficient that at least some kind of benefit is given to the player, and the benefit is not limited to the setting suggestion. For example, in a configuration in which the high probability mode can be entered in a manner that is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish, it is also possible to suggest whether the high probability mode is entered as the benefit.

Eighth embodiment
One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to increase the attention to the movement of the game ball. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment and its prerequisite configuration will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In addition, although the lower variable winning device 65 is omitted in the game board 60 shown in this embodiment, the other configurations related to the game board 60 are the same as those in the first embodiment. In addition, various configurations related to the front door frame 14, inner frame 13, back pack unit 15, etc. are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

First, referring to Figure 65, the configuration for storing the reserved information will be described. During play, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 uses various counter information such as the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS, and the random number initial value counter CINI to perform lottery for big wins and special wins, set the display of the main display unit 81, and set the outline of the pattern display of the pattern display device 75.

Each counter C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 631 set in RAM 604. In lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in reserved ball storage area 632, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a winning occurs in operation port 62a, 63a.

The reserved ball storage area 632 comprises a reserved area RE for the operating port and an execution area AE. The reserved area RE comprises a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. The numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as reserved information in one of the areas Ra1 to Ra8 according to the winning history of the operating ports 62a and 63a. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

When multiple wins occur consecutively at the actuation ports 62a, 63a, the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 store the numerical information in chronological order in the following order: first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 → fifth area Ra5 → sixth area Ra6 → seventh area Ra7 → eighth area Ra8. By providing eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, four ball win histories for the lower actuation port 62a and the right actuation port 63a can be reserved and stored, i.e., a total of eight winning histories for the actuation ports 62a, 63a can be reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area Ra1 of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 299). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the actuation port 62a, 63a, or more specifically, when the game ball is detected by a detection sensor described below, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in the ROM 603. The contents of the win/loss table will now be explained.

In the win/lose table, address information consisting of binary information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information. Specifically, ten types of address information are set, expressed in decimal, from "1" to "10," and ten types of jackpot numerical information are set, expressed in decimal, from "7," "36," "67," "100," "131," "164," "195," "223," "241," and "272." These address information and jackpot numerical information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. The value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of random number information that can be updated in the win random number counter C1, from "0" to "299."

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning/losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high probability mode, with the former being less than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only jackpot numerical information with address information "1" is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed, and in the high probability mode, jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one numerical information that will result in a winning jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are 10 numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low probability mode. Note that as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that will result in a winning jackpot are arbitrary.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 29). The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the operation port 62a, 63a, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when it is detected by a detection sensor, which will be described in detail later.

The allocation destination of the game result for the winning type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 622, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in the ROM 603. The normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and the special jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set as such allocation destinations.

A normal jackpot result is one in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode until the number of plays reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 plays). After the end reference number has elapsed, the mode switches to a low frequency support mode.

The probability of a jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. This high frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the win/lose lottery becomes a jackpot state and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode.

In the distribution table, "0-9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10-29" corresponds to the special jackpot result, but the distribution of these numbers is arbitrary.

In this embodiment, a difference is provided so that allocation based on balls entering the right operating port 63a is more advantageous to the player than allocation based on balls entering the lower operating port 62a. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot result is roughly divided into two results with different degrees of advantage, specifically, a first probability variable jackpot result with the number of rounds being "16" and a second probability variable jackpot result with the number of rounds being "4". When the probability variable jackpot result is obtained by allocation based on balls entering the right operating port 63a, the first probability variable jackpot result is more likely to be obtained than when the probability variable jackpot result is obtained by allocation based on balls entering the lower operating port 62a. This creates the above-mentioned difference in advantage between the allocation mode based on balls entering the lower operating port 62a and the allocation mode based on balls entering the right operating port 63a.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the operation port 62a, 63a, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing detected by a detection sensor, which will be described in detail later. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. However, in a game round that transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines whether or not to generate a reach, regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Note that the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to each game state. For example, the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be greater when the support mode is the high frequency support mode than when it is the low frequency support mode.

Here, the term "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state that makes the player believe that the game machine is in a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result after the variable display has started on the pattern display device 75 and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, in a gaming machine that is equipped with a pattern display device 75 that is capable of performing a variable display (or a variably displayed) of patterns (pictures) and in which the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result during a game round in which the opening and closing execution mode is activated.

In other words, it is a display state in which some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 are displayed as still patterns, thereby displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a jackpot pattern combination that corresponds to the occurrence of a high frequency winning mode, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows are displayed as varying patterns.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a jackpot combination corresponding to the occurrence of a high frequency winning mode on a preset effective line within the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, and while the reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern row.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while a reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen. In addition, when a reach display is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time in the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is then acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the pattern variation by the pattern display device 75.

When determining the variable display time on the symbol display device 75 and main display unit 81 (specifically, the operation port display sections D1 and D2), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area 623 in the ROM 603 are referenced. Also, the MPU 602 uses the value of the win random number counter C1 and the value of the win type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop result on the result display section for the operation port, and when making this determination, a stop result determination table stored in the ROM 603 is used.

The release random number counter C4 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 249, and return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 249). The release random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role memory area 633 of the RAM 604 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role 71 should be controlled to an open state based on the stored value of the release random number counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric role 71 is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric role 71 is not controlled to an open state.

(Various processes executed by the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 to progress the game in each game round, with reference to the flow chart in Fig. 66. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals).

In step S4001, a process of reading the various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S4002, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the next step S4003, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

In the next step S4004, a winning process for through is executed in response to a win at the through gate 66. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and if the flag is stored, the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in the step S4003 is stored in the electric role storage area, provided that the number of reserved roles stored in the electric role storage area is less than four. Then, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S6004, the process proceeds to step S6005, where the winning process for the actuation port associated with the winning at actuation ports 62a and 63a is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends.

(Winning process for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 67 and 68.

In step S4101, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the lower operating port 62a (a prize). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S4102, and a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In the following step S4103, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the lower operating port 62a to the hall computer HC in the gaming hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a. After that, in step S4104, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4101 that the game ball has not entered the lower operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S4105. In step S4105, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (won) the right operating port 63a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the right operating port 63a, the process proceeds to step S4105, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball. The prize ball command set in steps S4102 and S4105 is sent to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described below.

In the next step S4107, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the right operating port 63a to the hall computer HC in the game hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the right operating port 63a. Then, in step S4104, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in both steps S4101 and S4105, i.e., if no ball has entered either the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a, the winning process ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 68, we will explain the information acquisition process of step S4104.

(Information Acquisition Processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether the start pending memory number N stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632, specifically, the start pending memory number N related to the ball entry part that triggered the information acquisition process among the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a, is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If the start pending memory number N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step S4202, the start pending memory number N of the corresponding ball entry part is incremented by 1, and in step S4203, the total reserved number stored in the reserved number storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S4204, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in the above step S4003 are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area RE for the operating port, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S4202. After executing the storage process, proceed to step S4205.

In step S4205, a display update process is executed for the reserved number display sections S1 and S2 of the main display unit 81 (main display section D). In the display update process, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the lower operating port 62a, the display in the reserved number display section S1 for the lower operating port is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the right operating port 63a, the display in the reserved number display section S2 for the right operating port is updated.

The lower actuation port reservation number display S1 is made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the reservation number associated with the lower actuation port 62a. If the reservation number associated with the lower actuation port 62a increases as a result of a current win, the number of lit LEDs is increased accordingly. The right actuation port reservation number display S2 is similarly made up of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs matches the reservation number associated with the right actuation port 63a. If the reservation number associated with the right actuation port 63a increases as a result of a current win, the number of lit LEDs is increased accordingly.

In the following steps S4206 and S4207, the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710, which are the sub-side (auxiliary) control devices, are made to recognize that a win has occurred in the actuation ports 62a and 63a, and a confirmation process for the hold notice and a process for setting a hold command, which are processes for executing the hold notice described below, are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes information as to which of the lower actuation port 62a and the right actuation port 63a the win is based on.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S4207 is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710 in the external output process of the normal process described below. Upon receiving the hold command, the display control device 710 executes processing to change the display in the hold number display area to correspond to the increase in the number of holds.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 69. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S4301 to S4306 is executed as regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S4308 and S4309 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S4301. In the external signal output processing in step S4301, output data such as the timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if various commands such as performance commands such as a fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, hold commands, and shift commands described below are set, they are sent to the notification/performance control device 143.

Next, in step S4302, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

In the next step S4303, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs a jackpot determination, sets the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 75, and controls the display of the main display unit 81.

After executing the game count control process in step S4303, the process proceeds to step S4304, where the game state transition process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game count control process in step S4303 and the game state transition process in step S4304 will be described later.

In the next step S4305, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the electric role 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 63. In this electric role support process, an electric role opening lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 71 is opened using numerical information acquired from the opening random number counter C4 stored in the electric role memory area 633 of the RAM 604, and if the electric role opening state is selected, the opening and closing process of the electric role 71 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit DS is performed to inform the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the electric device 71 can be set to a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of these support modes is made during game state transition processing. If a high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 after this processing, the high-frequency support mode is selected, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is selected.

In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role device 71 opens when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is selected and the electric role device 71 opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

Incidentally, when switching to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode.

After that, in step S4306, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply/launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the game area PE.

In the next step S4307, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether one period (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, during the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S4308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 604. In addition, in step S4309, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 604.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S4301 to S4306 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game play control process)
Next, the game play control process in step S4303 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 70 to 73.

First, in the game round control process, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 70, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is in the open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S4402 onwards, i.e., the game round start process in steps S4403 to S4405 and the game round progress process in steps S4406 to S4409.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, step S4402 determines whether a game round is in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 are displaying a variable or fixed value. If a game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to steps S4403 to S4405 for processing to start a game round. In the process to start a game round, first, step S4403 determines whether the total number of start reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is "0", this means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632. Therefore, the game round control process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S4404, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 632 for variable display, and in step S4405, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operating port display sections D1 and D2 in the main display unit 81 and the variable display of the pattern display device 75, and then this game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S4404 and the fluctuation start process in step S4405 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S4404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 71.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S4501, the start reservation memory number N stored in the reservation number memory area FE that is the target of the current setting process and the common reservation number CRN are decremented by 1. In the following step S4502, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

Then, in step S4503, a process is executed to shift the data (i.e., reserved information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the reserved area RE. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 downwards in sequence, clearing the data in the first area Ra1 and shifting the data in each area in the following order: second area Ra2 → first area Ra1, third area Ra3 → second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4 → third area Ra3, fifth area Ra5 → fourth area Ra4, sixth area Ra6 → fifth area Ra5, seventh area Ra7 → sixth area Ra6, eighth area Ra8 → seventh area Ra7.

In the following step S4504, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 143 recognize that a data shift has been made in the reserved area RE. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S4504 is sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/performance control device 143 in step S4301 of the normal process (Figure 69). Upon receiving the shift command, the display control device 710 executes a process to change the display in the reserved number display area Da for the operation port, which will be described later, in response to the reduction in the reserved number.

(Change start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing of step S4405 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S4601, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether or not the reserved information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the win random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win, and if the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win.

In the next step S4602, it is determined whether the result of the win/lose determination process in step S4601 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, the type determination process is executed in step S4603.

In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the hit type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot result. In more detail, if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the lower operating port 62a, the distribution table for the lower operating port 62a is referenced, and if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the right operating port 63a, the distribution table for the right operating port 63a is referenced to perform the type determination.

In the following step S4604, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a special jackpot result (16R special jackpot result, 4R special jackpot result) based on the information identified in the type determination process in step S4603. If it is a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the special jackpot is executed in step S4605, and if it is not a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S4606. Also, if it is determined in step S4602 that the jackpot win is not a win, the stop result setting process for a miss is executed in step S4607. Note that special jackpot results are broadly divided into 16R special jackpot results and 4R special jackpot results. If it is a special jackpot result, it is determined whether it is a 16R special jackpot result or a 4R special jackpot result by the above allocation.

In each stop result setting process from step S4605 to step S4607, information on the type of the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 81 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. Also, in steps S4605 and S4606, information for the MPU 602 to identify whether the win/loss determination result of the current game round is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, in step S4605, a special jackpot flag is stored, and in step S4606, a normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of steps S4605 to S4607, the process for setting the variable display time is executed in step S4608.

(Setting process for variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 73, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the winning/losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the guaranteed winning flag or the normal winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4701, that is, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, it is judged whether or not a reach display will occur on the pattern display device 75 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, a positive judgment is made in step S4702, indicating that a reach display has occurred. When determining whether or not a reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, a reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 603 is referenced.

If a positive judgment is made in either step S4701 or step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703, where the variable display time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and in the following step S4704, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. Thereafter, this setting process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot win, or when the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss and the lottery for reaching the reach is won.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display, which have different variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the reach occurrence variable display time table, and variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained by referencing this table. Note that, regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variable type counter CS, and the reach display corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is determined by referencing this table.

More specifically, the variable display time table for reach occurrence corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that a combination of specific symbols can be displayed statically in the case of a guaranteed jackpot result, and the variable display time is set so that a combination of non-specific symbols can be displayed statically in the case of a normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4702, in step S4705, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 is referenced to obtain the variable display time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, and in step S4706, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, this setting process is terminated.

The variable display time information when a reach does not occur is set so that the more the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that it is not dependent on the number of common reserved numbers CRN, and the less the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time may be. In addition, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected in a situation where the support mode is a high-frequency support mode than in a situation where the number of reserved information is the same, compared with a situation where the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, but this is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and a variable display time that is likely to be selected and a variable display time that is difficult to select may be different between a jackpot win and a miss reach. In addition, a variable display time table for a sure-variable jackpot, a variable display time table for a normal jackpot, a variable display time table for a miss reach, and a variable display time table for a complete miss may each be set individually. As described above, the variable display time for each game is determined using parameters such as whether or not a reach has occurred, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, and the value of the variable type counter CS.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 72), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S4608, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set in step S4609. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes information on the game result, such as information on the special jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, and information on the miss result.

The fluctuation start command and type command set in step S4609 are sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S4301 in the normal processing (FIG. 69). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls the lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The notification/performance control device 143 also transmits the fluctuation start command and type command to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 710 determines the fluctuation display pattern on the pattern display device 75 for that game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls the display of the pattern display device 75 so that the determined fluctuation display pattern is executed. After that, in step S710, the corresponding one of the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 starts the fluctuation display of the pattern, and then ends this fluctuation start processing.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 70), if the main display unit 81 is displaying a variable, the game round progression process of steps S4406 to S4409 is executed. In the game round progression process, first in step S4406, it is determined whether the variable display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of RAM 604 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 73), as described above. In addition, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S4407. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the operation port display sections D1, D2 of the main display unit 81 is changed. After that, this game play control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the variable end process is executed in step S4408. In the variable end process, the information stored in RAM 604 in any of the processes in steps S4405 to S4407 is identified, and the ball entry section display unit is controlled so that the image corresponding to that information is frozen and displayed on the ball entry section display unit.

In the following step S4409, a variation end command is set. After that, this game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S4409 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S4301 in the normal process (Figure 69). The notification/presentation control device 143 sends the received variation end command to the display control device 710 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 710 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a confirmed display (final stop display).

(Game status transition process)
Next, the game state transition processing of step S4304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the game is in the opening and closing execution mode. If the game is not in the opening and closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4802, where it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the changing display of the image on the main display unit 81 (more specifically, the ball entry section display unit) for one game round has ended. If the changing display has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the timing when the variable display has ended, in step S4803, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the normal jackpot flag or the guaranteed jackpot flag is stored in RAM 604. If none of the above flags is stored, this game state transition process is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, in step S4804, a value determined according to the type of jackpot, specifically "16" or "4", is set in the round count counter RC provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. The round count counter RC is a counter for counting the number of times the jackpot opening 311 has been opened. After that, this game state transition process ends.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a positive judgment is made in step S4801, and the process proceeds to step S4805. In step S4805, the large prize opening opening/closing process is executed. In the large prize opening opening/closing process, if the large prize opening 311 is closed, the variable prize opening drive unit 451 is driven to open the large prize opening 311, provided that the round number counter RC is "1" or more. Also, if the large prize opening 311 is open, the variable prize opening drive unit 451 is stopped from being driven, and the large prize opening 311 is closed, provided that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening 311 or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. Note that the flow path switching member 316 built into the upper variable prize opening device 64 operates in a predetermined round during the opening/closing execution mode, but the details of its movement are the same as those in the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the next step S4806, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter RC is "0". If the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the game state transition process ends. If the value of the round number counter RC is "0", in step S4807, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, if a sure-win jackpot flag is stored in RAM 604, the win/lose selection mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Also, if a normal jackpot flag is stored in RAM 604, the win/lose selection mode is set to low probability mode, and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode is ended when 100 consecutive play times have been played, and then the game transitions to the normal game state where the win/lose selection mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S4808, the end process of the open/close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the end process of the open/close execution mode, any stored flags, either the normal jackpot flag or the special jackpot flag, are erased.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of Figure 75, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710.

The notification/performance control board 651 provided in the notification/performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 652. The MPU 652 has built-in ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 652, RAM 654 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 653, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 653 and RAM 654 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 652, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 652 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652, and receives from the main control device 162 game round control commands (game round control information) such as the fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, as already explained. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 652 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 710. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 143 are sent to the display control device 710 with the information format maintained as is.

The display control device 710 includes an MPU 712, which is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 711 on which a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 713 and the work RAM 714 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 712, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/presentation control device 143, or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the various commands received, to control the VDP 715 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 715). More specifically, the MPU 712 executes a process to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 75 based on the commands sent from the notification/presentation control device 143, as well as a process related to the hold notice described below, and executes drawing processing for the VDP 715 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75.

The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 712, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 712 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 714.

The VDP715 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 75. The VDP715 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP715 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU712, video RAM717, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM717 from the character ROM716 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 716 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 716 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The character ROM 716 also has, as part of the above data, a reserved image data storage area 771 in which image data (reserved icon MP) for display in the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 75 and image data for the partition frame to be displayed in the execution target display area Db are stored, and a preview performance image data storage area 772 in which image data to be displayed when a preview performance described below is executed is stored. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 716 and have each character ROM 716 store image data, etc., in a shared manner. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 716 to store JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 713.

Video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 717. Video RAM 717 is provided with a hold display area 781 and an execution display area 782 that correspond to the hold display area NE.

The hold display area 781 has a first unit area through an eighth unit area set to correspond one-to-one with the first area Ra1 through the eighth area Ra8 in the hold area RE for the operating port. In each unit hold display area Da1 through Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 75a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the hold display information (data) written in each unit area. Note that in the unit hold display areas Da1 through Da8 corresponding to unit areas for which no data is set, no image is displayed or the background image of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 is displayed.

The execution display area 782 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 75a, the above-mentioned pending icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 782. Note that if no data is set, the background image on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 is displayed.

Now, with reference to Figures 76 to 77, we will explain the configuration related to the variable display of the patterns for each game round and the contents of the variable display. Figures 76 and 77 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 716 of the display control device 710 prestores data for nine main patterns numbered "1" to "9" (see Figures 76(a) to (i)), and data for sub-patterns not numbered (see Figure 76(j)).

As shown in FIG. 77(a), three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, which are an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 75a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper pattern row Z1, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle pattern row Z2, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", with one sub-pattern between each of these main patterns. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone is composed of 20 patterns, with 10 main patterns arranged.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), the display screen 75a is designed to display three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 fashion. Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen 75a. The display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a guaranteed jackpot result.

In light of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the upper pattern row Z1 can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the lower pattern row Z3 can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a special jackpot result occurs, for example, the same combination of specific symbols is displayed. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, for example, the same combination of non-specific symbols is displayed.

The manner in which the pattern display device 75 changes the patterns is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows can be set to be vertical.

In the display screen 75a, a reserve display area NE is set below the variable display area ME, which includes the variable display area for the upper pattern row, the variable display area for the middle pattern, and the variable display area for the lower pattern. The reserve display area NE is provided with a reserve number display area Da, which is partitioned so that unit reserve display areas Da1 to Da8, the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operating ports 62a and 63a, are lined up in the left-right direction.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls is four when the game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, and four when the game ball enters the right operating port 63a. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a total of eight reserved balls are stored in the order of winning into the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a. Correspondingly, the reserved number display area Da is set with a first unit reserved display area Da1, a second unit reserved display area Da2, a third unit reserved display area Da3, a fourth unit reserved display area Da4, a fifth unit reserved display area Da5, a sixth unit reserved display area Da6, a seventh unit reserved display area Da7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8. Reserve icons MP are displayed in these unit reserved display areas as predetermined reserved display images.

For example, if the number of reserved balls is 0 when the game ball enters the operating port 62a, 63a, i.e., if the current winning brings the number of reserved balls (total number of reserved balls) to 1, the reserved icon MP is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Da1. If the number of reserved balls becomes 4 when the game ball enters the operating port 62a, 63a, the reserved icon MP is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4. Note that Figure 77(b) shows an example where the number of reserved balls is 3.

The pending display area NE also has an execution target display area Db, which is arranged side-by-side with the pending number display area Da (specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1) and displays a pending icon MP corresponding to the number of plays to be executed (being executed). In this embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged to the left of the pending number display area Da, but the positional relationship between these is arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged to the right of the pending number display area Da.

When a game round ends and the next game round begins, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1) shifts (moves) to the execution target display area Db. If there are other hold icons MP displayed in the hold number display area Da, these hold icons MP will also shift to the (adjacent) unit hold display area closer to the execution target display area Db. For ease of explanation, hereafter, the side closer to the execution target display area Db will be referred to as the "downstream side" and the side opposite the execution target display area Db as the "upstream side."

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 75a is identified by the notification/performance control device 143 with reference to commands from the main control device 162, and the details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 710 based on the identification results. Specifically, the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 executes a variable display control process as part of periodic processing that is started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and this variable display control process identifies the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 78.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, first in step S4901, it is determined whether a game turn is in progress, i.e., whether the variable display or final display of the patterns for one game turn is being executed on the pattern display device 75. If it is determined that a game turn is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S4902, where it is determined whether a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4902, the variable display control process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4902, the variable start process described below is executed in step S4903, and then the variable display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S4901, if a positive judgment is made in step S4901, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S4904. In step S4904, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S4904, the process for during fluctuation is executed in step S4905, and then this fluctuation display control process is terminated. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4904, the process proceeds to step S4906, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the pattern variation display and the currently being performed presentation are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the hold information for the relevant game round. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform a presentation corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 710, and this variation end process is terminated. The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 controls the pattern display device 75 to confirm and stop the pattern based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing for starting fluctuations)
Here, referring to the flowchart of Fig. 79, a supplementary explanation will be given on the fluctuation start processing of step S4903. The fluctuation start processing is a processing for starting the presentation for a game round based on receiving a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the fluctuation start processing, settings such as a reach display and a hold notice presentation described later are performed as presentations for a game round. Here, the processing related to the setting of the reach display is explained, and the processing related to the setting of the hold notice presentation will be explained later.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S5001, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S5001, the type command received together with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on the game result, such as information on the result of a guaranteed jackpot, information on a normal jackpot, or information on a miss result, is identified from the command. Then, in step S5001, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the identified information, and the identified information is stored in a register of the MPU 652.

In the next step S5002, based on the information obtained in step S5001, it is determined whether the game result of the game to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the next step S5003, a jackpot performance setting process is executed.

The jackpot performance setting process determines the stopping result of the jackpot symbols (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, if the result is a special jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols marked with odd numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5. Also, if the result is a normal jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols marked with even numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5.

The type of main pattern and the effective lines L1-L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result occurs are determined randomly by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 store each of the effective lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the big win pattern is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, in the case of a big win result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, the variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 is obtained, and the performance pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. Note that in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 to determine the performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

If it is determined in step S5002 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S5004. In step S5004, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the process proceeds to step S5005, where a process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence is executed. In the process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence, the outline of the effect and the final combination of symbols to be stopped are determined. The former is similar to the process in step S5003 above, so the explanation will be used here. Since this process corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbols are determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to a jackpot result. In other words, the stop result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the type of combination of miss reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, the stop results on the effective lines are determined so that the same combination of symbols is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 that are the same as the symbols that form the reach line are finally stopped at a stop position that is shifted forward or backward from the reach line. After that, a process is executed to store the information on the determined stop results in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S5004 that a reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S5006. In step S5006, the outline of the presentation for a complete miss and the final combination of symbols to be stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined so that a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any one of the processes in step S5003, step S5005, or step S5006, the process proceeds to step S5007. In step S5007, a process is executed in which commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in step S5003, step S5005, or step S5006 are output to the display control device 710 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 712 of the display control device 710 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S5007, in the following step S5008, a process to start the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above steps S5003, S5005, and S5006, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Here, we will provide additional information on the variable display modes of the patterns displayed on the pattern display device 75 (display screen 75a) based on Figure 80. Figure 80(a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and Figure 80(b) and the group of Figures 80(b) are schematic diagrams showing an overview of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
80(a), the variable display modes of the symbols executed on the display screen 75a are roughly divided into five types: complete miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and it is possible to grasp the outline of the variable display mode for each game based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162.

Specifically, the variable display time for a complete miss is "3 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of reserved balls), the variable display time for normal reach A is "10 sec", the variable display time for normal reach B is "15 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A, the variable display time for super reach A is "16 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A and B, the variable display time for super reach B is "17 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for super reach A, and the variable display time for super reach C is "18 sec" which is longer than the variable display time for other super reaches A and B. For example, if the information on the variable display time given to the command from the main control unit 162 is "15 sec", the notification/performance control unit 143 will understand that normal reach B should be executed.

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the big win result, Super Reach C > Super Reach B
The order of selection is: > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. In the game round that corresponds to a miss, the order of selection is: Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B >
The number of times that the number of reels is likely to be selected is determined by the number of reels that are likely to be selected, followed by Super Reach C. In other words, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot.

Here, the variable display mode of normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is ended (stopped and displayed), and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is ended (stopped and displayed). In this way, when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 77), forming a reach line. Then, when the reach line is formed, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed, resulting in a reach display (reach variable display). After the reach display is reached, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, ending the variable display. When the same symbols as those constituting the reach display stop on the reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won, and when other symbols stop on the same reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the final combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed is maintained as is for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the current game round continues until the stopped display period has elapsed, and when the stopped display period has elapsed, it is permitted to move on to the next game round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach line is formed, but the method for setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display begins to when the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of the super reach A, B, C will be described based on the variable display mode of the normal reach A, B described above. As shown in FIG. 80 (b2) to (b4), for the super reach A, B, C, the above-mentioned reach line is formed through the same process as for the normal reach A, B. Then, after the reach line is formed, a predetermined character is displayed as a video in conjunction with the variable display of the middle pattern column Z2, thereby performing a reach performance. Specifically, in the super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), in the super reach B, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in the super reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(Regarding notice of reservation)
In this embodiment, the performance related to the reserved notice, which indicates the contents of the reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, is executed with a predetermined probability before the game round related to the reserved information starts. By executing the performance corresponding to the reserved information that has not yet become the subject of the lottery at a timing before the game round related to the reserved information becomes the subject of the lottery, the player can not only play the lottery result of the reserved information corresponding to the current game round, but also play the lottery result of the reserved information that will be the subject of the lottery later according to the content of the performance, thereby diversifying the game. This can increase the attention to the game.

The hold notice can be broadly divided into those executed in conjunction with the display of the changing patterns in the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a, and those executed in conjunction with changes in the state of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the display screen 75a. Of these, the hold notice executed in the hold display area NE utilizes the hold display on the display screen 75a. Below, the configuration that is the premise of the hold notice, specifically the process for hold display control (hold display control command response process) executed by the MPU 712 of the display control device 710, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 81 (a) and the schematic diagram in Figure 81 (b). The hold display control command response process is a process executed as part of the periodic process that is started at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Hold display control command response processing)
As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the hold display control command response process, first, in step S5101, a hold notice performance setting process is executed. Details of this hold notice performance setting process will be described later. In the following step S5102, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 143. If a positive determination is made in step S5102, in step S5103, the value of the hold number counter (hold memory number SN) provided in various counter areas of the work RAM 714 is incremented by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S5104, a hold display addition process is executed, and this hold display control command response process is terminated.

The pending memory count SN corresponds to the pending display area 781 of the video RAM 717. When setting the display of the pending icon MP in the pending display addition process, pending display information (more specifically, the address of the pending image stored in the pending image data storage area 771) is set in the unit area in the pending display area 781 that corresponds to the pending memory count SN. In each unit pending display area Da1 to Da8 of the pending number display area Da on the display screen 75a, the above-mentioned pending icon MP is additionally displayed according to the data written in each unit area.

For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b1), when a hold command is received in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, i.e., when the hold memory count SN is "2", the hold memory count SN changes from "2" to "3", and hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold display area 781. As a result, as shown in FIG. 81 (b2), the hold icon MP is displayed in the third unit hold display area Da3.

Returning to the explanation of step S5102, if a negative judgment is made in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5105. In step S5105, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 143. If a negative judgment is made in step S5105, the process for handling commands for holding display control is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5105, the process proceeds to step S5106. In step S5106, the value of the pending number counter (pending memory number SN) provided in the pending counter area of the work RAM 714 is decremented by 1.

In the next step S5107, a shift process is executed, and the pending display control command response process is terminated. In the shift process, the pending display information set in the first unit area of the pending display area 781 is moved to the execution display area 782, and the pending display information set in the first unit area to the eighth unit area of the pending display area 781 is shifted sequentially to the lower area side.

Specifically, the pending display information of the first unit area is moved to the execution display area 782, and the pending display information in each unit area is shifted in the following order: second unit area → first unit area, third unit area → second unit area, fourth unit area → third unit area, fifth unit area → fourth unit area, sixth unit area → fifth unit area, seventh unit area → sixth unit area, eighth unit area → seventh unit area, and so on.

For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b1), when a shift command is received in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, i.e., when the number of hold memories is "2", the number of hold memories changes from "2" to "1". As a result, the hold display information in the execution display area 782 is erased, and the hold display information in the first unit area is shifted to the execution display area 782, the hold display information in the second unit area to the first unit area, and the hold display information in the third unit area to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 81 (b3), the hold icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Db and the first unit hold display area Da1.

Here, the hold image data storage area 771 stores hold icons MP of different colors (specifically, four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red) as a group of hold images, and the above address differs depending on the color. When setting the hold display information, the notification/performance control device 143 decides which color to display depending on the presence or absence of the hold notice described above, and this information is incorporated into the hold command by the notification/performance control device 143 when the hold command passes through the notification/performance control device 143. In other words, the display control device 710 reads color information from the received hold command and determines which address corresponds to which color to set as the hold display information.

Next, the process for the hold notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 will be described. The process for the hold notice includes the confirmation process for the hold notice (step S4206 in FIG. 68) and the setting process for the hold command (step S4207 in FIG. 68), and each of these processes is configured to be executed as part of the winning process for the actuation port (see FIG. 67) set as part of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 66), more specifically, as part of the information acquisition process of step S4104. In other words, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process for the hold command are configured to be executed based on the winning of the actuation port 62a, 63a. Below, the confirmation process for the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 82.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for the reserved ball notice, in step S5201, the start reserved ball memory number N and the common reserved ball number CRN stored in the reserved ball number memory area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632 are read out, and the information on the reserved ball number is stored in the register of the MPU 602. After that, in steps S5202 to S5206, it is confirmed whether or not the reserved ball information acquired by the current winning includes information on the big win.

Specifically, first, in step S5202, the information for determining whether or not a jackpot has been determined from the reserved information acquired in step S4204 above based on the current winnings at the actuation ports 62a and 63a is obtained, i.e., the value of the already acquired winning random number counter C1.

In the next step S5203, it is determined whether or not the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode by determining whether or not a high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If it is low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S5204, and a win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced to determine whether the information for determining a jackpot grasped in step S5202 (the value of the win random number counter C1) is included in the information group corresponding to a jackpot win. If it is high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S5205, and a win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the information for determining a jackpot grasped in step S5202 (the value of the win random number counter C1) is included in the information set as a jackpot win.

After step S5204 or S5205, the process proceeds to step S5206, where it is determined whether the information for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won (the value of the winning random number counter C1) obtained in step S5202 corresponds to a jackpot win. If it corresponds to a jackpot win, the jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S5207, and the confirmation process for this pending notice ends.

In the process of step S5207, the information for determining the type of jackpot among the reserved information acquired in step S4204 based on the current winning is obtained, i.e., the value of the already acquired win type counter C2, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S5207 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5206, the process proceeds to step S5208. In step S5208, the information for determining whether or not a miss is in the pending information acquired in step S4204 based on the current winning of the operation ports 62a and 63a is obtained, that is, the value of the already acquired reach random number counter C3.

In the following step S5209, the reach judgment table (reach judgment information group) stored in the reach judgment table storage area (reach judgment information group storage means) of ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the reach judgment information grasped in step S5208 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as a reach win.

After executing the process of step S5209, the process proceeds to step S5210, where it is determined whether the information for reach determination grasped in step S5208 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, in step S5211, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Setting pending commands)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the process of setting the pending command, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602, thereby determining whether or not the information for determining the jackpot was identified as corresponding to a jackpot win in the immediately preceding confirmation process for the pending notice (FIG. 82). If jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S5302, where a pending command corresponding to the jackpot is set. The setting of the above command and the various commands described below are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in RAM 604. In particular, the pending command corresponding to the jackpot includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5301, that is, if it is judged that no jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602, the process proceeds to step S5303, where it is judged whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602, thereby judging whether or not the information for reach judgment was identified as corresponding to the reach occurrence in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 82). If reach occurrence information is stored, a miss reach corresponding hold command is set in step S5304, and if reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete miss corresponding hold command is set in step S5305.

When setting a reserved command in steps S5302, S5304, and S5305, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the reserved command. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to, as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S4608 above. The reserved command set in this way is sent to the display control device 710, and the display control device 710 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. based on the reserved command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of reserved information stored when starting a game round related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting a reserved command for a complete miss, a provisional setting of the variable display time is performed.

After executing the command setting process of step S5302, step S5304, or step S5305, a process of setting the number of reserved items to the reserved command is executed in step S5306. Specifically, the information of the reserved command set above is configured as multiple bytes of information, some of which contain information indicating that the command is a reserved command and information on the type of reserved command, and the number of reserved items can be set.

In step S5306, first, the information on the number of reserved items stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S5201 in the confirmation process for the immediately preceding reserved notice (FIG. 82) is read, and then the read information on the number of reserved items is stored in the bit for the information on the number of reserved items in the reserved command that has already been set, using an arithmetic process such as a logical OR. As a result, the reserved command set in any of the processes in steps S5302, S5304, and S5305 contains information for identifying which reserved information corresponds to that reserved command. After the process in step S5306 described above in detail is executed, this reserved command setting process ends.

The hold command with the information on the number of hold items included in step S5306 is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 by the external output process of step S4301 in the next normal processing (Figure 69). By receiving the hold command, the notification/performance control device 143 determines that the amount of hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 143 also adds hold notice information, which will be described later, to the hold command and sends it to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 executes processes such as hold display and hold notice based on the received hold command.

The method of setting the hold command is arbitrary as long as the display control device 710 can specify whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, in other words, the manner in which the patterns change and are displayed. For example, combinations of hold commands for jackpots, hold commands for reach-to-misses, and hold commands for complete misses are set individually in correspondence with each number of holds, and the hold command setting process can be configured to select one hold command depending on the confirmation result in the hold notice confirmation process (Figure 82).

Next, we will explain the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143. The process related to the hold notice is broadly divided into a command response process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the hold notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the hold command response process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command response process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the pending command response process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 672 of the RAM 654. The command storage area 672 is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored, so that even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area of the command storage area 672 that is the current target for reading. Note that this configuration for reading commands is the same when reading out other commands such as a command to start fluctuations.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 677. The hold information storage area 677 has the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8, and is configured to be able to store one hold information in each area. The hold information stored in each area Rc1 to Rc8 is shifted to the lower area side in order by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3 ... eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the hold information storage area 677 of the notification/performance control device 143, the hold information is also configured to be stored chronologically together regardless of the ball entry destination, similar to the hold ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the hold area RE) of the main control device 162. Specifically, the system identifies the number of pending items included in the currently received command, and stores the various pieces of information listed above in the area corresponding to the identified number of pending items among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice performance described below, and is erased when the setting process for the hold notice performance is completed.

The MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 performs setting processing for the on-hold notice performance based on the information stored in the on-hold information storage area 677. Here, the on-hold notice performance setting processing is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 84. Note that the on-hold notice performance setting processing is a process executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec).

(Setting process for holding notice performance)
In the setting process for the hold notice performance, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold command reception flag has been set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If the determination in step S5401 is affirmative, a lottery process is executed at the time of receiving the hold command in step S5402.

In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery subject for the hold notice is limited to the newly added hold information. In other words, a lottery for the availability of the hold notice is performed based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the currently received hold command out of the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 677 of the RAM 654. This lottery is performed by determining from the stored information whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 674.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM 653, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a hold command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set up so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: Jackpot > Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A > Complete Miss.

Returning to the explanation of step S5401, if a negative judgment is made in step S5401, i.e., if it is judged that a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S5403. In step S5403, it is judged whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is judged whether or not a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative judgment is made in step S5403, i.e., if neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received, the process for setting up the hold notice performance is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5403, a lottery process is executed at the time of receiving a shift command in step S5404.

In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery subject for the hold notice is all the hold information remaining after the shift. In other words, the lottery for the hold notice is conducted based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 677 of the RAM 654. This lottery is conducted individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is specified to be the most recent first (eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7 → ... → first area Rc1). For example, if the common hold number CRN is "2", first the lottery is conducted based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if this lottery is not successful, the lottery is conducted based on the information stored in the first area Rc1.

In particular, in this embodiment, as the value of the common hold number CRN increases, the variable display time in the game round corresponding to a complete miss is shortened. Therefore, by giving priority to new hold information as described above, the period of the preview performance when a hold preview is executed can be appropriately secured.

As with the case of receiving a hold command, the lottery method is carried out by determining from the stored information whether the game related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 674.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM 653, the following lottery tables are stored as lottery tables to be used when a shift command is received: a lottery table for a jackpot, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A, a lottery table for a miss super reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach C, and a lottery table for a complete miss.

These tables are set so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: jackpot > Super reach C > Super reach B > Super reach A > Normal reach B > Normal reach A > Complete miss. However, these lottery tables for when a shift command is received are set so that the probability of winning the reserved notice is lower when compared to the lottery tables for when the above-mentioned hold command is received. For example, when comparing lottery tables for jackpots, the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a shift command is received is set lower than the probability of winning when referring to the lottery tables for when a hold command is received.

However, if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall probability of winning is lower than when the hold command was received, but if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the overall probability of winning is set to be higher than when the hold command was received.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the value of the common hold number CRN exceeds the above-mentioned specified number ("4"), the degree of shortening of the variable display time in a game turn corresponding to a complete miss becomes greater compared to when the value of the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the above-mentioned specified number ("4"). While this can speed up the game progress, there is a concern that the monotony of the game progress becomes more noticeable. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the number of holds increases and the shortening of the variable display time becomes noticeable, a hold notice is more likely to occur. This is preferable in terms of speeding up the game progress while preventing a decrease in attention to the game.

After the lottery process of step S5402 or step S5404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the hold notice performance are met in the lottery process. If a negative determination is made in step S5405, i.e., if no win is found in steps S5402 and S5404, the hold notice performance setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5405, a hold notice performance pattern determination process is executed in the following step S5406, and then the hold notice performance setting process is terminated.

When it is decided that a hold notice performance will be performed, the hold information will not be included in the lottery for the hold notice performance until the game round related to the hold information is executed. The information related to this hold notice performance will then be erased when the hold information moves to the execution area.

Here, we will explain the types of hold preview effects (more specifically, preview effects executed in the hold display area NE) with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 85 and 86.

(Types of reserved notice performance)
All of the reserved notice performances have in common that they are configured to suggest the likelihood of a big win by changing the display mode of the reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved display area NE. The display mode (color) of the reserved icon MP is set to four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red. Of these colors, white is the standard, and when the reserved notice performance is executed, the reserved icon MP becomes another color (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the reserved icon MP are set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, so that the likelihood of a jackpot result increases. Specifically, when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a jackpot, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, whereas when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a miss, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of red < yellow < blue < white.

This hold preview effect can be broadly divided into a first type preview effect and a second type preview effect, depending on the display mode (color change) of the hold icon MP. As shown in FIG. 86(a), in a first type preview effect, after the color of the hold icon MP changes, the color of the hold icon is maintained until the corresponding game round is reached (until it moves to the execution target display area Db). In contrast, in a second type preview effect, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the color of the hold icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. In other words, the change to the final color is delayed.

For example, even if the color that will ultimately change is red, it will first change to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation, and then step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher expectation when the hold icon MP shifts. By using these two types of hold preview effects in combination, even if the color has a lower expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a color with a higher expectation by the time the corresponding play round occurs. This prevents attention to the hold preview effects from decreasing too early.

The color of the hold icon MP does not only change in the hold number display area Da, but may also change when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when a hold icon MP that is yellow in the hold number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to red, or when a hold icon MP that is white in the hold number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP may change to another color (blue, yellow, red)

In the second type preview performance, the color of the reserved icon MP changes in the process of moving to the execution target display area Db. However, for the reserved icon MP that is the subject of the second type preview performance, if the operation button 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front door frame 14 is operated at the right time when the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed, the color of the reserved icon MP may suddenly change to the color set as the final target without waiting for the shift operation, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 87. In this way, when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with the behavior of the game ball, a reaction to the operation is generated, thereby increasing the attention paid to the behavior of the game ball. For convenience, in the following explanation, the sudden change in color of the reserved icon MP that is the subject of the second type preview performance to the color set as the final target is referred to as a "special change."

Here, some of the super reach displays shown in this embodiment are operation-responsive reach displays whose progression pattern changes based on the operation of the operation button 35. Specifically, in the operation-responsive reach display, when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with instructions from the gaming machine, the normal reach display progresses to the super reach display, and when no operation is performed, the progress to the super reach display is avoided. In other words, the operation button 35 is the trigger for changing the progression pattern of the reach display. Below, we will explain the process (operation-responsive reach display control process) that is executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 to realize this function.

(Control process for displaying operation-compatible reach)
In the control process for displaying an operation-responsive reach, first, in step S5501, it is determined whether or not a game related to an operation-responsive reach is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S5501, the control process for displaying an operation-responsive reach is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5501, the process proceeds to step S5502.

In step S5502, it is determined whether or not it is currently during a period in which operation of the operation button 35 is being accepted (operation acceptance period). If a negative determination is made in step S5502, the process proceeds to step S5503. In step S5503, it is determined whether or not it is currently the timing to start an operation suggestion. If it is not currently the timing to start an operation suggestion, a negative determination is made in step S5503, and the control process for displaying the operation-compatible reach is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5503, the process proceeds to step S5504.

In step S5504, an operation suggestion start process is executed. Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the operation suggestion is output from the speaker unit 29, and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 710. Upon receiving this operation suggestion command, the display control device 710 displays, on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, a button icon resembling the operation button 35 and a timer gauge indicating the remaining time for the operation as an image suggesting the operation.

Then, in step S5505, the operation acceptance time is set. Specifically, a value equivalent to the acceptance time (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set in an operation acceptance time counter provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654. The value of the operation acceptance time counter is decremented each time periodic processing is executed by the MPU 652.

After that, in step S5506, the operation-responsive reserve change regulation process is executed, and then the operation-responsive reach display control process is terminated. By executing the operation-responsive reserve change regulation process, even if the operation button 35 is operated in conjunction with the ball entering the actuation port 62a, 63a, a change in the color of the reserve icon MP based on the operation is avoided.

Returning to the explanation of step S5502, if a positive judgment is made in step S5502, i.e., if it is during the operation reception time, the process proceeds to step S5507. In step S5507, it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated based on information from an operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35. If the operation button 35 has been operated, a positive judgment is made in step S5507, and the process proceeds to step S5508.

In step S5508, processing for notifying an operation acceptance is executed. In the processing for notifying an operation acceptance, a sound effect corresponding to the operation acceptance is output from the speaker unit 29, and an operation acceptance command is output to the display control device 710. In the display control device 710, based on receiving the operation acceptance command, the above-mentioned button icon is switched to an icon corresponding to the operation, and the timer gauge is made invisible. After executing the processing of step S5508, the process proceeds to step S5509.

In step S5509, it is determined whether the current game round is related to a super reach. If a positive determination is made in step S5509, the process proceeds to step S5510. In step S5510, the process of transitioning to the super reach display is executed, and then the control process for this operation-compatible reach display is terminated. By executing the process of transitioning to the super reach display in step S5510, a character corresponding to the super reach (a girl character, a boy character, or a fairy character) is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5509, i.e., if the current game round does not correspond to a super reach, the process proceeds to step S5511. After the normal reach continuation process is executed in step S5511, the control process for displaying the reach corresponding to this operation is terminated.

In this embodiment, the operation suggestion of the operation button 35 occurs not only in some of the game times related to the super reach, but also in some of the game times related to the normal reach. In other words, even if the operation button 35 is operated during the operation acceptance time based on the operation suggestion, it may not progress to the super reach.

Returning to the explanation of step S5507, if a negative judgment is made in step S5507, the process proceeds to step S5512. In step S5512, it is judged whether or not it is the end timing of the reception time. If a negative judgment is made in step S5512, the process proceeds to step S5512. If a positive judgment is made in step S5512, the process proceeds to step S5513. In step S5513, the operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, a sound effect indicating the passage of the reception time is output from the speaker unit 29, and an operation reception time end command is sent to the display control device 710. In the display control device 710, the button icons and time gauge displayed on the display screen 75a are hidden based on the reception of the operation reception time end command. After the process of step S5513 is executed, the normal reach continuation process is executed in step S5511, and then the operation corresponding reach display control process is terminated.

Next, referring to Figure 89, a supplementary explanation will be given of the game board 60 in this embodiment. Figure 89(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 60 showing the lower operating ball entry section 62 and its surrounding structure, and Figure 89(b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 89(a).

(Game Board 60)
89(a), a stage portion 77 on which game balls can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the lower frame portion of the center frame 76. Game balls that flow in from an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 76 are discharged onto the stage portion 77 through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 76.

A groove that slopes downward toward the rear is formed in the portion of the stage portion 77 located above the lower actuation ball entry portion 62, and at the end of this groove is an entrance portion 78a of a guide passage 78 that guides game balls to the lower actuation ball entry portion 62. An exit portion 78b of the guide passage 78 is located directly above the lower actuation ball entry portion 62, and game balls that flow out from this exit portion 78b fall toward the lower actuation ball entry portion 62. Game balls that travel toward the lower actuation ball entry portion 62 via the stage portion 77 and the guide passage 78 are configured to have a higher probability of entering the lower actuation ball entry portion 62 compared to game balls that do not travel via the stage portion 77, etc.

(Lower operating ball entry part 62)
Next, referring to Figure 89 (b), a detailed description will be given of the lower operating ball entrance section 62. The lower operating ball entrance section 62 is made up of a combination of a plurality of housing components 810 and 820. , and a single ball passage 801 is formed inside the ball passage 801. The ball passage 801 is made up of a vertically long upstream passage portion 802 located on the front side of the game board 60 and a vertically long upstream passage portion 803 located on the rear side of the game board 60. The downstream passage portion 804 and the communication passage portion 803 that is long horizontally and connects the upstream passage portion 802 and the downstream passage portion 804 are included, and the communication passage portion 803 is bent at the middle position to form a crank shape. The inlet portion of 802 functions as the lower operating port 62a, and the game balls that flow into the lower operating port 62a are guided to the recovery passage through the upstream passage portion 802 → the communication passage portion 803 → the downstream passage portion 804. do.

A ball detection sensor 850 (more specifically, a magnetic sensor) that detects game balls is disposed in the portion of the communication passage section 803 closer to the upstream passage section 802. The ball detection sensor 850 is configured to output a HI level signal when it detects a game ball, and output a LOW level signal when it does not detect a game ball. The ball detection sensor 850 is connected to the main control unit 162, which monitors the presence or absence of a ball based on the detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 850. Specifically, when the main control unit 162 reads the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850, it determines that a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a based on the detection signal being HI level multiple times in succession.

The housing components 810, 820 that make up the lower operating ball entrance 62 are both transparent, and the game ball passing through the ball passage 801 can be seen through these housing components 810, 820. The ball detection sensor 850 can also be seen from the front side of the gaming machine, and it is possible to visually confirm how the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 62a moves toward the ball detection sensor 850 and passes through the ball detection sensor 850.

As already explained, when a game ball flows into the lower operating port 62a, the color of the reserved icon MP corresponding to the second type of advance notice performance may change by operating the operation button 35 at the right time. In the following explanation, the operation that may trigger a color change of the reserved icon MP (the above-mentioned special change) is referred to as a "special operation" to distinguish it from the operation that triggers the above-mentioned operation-responsive performance.

Next, the special operation determination process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 90. The special operation determination process is executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143.

(Special operation determination process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not a special operation timer counter is operating. The special operation timer counter is a counter that specifies the reception time for a special operation stored in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654, and in step S5601, it is determined whether or not this special operation timer counter is "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S5601, the process proceeds to step S5602. In step S5602, a judgment is made as to whether or not a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor 850. If a negative judgment is made in step S5602, the process for judging the special operation is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5602, the process proceeds to step S5603.

In step S5603, it is determined whether or not it is during the acceptance time for the operation-compatible reach. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation acceptance time counter described above is "0". If a positive judgment is made in step S5603, this special operation judgment process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5604.

In step S5604, a special operation timer counter setting process is executed. In this process, a value corresponding to the special operation acceptance time is set in the special operation timer counter provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654. Then, in step S5605, it is determined whether a special operation of the operation button 35 has been performed. Here, the special operation acceptance time will be explained with reference to Figure 91. Figure 91 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the ball passage 801, and Figure 91 (b) is a timing chart showing the special operation acceptance time.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), the communication passage 803 is horizontally elongated, and the game ball that passes through the communication passage 803 hits the rear wall 821, changes direction, and falls along the downstream passage 804. When the communication passage 803 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, it is difficult to accurately grasp the depth position of the game ball passing through the communication passage 803. In other words, even if it is possible to determine that the game ball is located in the communication passage 803, it is difficult to visually identify the position of the game ball relative to the ball detection sensor 850 (more specifically, the detection position DP of the ball detection sensor 850). In other words, in this embodiment, the ball detection sensor 850 is deliberately arranged in the communication passage 803, where it is difficult to accurately grasp the position of the game ball.

Here, the time for accepting special operations is set to be approximately the same as the time required TX for the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 62a to move from the detection position DP to the rear wall portion 821. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the signal from the ball detection sensor 850 switches from LOW level (OFF) to HIGH level (ON) at timing td1. The MPU 602 of the main control device 162 determines that a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a at timing td2 after timing td1. At timing td2, acceptance of special operations begins. After that, even if the signal from the ball detection sensor 850 switches to LOW level, acceptance of special operations continues, and acceptance of special operations ends at timing td3, which is the above-mentioned required time TX that has elapsed from timing td2.

If balls enter the lower operating port 62a consecutively, a second ball (game ball) may be detected during the reception time, as shown in FIG. 91(b). If a new ball enters during the reception time, the reception time will not be extended based on that ball, and if a special operation is performed during that reception time, the special operation will be associated with the first ball, and the second ball will be excluded from the perspective of the special operation.

Returning to the explanation of step S5605 in FIG. 90, if a special operation has not been performed, a negative judgment is made in step S5605 and this special operation judgment process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5605, the process proceeds to step S5606. In step S5605, it is determined whether the trigger for the timer counter to operate is a winning that exceeds the memory upper limit (reserved upper limit) for the lower operation port 62a. If a negative judgment is made in step S5606, a first special operation flag is set in the various flags storage area 676 of RAM 654 and this special operation setting process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5606, a second special operation flag is set in the various flags storage area 676 of RAM 654 and this special operation setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S5601, if the timer counter for special operation is operating, a positive judgment is made in step S5601, and the process proceeds to step S5609. In step S5609, the timer counter for special operation is updated. In the following step S5610, it is judged whether the value of the timer counter for special operation is "0". If a positive judgment is made in step S5610, the special operation judgment process is terminated as it is, and if a negative judgment is made in step S5610, the processes of steps S5605 to S5608 are executed, and then the special operation judgment process is terminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 92, we will explain the operation-responsive hold change control process executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143.

(Control process for pending change in response to operation)
In the operation-responsive pending change control process, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not a change in the color of the pending icon MP is pending. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change pending flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S5701, the process proceeds to step S5702.

In step S5702, it is determined whether the first special operation flag described above is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a positive determination is made in step S5702, the process proceeds to step S5703.

In step S5703, it is determined whether the newly added pending information corresponds to the second type of preview performance. If it does not correspond to the second type of preview performance, a negative determination is made in step S5703, the first special operation flag stored in the various flags storage area 676 of RAM 654 is erased, and this operation-responsive pending change control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5703, the process proceeds to step S5704.

In step S5704, it is determined whether or not pending changes corresponding to special operations are currently being restricted. As explained in the control process for operation-responsive reach display in FIG. 88, in a game round in which an operation-responsive reach display is performed, from the time when an operation suggestion is made with the operation button 35 until the end of the game round, pending changes are restricted, although special operations are accepted. In such a case, a negative determination is made in step S5704 and the process proceeds to step S5705.

In step S5705, a first forced change process is executed. In the first forced change process, a sound effect corresponding to the first forced change is output from the speaker unit 29, and a first forced change command is output to the display control device 710. This first forced change command includes information for identifying the reserved information (reserved icon MP) that is the target of the forced change. Based on receiving the first forced change command, the display control device 710 changes the color of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the second type preview performance to the color that would normally step up and eventually change to (the special change described above).

For example, in the example shown in Figure 93 (a) → Figure 93 (b), the reserved information newly acquired based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a corresponds to the second type of advance notice performance. When this reserved information is acquired, the operation button 35 is operated to coincide with the timing of the game ball passing through the ball detection sensor 850 of the lower operating port 62a, and the timing matches perfectly, so that the color of the reserved icon MP added last is forcibly changed to the color that would have ultimately changed to in the above-mentioned second type of advance notice performance, omitting a step-up.

Returning to the explanation of step S5704, if the reserved change corresponding to the special operation is being restricted, a positive judgment is made in step S5704 and the process proceeds to step S5706. In step S5706, a change reservation process is executed. Specifically, the first change reservation flag is set in the various flags storage area 676 of the RAM 654. This prevents the color of the reserved icon MP from being forcibly changed until the reach display ends and the next game round begins, i.e., until a shift of the reserved icon MP occurs.

Returning to the explanation of step S5702, if a negative judgment is made in step S5702, that is, if the first special operation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, it is judged whether or not the second special operation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If the second special operation flag is not stored, a negative judgment is made in step S5707, and the control process for pending change corresponding to this operation is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5707, the process proceeds to step S5708. In step S5708, it is judged whether or not any of the stored pending information corresponds to the second type of preview performance. If a negative judgment is made in step S5708, the second special operation flag stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 654 is erased, and the control process for pending change corresponding to this operation is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S5708, the process proceeds to step S5709.

In step S5709, as in step S5704, it is determined whether or not the pending change corresponding to the special operation is being restricted. If a negative determination is made in step S5709, a second forced change process is executed in step S5710, and then the pending change control process corresponding to this operation is terminated.

In the second forced change process, a sound effect corresponding to the second forced change is output from the speaker unit 29, and a second forced change command is output to the display control device 710. This second forced change command includes information for identifying the reserved information (reserved icon MP) that is the target of the forced change. Based on receiving the second forced change command, the display control device 710 changes the color of the reserved icon MP that is the target of the second type of preview performance (special change) to the color that would normally be changed to after stepping up. Note that unlike the first forced change process, in the second forced change process, there may be multiple reserved icons MP that are the target of the special change.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 94(a) → Figure 94(b) → Figure 94(c), the third reserved information acquired based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a corresponds to the second type of advance notice performance. After the number of reserved information stored reaches the upper limit, the operation button 35 is operated aiming at the timing when the game ball passes the ball detection sensor 850 of the lower operating port 62a, and the timing matches perfectly, so the color of the third reserved icon MP is forcibly changed to the color that is supposed to change last in the above-mentioned second type of advance notice performance, omitting the step-up.

Returning to the explanation of step S5709, if the reserved change corresponding to the special operation is being restricted, a positive judgment is made in step S5709 and the process proceeds to step S5710. In step S5710, a change reservation process is executed. Specifically, a second change reservation flag is set in the various flags storage area 676 of RAM 654. This prevents the color of the reserved icon MP from being forcibly changed until the reach display ends and the next game round begins, i.e., until a shift of the reserved icon MP occurs.

Returning to the explanation of step S5701, if a positive judgment is made in step S5701, i.e., if the first change pending flag or the second change pending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S5712. In step S5712, it is determined whether it is time to shift the pending information. If a negative judgment is made in step S5712, the process directly ends this operation-responsive pending change control process. If a positive judgment is made in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S5713.

In step S5713, a forced change process is executed. Specifically, if the first change reservation flag or the second change reservation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654, the reserved icon MP that was the subject of reservation is identified, and a forced change command is output to the display control device 710. This forced change command includes information for identifying the reserved information (reserved icon MP) that is the subject of the forced change. Based on receiving the forced change command, the display control device 710 changes the color of the reserved icon MP that is the subject of the second type preview performance to the color that would normally change after stepping up. Thereafter, the change reservation flag stored in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654 is erased, and this operation-responsive reserved change control process is terminated.

The eighth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In this embodiment, the display of the reserved icon may change to one with higher expectations by operating the operation button 35 (corresponding to the "operation means") in accordance with the timing when the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion (lower operation port 63a) of the lower operation ball entrance portion 63 passes the detection position DP of the ball detection sensor 850 (corresponding to the "ball detection means"). In this way, by configuring the operation button 35 to generate a reaction (response) to the operation when it is operated at the appropriate timing in accordance with the movement of the game ball, players who are expecting such a reaction can be encouraged to pay attention to the movement of the game ball. By adding such a new game that has never been seen before, it is possible to dramatically increase the level of attention to the game.

The game ball that flows into the lower operating port 63a is detected by the ball detection sensor 850 after moving from the vertically extending upstream passage section 802 to the approximately horizontally extending communication passage section 803. By quickly guiding the game ball that flows into the lower operating port 63a to the communication passage section 805 by the vertically extending upstream passage section 802, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of congestion of game balls near the lower operating port 63a. Since the communication passage section 803 extends approximately horizontally, the acceleration of the game ball is reduced compared to the upstream passage section 802. With this configuration, the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 with reduced acceleration, and it is possible to prevent the operation aimed at the timing of the ball detection sensor 850 passing from becoming excessively difficult. Therefore, the above-mentioned attention-increasing effect can be preferably exerted.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, the response process for the special operation is executed by operating the operation button 35 while the game ball is passing through a predetermined section including the detection position DP and its downstream side in the communication passage section 803. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the operation from becoming overly strict. Here, if a configuration is assumed in which the reception time for the special operation is simply lengthened, there is a concern that the distance between the detection position SP and the game ball when the operation is accepted will become larger, which may cause an unnatural appearance. In this regard, if the communication passage section 803 is configured to extend forward and backward and the reception time for the special operation is lengthened as shown in this embodiment, the unnatural appearance described above can be suitably alleviated because it becomes difficult to accurately determine where the game ball is located in the depth direction.

The ball passage 801 shown in this embodiment is composed of an upstream passage section 802, a connecting passage section 803, and a downstream passage section 804, and the passage sections 802 to 804 are arranged vertically when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By making the ball passage appear as if it were a single vertically long passage when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the moving speed of the gaming ball can be made to appear to decrease when passing through the connecting passage section 803, and to increase again when moving to the third passage section. In this way, by slowing down the apparent moving speed of the gaming ball in the connecting passage section 803, it is possible to ensure a smooth flow of the gaming ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 62a while preventing it from becoming excessively difficult to operate the operation button 35 in time with the passing of the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP).

As described above, in a configuration in which acceptance of a special operation on the operation button 35 is initiated based on the game ball passing through the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP), if the operation button 35 is operated immediately before the ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850, the operation will not be accepted. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by locating the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) in a position in the communication passage section 803 near the boundary with the upstream passage section 802, it is possible to prevent the operation from being performed outside the acceptance period and being wasted.

Ninth embodiment
As shown in the eighth embodiment, in a configuration in which the communication passage portion 803 extends in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 60, a situation occurs in which a plurality of game balls continuously flow into the lower operating port 62a, causing the leading game ball B1 and the trailing game ball B2 to move in series through the communication passage portion 803 (see FIG. 95(a)). When such a situation occurs, the leading game ball B1 is hidden behind the trailing game ball B2 and becomes difficult or impossible to see, making it difficult to visually time the operation of the operation button 35 to coincide with the timing at which the leading game ball B1 passes through the ball detection sensor 850. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the operation button 35 will be easily operated in accordance with the passing timing of the trailing game ball B2, which is relatively easy to see.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the operation timing of the operation button 35 is prevented from becoming overly strict by taking into account the time required for passing through the communication passage section 803 when accepting a special operation of the operation button 35. However, in this configuration, the following game ball B2 may pass through the ball detection sensor 850 during the acceptance time of the special operation related to the preceding game ball B1. If the target of the reserved change becomes the reserved icon MP related to the preceding game ball B1 even though the operation button 35 is operated with the aim of targeting the following game ball B2, this is expected to cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to prevent this discomfort from occurring. Below, we will explain the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment.

When consecutive balls enter as described above, that is, when the subsequent game ball B2 passes through the ball detection sensor 850 during the reception time of the special operation related to the preceding game ball B1, the special operation association is switched from the preceding game ball B1 to the subsequent game ball B2 at the timing when the subsequent game ball B2 passes through the ball detection sensor 850. Below, with reference to FIG. 95(b), the flow of switching the association when the event shown in FIG. 95(a) occurs will be explained. Note that in FIG. 95(b), the reception time set in the eighth embodiment is indicated by a two-dot chain line for comparison with the eighth embodiment described above.

In the example shown in FIG. 95(b), it is determined that the leading game ball B1 has entered the game at the timing te1, and acceptance of a special operation targeting the leading game ball B1 is started at this timing te1. It is determined that the following game ball B2 has entered the game at the timing te2, which is before the timing te3 when the acceptance time set at the timing te1 has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), this is because the trailing game ball B2 may have passed the ball detection sensor 850 before the leading game ball B1 moves from the communication passage section 803 to the downstream passage section 804 (while remaining in the communication passage section 803). In this case, the reception time is reset at the timing of te2, effectively extending the reception time, and the association of the special operation is switched from the leading game ball B1 to the trailing game ball B2. In other words, the special operation is associated with the leading game ball B1 from the timing of te1 until just before the timing of te2, whereas the special operation is associated with the trailing game ball B2 from the timing of te2 until the timing of te4.

This configuration can prevent the above inconvenience from occurring. Also, by avoiding a single special operation being associated with two balls scoring before and after, it is possible to prevent the player from getting the impression that the timing of the operation can be approximate. This is preferable in terms of increasing the player's sense of satisfaction when the special operation is performed in time with the ball scoring, and the player is successful in the special operation.

Tenth embodiment
As shown in the eighth embodiment, when the communication passage 803 is configured to extend in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 60 and the reception time of the special operation is set taking into account the time required to pass through the communication passage 803, the length of the reception time depends on the length of the communication passage 803 (thickness of the game board 60). One of the features of this embodiment is that the constraint on the thickness of the game board 60 is relaxed. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96, focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 60.

The ball passage 801X provided in the lower operating ball entry section 62X is composed of an upstream passage section 802X located forward of the front surface of the game board 60, a communication passage section 803X extending in the thickness direction of the game board 60, and a downstream passage section 804X, as in the eighth embodiment. The rear end portion of the communication passage section 803X is aligned vertically with the back surface of the game board 60, and has a shorter overall length than the communication passage section 803X shown in the eighth embodiment. The upstream portion of the downstream passage section 804X is offset forward from the downstream portion, and runs vertically through the inside of the opening 79 formed in the game board 60.

As a result, the time required to pass through the communication passage portion 803X shown in this embodiment is shorter than that of the eighth embodiment. In addition, the time required to accept a special operation is also shorter than that of the eighth embodiment.

With this configuration, the reception time can be set according to the passage length of the communication passage section 803X to prevent special operations from becoming overly strict, while also preferably preventing a situation in which a leading game ball becomes hidden behind a trailing game ball and becomes difficult or impossible to see when multiple game balls flow into the lower operating port 62a in succession. This is preferable in terms of ensuring opportunities to perform special operations aimed at leading game balls and opportunities to perform special operations aimed at trailing game balls.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration is the same as that of the eighth embodiment in that the operation button 35 is operated (special operation) in accordance with the timing when the game ball passes the ball detection sensor 850, and the change in the reserved icon MP corresponding to the second type of advance notice performance is executed in advance, but the specific configuration for realizing this function (for example, the relationship between the special operation and the ball entry detection) is different from that of the eighth embodiment. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment.

The housing component 801Y of the lower actuation ball entrance 62 shown in this embodiment is colored and opaque, and as shown in the partial cross-sectional view of Figure 97, the ball passage 801 formed therein, the game ball passing through the ball passage 801, the ball detection sensor 850, etc. cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine, which is a difference from the eighth embodiment. In other words, in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the lower actuation port 62a passes the ball detection sensor 850 cannot be visually confirmed. Therefore, when trying to operate the operation button 35 in time with the ball passing through the ball detection sensor 850, it is necessary to predict the timing of the passage to some extent.

As shown in FIG. 98, when it is determined that a ball has passed through the ball detection sensor 850 and a ball has entered the game, a reserved icon MP is quickly added to the reserved display area NE of the pattern display device 75 (display screen 75a). If visual confirmation is not possible as described above, the player may look at the reserved display area NE instead of the game ball heading toward the lower operating port 62a, and the operation button 35 may be operated at the timing when the reserved icon MP is added. If such an operation is accepted as a special operation, there is a concern that the effect of increasing attention to the game by predicting the passing timing will not be fully achieved. In this embodiment, the relationship between operation detection and ball entry detection is devised to avoid such inconvenience. Below, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 99, the special operation determination process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 will be described.

(Special operation determination process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S6001, it is determined whether or not the winning waiting timer counter CW provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654 is in operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning waiting timer counter CW is "0." If a negative determination is made in step S6001, the process proceeds to step S6002.

In step S6002, it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated based on a detection signal from an operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35. The operation detection sensor is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and is configured to output an OFF signal (LOW level signal) if no operation is being performed, and to output an ON signal (HI level signal) if an operation is being performed. The MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 determines that an operation has been performed based on the rising edge of the signal. If it is determined that no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S6002, and the special operation determination process is terminated as is. If it is determined that an operation has been performed, a positive determination is made in step S6002, and the process proceeds to step S6003.

In step S6003, a process for setting the winning waiting timer counter CW is performed. In this process, when the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 after the operation button 35 is operated (special operation), a value equivalent to the time at which it is deemed that a ball has entered corresponding to that operation (hereinafter referred to as winning waiting time TW) is set in the winning waiting timer counter CW. If a ball enters during the winning waiting time, as in the eighth embodiment described above, a process is executed to forcibly change the color of the reserved icon MP displayed based on this ball entry, provided that the reserved icon MP corresponds to the second type of advance notice performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S6001, if a positive determination is made in step S6001, i.e., if it is determined that the winning waiting timer counter CW is operating, the process proceeds to step S6004.

In step S6004, based on the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a. If it is determined that a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a, a positive determination is made in step S6004, and the process proceeds to step S6006. In step S6006, it is determined whether or not the current ball has entered the lower operating port 62a beyond the upper limit of memory. If a negative determination is made in step S6006, the process proceeds to step S6007. In step S6007, a first special operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S6006, the process proceeds to step S6008, and a second special operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. The change in the pending icon MP based on these first special operation flag and second special flag is the same as in the eighth embodiment.

After executing the processing of steps S6007 and S6008, the process proceeds to step S6009, where the winning wait timer counter CW is cleared (reset) to "0", and then the special operation determination process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S6004, if a negative judgment is made in step S6004, i.e., if it is judged that a ball has not entered the lower operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S6005. After updating the winning waiting timer counter CW in step S6005 (subtracting "1"), the special operation judgment process is terminated.

Here, referring to Figure 100, we will provide additional explanation on the relationship between operation detection and ball entry determination. Figure 100(a) is a schematic diagram showing the ball passage 801, and Figure 100(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between operation detection timing and winning waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), it takes a certain amount of time (required time TY) for the game ball that flows into the lower operating port 62a to pass through the upstream passage section 802 and reach the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP). The winning waiting time TW described above is shorter than this required time TY. Specifically, the winning waiting time TW is defined as the time from when the flow direction of the game ball that has passed through the upstream passage section 802 changes to face toward the rear of the gaming machine until it reaches the ball detection sensor 850.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), at the timing tg1 when the operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35 turns ON, it is determined that the operation button 35 has been operated, and the machine enters a state of waiting for a winning entry into the lower operation port 62a. The state of waiting for a winning entry is released at the timing tg2, which is the winning waiting time TW that has elapsed from the timing tg1. If it is determined that a winning entry into the lower operation port 62a has occurred at the timing tg1 or tg2, the special operation flag is set, and the process of forcibly changing the reserved icon MP is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning entry has occurred before the timing tg1 or after the timing tg2, the machine is not in a state of waiting for a winning entry, and therefore the special operation flag is not set.

The eleventh embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the ball detection sensor 850 cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine as shown in this embodiment, it is difficult to operate the operation button 35 while visually checking the movement of the gaming ball passing through the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP). Therefore, it is possible to encourage a player who is expecting a special change in the reserved icon MP based on a special operation to guess the timing when the gaming ball will pass through the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP). When making such a guess, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the guess by following the movement of the gaming ball with one's eyes until the timing when the gaming ball flows into the lower operating port 62a. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention to the gaming ball, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

In a configuration in which the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed in conjunction with the acquisition of reserved information, there is a possibility that a player may perform an operation at the timing when the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed, rather than guessing the timing of the passing of the game ball. If such an operation were to function effectively, it would draw the player's attention to the reserved display area NE rather than the game ball, which is a concern as it would hinder the effect of increasing attention to the movement of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed by making the corresponding game ball an exception to special operations after the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed.

If a ball detection sensor is placed at or near the lower operating port 62a, the function of encouraging the above-mentioned guesswork is expected to be less effective. This is because it may be possible to follow the movement of the game ball after it has entered by looking into the lower operating port 62a from diagonally above. On the other hand, if the distance from the lower operating port 62a to the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) becomes too large, there is a concern that the responsiveness to ball entry will decrease. In light of these circumstances, there is a technical significance in placing the ball detection sensor 850 in the upstream part of the communication passage portion 803 extending in the thickness direction of the game board 60, as shown in this embodiment, in that it can overcome these issues with a simple configuration.

<Modification 1>
If the operation button 35 is operated again while the winning waiting timer counter is operating, the winning waiting time TW may be reset at the timing of that operation.

<Modification 2>
In the above eleventh embodiment, the reception time for the special operation is secured by including the time before the timing when the game ball passes the detection position DP of the ball detection sensor 850 (the timing when it is determined that the ball has entered the game), but this is not necessarily limited to this. This does not deny the configuration of securing the reception time for the special operation by including the time after the timing when the game ball passes the detection position DP of the ball detection sensor 850. However, as already explained, in the case where the operation button 35 is operated after confirming that the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed in the reserved display area NE, it is difficult to extend the above-mentioned later time in order to avoid judging this as a special operation. Therefore, even if the reception time is secured by including the later time, it is preferable to configure it to include the earlier time as well.

<Modification 3>
In the eleventh embodiment, the winning waiting time TW is defined as the time from the position where the flow direction of the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 802 changes to face the rear of the gaming machine until it passes the detection position DP of the detection sensor 850, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to set at least the time until the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 62a (for example, the game ball that has disappeared into the ball passage 801) passes the detection position DP of the detection sensor 850 as the winning waiting time TW. In other words, it is sufficient that the relationship is 0 < winning waiting time TW < required time TY.

Twelfth embodiment
First, a supplementary explanation will be given of the push-down type operation button 35 shown in the first embodiment. As already explained, the operation button 35 comprises a button member arranged with the pressing operation surface facing upward, a holder that holds the button member so that it can be displaced up and down (from the standby position to the maximum pressing position), and a biasing member that biases the button member to the standby position, and when the player presses the button member, the button member displaces from the standby position to the maximum pressing position against the biasing force of the biasing member. When the player releases the button member upon completion of the operation, the button member returns to the standby position due to the biasing force of the biasing member.

The holder is provided with a stopper portion that prevents the button member from moving further in the pressing direction when it reaches the maximum pressing position, and a stopper portion that prevents the button member from moving further in the protruding direction when it reaches the standby position (more specifically, the maximum protruding position), and the operating stroke of the button member is determined by these stopper portions.

The operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35 is configured to output an ON signal (HI level signal) when the button member is located within a detection range set to include the maximum pressing position, and to output an OFF signal (LOW level signal) when the button member is located outside the detection range (i.e., the standby position). The operation detection sensor is connected to the notification/performance control device 143, and the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 determines whether the operation button 35 has been operated based on the detection signal (detection information) from the operation detection sensor. More specifically, it is determined that an operation has been performed when the detection signal from the operation detection sensor switches to an ON-like signal (when it stands up).

In such a configuration, because the movement from the maximum pressing position to the standby position depends on the biasing force of the biasing member, a certain amount of operation interval may occur when the pressing operation is repeated, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 101. More specifically, the minimum value of the operation interval is the time (0.1 sec in this embodiment) required for the button member pressed to the maximum pressing position to leave the detection range of the operation detection sensor and move to the standby position.

Here, the minimum winning interval when consecutive wins occur at the lower actuation port 62a is approximately 0.05 sec. Because the minimum operation interval depends on the biasing force, it is practically difficult to make the operation interval shorter than the winning interval when consecutive wins occur at the lower actuation port 62a. Due to such circumstances, it is not desirable in terms of promoting the operation of the operation button 35 if it becomes impossible to perform operations in accordance with the timing of the win at the lower actuation port 62a (i.e., the timing when the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850). Therefore, one of the features of this embodiment is that it has been devised to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, the devise of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the eleventh embodiment.

First, referring to FIG. 102, we will explain the special operation determination process executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143.

(Special operation determination process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the winning waiting timer counter CW provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654 is in operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning waiting timer counter CW is "0." If a negative determination is made in step S6101, the process proceeds to step S6102.

In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated based on the detection signal from the operation detection sensor. If the operation button 35 has not been operated, a negative determination is made in step S6102, and the special operation determination process ends. If the operation button 35 has been operated, a positive determination is made in step S6102, and the process proceeds to step S6103.

In step S6103, the interval time (winning interval time TI) between the previous two winnings related to the lower operating port 62a is calculated. The notification/performance control device 143 shown in this embodiment is provided with a real-time clock (RTC), and time information when a winning occurred in the lower operating port 62a is stored as history. In step S6103, the winning interval time TI between the previous two winnings is calculated by referring to the stored history. Note that a monitoring timer counter may be provided instead of the real-time clock, and the winning interval time TI may be determined from the value of the monitoring timer counter.

In the following step S6104, it is determined whether the winning interval time TI calculated in step S6103 is shorter than a predefined first reference time TS1. This first reference time TS1 corresponds to the substantial minimum value of the operation interval time described above (0.1 sec in this embodiment).

If a negative judgment is made in step S6104, that is, if the winning interval time TI calculated as shown in FIG. 103(a) is longer than the first reference time TS1, the process proceeds to step S6105. In step S6105, the process executes the setting process of the winning waiting timer counter CW provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654.

In this setting process, when a game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 after the operation button 35 is operated (special operation), a value equivalent to the time at which it is deemed that a ball has entered corresponding to that operation (hereinafter referred to as the entry waiting time) is set in the entry waiting timer counter CW. If a ball enters during the entry waiting time, similar to the eleventh embodiment described above, a process is executed to cause the above special change to occur on the condition that the pending icon MP displayed based on this ball entry corresponds to the second type advance notice performance.

Returning to the explanation of step S6101, if a positive judgment is made in step S6101, i.e., if it is determined that the winning waiting timer counter CW is operating, the process proceeds to step S6106.

In step S6106, based on the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a. If it is determined that a ball has entered the lower operating port 62a, a positive determination is made in step S6106, and the process proceeds to step S6108. In step S6108, it is determined whether or not the current ball has entered the lower operating port 62a beyond the upper limit of memory. If a negative determination is made in step S6108, the process proceeds to step S6109. In step S6109, a first special operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S6108, the process proceeds to step S6110, and a second special operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. The special change of the reserved icon MP that is executed based on these first special operation flag and second special flag is the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

After executing the processing of steps S6109 and S6110, the process proceeds to step S6111, where the winning waiting timer counter CW is cleared (reset) to "0", and then the special operation determination process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S6106, if a negative judgment is made in step S6106, i.e., if it is judged that a ball has not entered the lower operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S6107. After updating the winning waiting timer counter CW in step S6107 (subtracting "1"), the special operation judgment process is terminated.

Here, we will explain what happens if a positive judgment is made in step S6014. If a positive judgment is made in step S6104, that is, if the winning interval time TI is shorter than the first reference time TS1 as shown in FIG. 103(b), the process proceeds to step S6112.

In step S6112, the elapsed time TP from the subsequent winning to the operation of the operation button 35 is calculated. As described above, the notification/performance control device 143 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC), and time information at which the winning occurred is stored as history. In step S6112, the elapsed time TP is calculated by referring to the stored history. Note that a monitoring timer counter may be provided instead of the real-time clock, and the elapsed time TP may be determined from the value of the monitoring timer counter.

After calculating the elapsed time TP in step S6112, the process proceeds to step S6113. In step S6113, it is determined whether the elapsed time TP is shorter than the second reference time TS2. The second reference time TS2 is a time shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the minimum winning interval time when consecutive wins occur at the lower operating port 62a from the substantial minimum value of the operation interval time described above (0.1 sec in this embodiment), and this second reference time TS2 specifies the time that allows for some delay when the operating button 35 is operated consecutively.

If the result of step S6113 is negative, i.e., if the time from the second ball entry to the current operation has reached the second reference time TS2, it can be assumed that the current operation was performed with the aim of a ball entry that may occur later. Therefore, after the process of setting the winning wait timer counter CW is executed in step S6105 described above, the special operation determination process is terminated.

If the answer is yes in step S6113, that is, if the time from the second ball scoring to the current operation is shorter than the second reference time TS2 as shown in FIG. 103(b), it can be assumed that the current operation was performed with the aim of scoring the second ball. Therefore, the special operation flag is set in each of the processes in steps S6108 to S6111 described above, and the special operation determination process is terminated. Note that in this case, the wait for a winning entry (setting of timer counter CW) as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 103(b) is not performed, and duplicate responses to a single operation of the operation button 35 are avoided.

As described above in detail, when the operation of the operation button 35 is repeated in accordance with successive winnings in the lower operation port 62a, the correspondence with the winnings for the subsequent operations is relaxed to prevent the operation from being wasted. However, in a configuration in which the timing of the winning of the game ball and the operation coincides, the above relaxation may cause a mismatch between the timing of the operation and the timing of the additional display of the reserved icon MP. There is a concern that such a timing mismatch may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to prevent such inconveniences from occurring. The following describes the design with reference to Figures 104 and 105. Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the reserved display additional processing executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143, and Figure 105 is a timing chart showing the flow of the additional display of the reserved icon MP.

(Pending display additional processing)
The hold display addition process is a process for controlling the additional display of hold icons MP based on a hold command received from the main control unit 162.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the pending display addition process, first in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the additional display of the pending icon MP is being delayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an additional delay flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flags storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S6201, the process proceeds to step S6202. In step S6202, it is determined whether or not the winning interval time TI between the winning related to the currently received pending command and the winning immediately before that is shorter than the first reference time TS1. In other words, it is determined whether or not there have been consecutive winnings at the lower operating port 62a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6202, the process of adding a hold icon is executed in step S6203, and then this hold display addition process is terminated. In the process of adding a hold icon, a sound effect indicating a winning entry at the lower operation port 62a is output from the speaker unit 29, and a hold command is transferred to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 displays a hold icon MP on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 based on the reception of the hold command. In this way, when there are no consecutive wins at the lower operation port 62a, the timing of the addition of the hold icon MP on the display screen 75a coincides with the display update timing of the hold number display units S1 and S2, which are directly controlled by the main control device 162.

If a positive judgment is made in step S6202, the pending icon addition delay process is executed in step S6204, and then this pending display addition process is terminated. In the pending icon addition delay process, an addition delay flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of RAM 654. This causes a slight delay in the additional display of the pending icon MP.

Returning to the explanation of step S6201, if a positive judgment is made in step S6201, i.e., if an additional delay flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S6205.

In step S6205, it is determined whether any of the delay end conditions is met, such as the operation of the operation button 35 or the passage of the second reference time. If a negative determination is made in step S6205, the pending display addition process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S6205, the process proceeds to step S6206.

In step S6206, a delay release process is executed. Specifically, the additional delay flag stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654 is erased. After that, in step S6207, a hold icon addition process is executed, and then the hold display addition process is terminated.

In the hold icon addition process, a sound effect indicating the addition of a hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29, and the hold command that was reserved for transfer is sent to the display control device 710. Based on receiving the hold command, the display control device 710 displays an additional hold icon MP in the hold display area NE of the display screen 75a. Note that the hold number display sections S1 and S2 of the main display unit D, which is directly controlled by the main control device 162, are updated when a winning entry occurs in the lower operation port 62a, but the hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the hold display area NE of the display screen 75a at a later time. In other words, when consecutive winning entries occur in the lower operation port 62a, a discrepancy will occur between the display of the hold number display sections S1 and S2 and the display in the hold display area NE.

Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 105, we will provide additional explanation on the flow of additional display of the reserved icon MP. In Figure 105, it is assumed that consecutive wins occur and each win corresponds to the second type of preview performance, and an example is shown of the case where the operation button 35 is repeatedly operated in accordance with each win. In the following explanation, the first win will be distinguished as the "early win" and the second win as the "later win".

When a previous winning entry into the lower operating port 62a occurs, the number of reserved balls increases from "1" to "2". At this point in time, a reserved ball icon MP is additionally displayed in the reserved ball number display area Da (more specifically, the second unit reserved ball display area Da2) on the display screen 75a, and the number of lit LEDs in the reserved ball number display area S1 for the lower operating port of the main display D changes from "1" to "2". The previous winning entry is the subject of a second type preview performance, and it has been decided that the color of the final reserved ball icon MP will be red.

The operation button 35 is operated before the previous winning occurs in the lower operating port 62a, and the previous winning occurs during the winning waiting time based on that operation, so it is determined that a special operation has been performed. Therefore, when the reserve icon MP is to be additionally displayed in the second unit reserve display area Da2, the color of the reserve icon MP is initially red.

A later win occurs immediately after an earlier win. When this win occurs, the number of reserved balls increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the number of lit LEDs in the lower operation port reserved ball number display section S1 of the main display section D changes from "2" to "3". However, because the winning interval time TI from the earlier win to the later win is shorter than the first reference time TS1, the additional display of the reserved ball icon MP in the reserved ball number display area Da of the display screen 75a is reserved. This later win is also subject to the second type preview performance, and it has been decided that the color of the final reserved ball icon MP will be yellow.

The operation button 35 is operated on another device immediately after a later winning occurs at the lower operating port 62a, and the elapsed time TP from the later winning to the operation is shorter than the second reference time TS2. In this case, at the timing when the operation button 35 is operated, a hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the hold number display area Da (more specifically, the third unit hold display area Da3) on the display screen 75a, and the hold icon MP is initially yellow.

As described above in detail, by delaying the timing of the additional display of the reserved icon MP to match the timing of the special operation, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort when a special operation is performed in time with the passing of the game ball.

<Modification 1>
The second reference time TS2 is sufficient as long as it takes into account the responsiveness of the operation button 35, and does not necessarily have to coincide with the time required for the button member to return from the maximum depression position to the standby position. For example, it may be a time longer than the time required for the button member to return from the maximum depression position to the standby position.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the timing of additionally displaying the hold icon MP in the hold number display area Da of the display screen 75a is delayed to be asynchronous with the update timing of the display in the hold number display area S1 for the lower operating port of the main display unit D, but this is not limited to this. As with the hold number display area Da, the update of the display in the hold number display area S1 for the lower operating port may be delayed to synchronize the update timing of the display in the hold number display area Da with the update timing of the display in the hold number display area S1 for the lower operating port.

Thirteenth embodiment
In the eighth embodiment and the like, the operation button 35 is operated (special operation) in accordance with the timing when the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 to execute a special change of the reserved icon MP corresponding to the second type of advance notice performance, but in this embodiment, the operation button 35 is operated (special operation) in accordance with the timing when the game ball passes through the lower actuation port 62a, which is the entrance portion of the lower actuation ball entrance portion 62, to execute a special change of the reserved icon MP corresponding to the second type of advance notice performance, which is different from the eighth embodiment. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment.

The housing component 801Y of the lower actuating ball entrance section 62 shown in this embodiment is colored and opaque, and as shown in the partial cross-sectional view of Figure 106, the ball passage 801 formed therein, the game ball passing through the ball passage 801, the ball detection sensor 850, etc. cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine, which is a difference from the eighth embodiment. In other words, in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the lower actuating port 62a passes through the ball detection sensor 850 cannot be visually confirmed. In such a configuration, the player can recognize that the timing of the game ball flowing into the lower actuating port 62a is the timing of winning.

Now, referring to Figure 107, the configuration related to the winning determination in this embodiment will be described. Figure 107(a) is a flow chart showing the winning determination process (corresponding to step S4101) for the lower operating port 62a executed as part of the timer interrupt process by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162, and Figure 107(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the winning determination.

(Winner Determination Process)
107(a), in the winning determination process, first, in step S7001, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 for the lower operation port is at HI level. If the determination in step S7001 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S7002, in which the detection counter for the lower operation port provided in the various counter area 675 of RAM 654 is incremented by "1", and then the winning determination process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S7001, i.e., if the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 for the lower operating port is at a LOW level, the process proceeds to step S7003. In step S7003, it is determined whether the detection counter for the lower operating port is equal to or greater than "3". If a negative judgment is made in step S7003, the winning judgment process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S7003, the process proceeds to step S7004.

In step S7004, a winning flag for the lower operating port is set in the various flag storage area 676 of RAM 654. In the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed thereafter by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the lower operating port 62a based on this winning flag. In the following step S7005, the value of the detection counter is stored in RAM 604. In the following step S7006, the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port is cleared (reset) to 0, and this winning determination processing ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 107(b), we will explain the specific flow of the winning determination. Note that in Figure 107(b), the timing at which the timer interrupt process is executed is indicated by th1 to th5.

The detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 rises from LOW level to HIGH level between the first timer interrupt process (th1) and the second timer interrupt process (th2). At the timing of th2, the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port changes from "0" to "1", but it has not yet reached "3" and has not yet fallen to LOW level, so it is not determined that a win has occurred.

At timing th3, the third timer interrupt process is executed. At this timing th3, the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is at HI level, so the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port increases from "1" to "2." At timing th3, the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port has not yet reached "3" and has not yet fallen to LOW level, so it is not determined that a win has occurred.

At timing th4, the fourth timer interrupt process is executed. At this timing th4, the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is at HI level, so the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port increases from "2" to "3." Although the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port has reached "3" at timing th4, it has not fallen to LOW level, so it is not determined that a win has occurred.

After that, the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 falls from HI to LOW between the fourth timer interrupt process (th4) and the fifth timer interrupt process (th5). When the fifth timer interrupt process is executed at the timing of th5, since the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port is "3" or more and the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is at LOW level, it is determined that a win has occurred and the winning flag for the lower operating port is set.

Next, the special operation determination process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Special operation determination process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the winning waiting timer counter CW provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 604 is operating. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an update permission flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S7101, the process proceeds to step S7102.

In step S7102, it is determined whether or not the operation button 85 has been operated. If the determination in step S7102 is negative, the special operation determination process ends. If the determination in step S7102 is positive, the process proceeds to step S7103.

In step S7103, the update of the winning waiting timer counter CW provided in the various counter area 675 of the RAM 654 is permitted. Specifically, an update permission flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. Thereby, from then on, whenever the special operation determination process is executed, the winning waiting timer counter CW is incremented by "1". After that, this special operation determination process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S7101, if a positive judgment is made in step S7101, i.e., if an update permission flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S7104. In step S7104, it is determined whether or not a win has occurred in the lower operation port 62a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the win flag for the lower operation port shown in step S7004 above is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of RAM 654. If a negative judgment is made in step S7104, an update process of the win waiting timer counter CW is performed in step S7105, and then this special operation judgment process is terminated. In this update process, the value of the win waiting timer counter CW is incremented by "1".

If a negative judgment is made in step S7104, the process proceeds to step S7106. In step S7106, a judgment criterion setting process is executed. In the following step S7107, it is judged whether or not the operation button 35 was operated at the time when the game ball passed through the lower actuation port 62a, which is the entrance part of the lower actuation ball entry part 62, based on the judgment criterion set in step S7106 and the winning waiting timer counter CW.

Here, the judgment criteria will be explained with reference to Figures 106 and 109. Figure 109 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the judgment criteria and the passing speed of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 106, the game ball that flows into the lower operating port 62a travels through the ball passage 801 toward the ball detection sensor 850. At this time, the time required for the game ball to reach the ball detection sensor 850 varies slightly depending on the moving speed of the game ball when it passes through the lower operating port 62a. In the game board 60 shown in this embodiment, the flow into the lower operating port 62a can be broadly divided into the following three modes. That is, (1) the mode in which the game ball falls from the game nail 69 (the so-called life nail) arranged directly above the lower operating port 62a into the lower operating port 62a, (2) the mode in which the game ball falls from the exit portion 78b of the guide passage 78 into the lower operating port 62a, and (3) the mode in which the game ball falls from the upper surface of the stage portion 77 into the lower operating port 62a. In these three modes, the drop distance increases in the order of height position H1 of the nail < height position H2 of the outlet portion 78b < height position H3 of the stage portion 77, and the inflow speed into the lower operating port 62a and the passing speed of the ball detection sensor 850 also increase in the same order.

The passing speed at the ball detection sensor 850 affects the time that the detection signal output from the ball detection sensor 850 is maintained at a HI level. Specifically, if the passing speed is slower, the time that the signal is maintained at a HI level will be longer, and the number of times that the HI level is detected before the detection signal falls to a LOW level will be slightly more.

In a configuration in which the timing at which the operation button 35 was operated after the ball detection sensor 850 detects a win is calculated backwards to determine whether the operation button 35 was operated at the time the game ball passed through the lower operation port 62a, the slight difference in speed described above can cause a deviation in the determination. In this embodiment, in order to suppress such deviations, the passing speed of the game ball is taken into account when setting the above determination criteria.

As shown in FIG. 109, when the gaming ball falls from height position H1, the expected passing speed is lower than when it falls from other height positions H2 and H3. As explained in step S7005 of the winning determination process, in this embodiment, the number of times the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is determined to be at HI level is stored, so the passing speed of the gaming ball can be estimated by referring to this stored number. A determination criteria table that specifies the correspondence between the number of times it is determined to be at HI level and the determination criteria is stored in ROM 653. If the number of times it is determined to be at HI level is nine or more, the first reference range is set as the determination criteria by referring to this table.

When the game ball falls from height position H2, the expected passing speed is higher than when it falls from height position H1, and the expected passing speed is lower than when it falls from height position H3. If the number of times it is judged to be at HI level is between 6 and 8, the table is referenced to set a second reference range as the judgment criterion.

When the game ball falls from height position H3, the expected passing speed is higher than when it falls from the other height positions H1 and H2. If the number of times it is judged to be at the HI level is between 3 and 5, this table is referenced to set a third reference range as the judgment criterion.

The first to third reference ranges each specify the lower and upper limits of the winning waiting timer counter CW, with the lower limit increasing in the order of the third reference range < the second reference range < the first reference range, and the upper limit also increasing in the order of the third reference range < the second reference range < the first reference range. This takes into consideration the fact that the lower the expected passing speed, the longer the time it takes from when the game ball flows into the lower operating port 62a to when it passes through the ball detection sensor 850. In particular, the upper limit is set to match the timing when the game ball passes through the lower operating port 62a, and the lower limit is set to match the timing before the game ball that has passed through the lower operating port 62a reaches the ball detection sensor 350. In other words, in determining whether the operation button 35 was operated in accordance with the ball entering the lower operating port 62a, not only the timing when the game ball flows into the lower operating port 62a but also a slight time leeway is provided after that timing. Additionally, the length of the first reference range is slightly longer in the order of third reference range < second reference range < first reference range.

Returning to the explanation of step S7107 in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the value of the winning waiting timer counter CW is within the reference range (first reference range to third reference range) set in step S7106. If a negative judgment is made in step S7107, the winning waiting timer counter CW is cleared (reset) to 0 in step S7111, and then this special operation determination process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S7107, the processes of steps S7108 to S7111 are executed, and then this special operation determination process ends. Note that explanations of steps S7108 to S7110 are omitted because they are the same as the processes of steps S6006 to S6008 and S6108 to S6110.

Below, with reference to Figure 110, we will provide additional explanation on the relationship between the timing of the success or failure of the operation of the operation button 35 (the timing at which the conditions for a special change are met) and the timing of winning for each of the first to third reference ranges.

When a first reference range is set as the judgment criterion, if the operation button 35 is operated during the period from the timing that is a first predetermined time X1 back from the timing at which it is determined that a winning entry into the lower operation port 62a has occurred to the timing at which the first specific time L1 has elapsed from that timing, the special operation is judged to be successful, and if it is outside this range, the special operation is judged to be unsuccessful.

When a second reference range is set as the judgment criterion, if the operation button 35 is operated during the period from the time when it is judged that a winning entry into the lower operation port 62a has occurred back by a second specified time X2 that is longer than the first specified time X1 to the time when a second specified time L2 that is shorter than the first specified time L1 has elapsed from the time back, the special operation is judged to be successful, and if it is outside this range, the special operation is judged to be unsuccessful.

When a third reference range is set as the judgment criterion, if the operation button 35 is operated during the period from the time when it is judged that a winning entry into the lower operating port 62a has occurred back by a third specified time X3 that is longer than the second specified time X2 to the time when a third specified time L3 that is shorter than the second specified time L2 has elapsed from that time, the special operation is judged to be successful, and if it is outside this range, the special operation is judged to be unsuccessful.

The thirteenth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP), it is determined whether the operation button 35 has been operated within a specified time (corresponding to a "specified period") prior to that, and if it has been operated within that specified time, a special change to the reserved icon MP may occur. For this reason, a player who expects a special change to occur can be encouraged to aim for the specified time to perform the operation. When aiming for the specified time, it is possible to improve the accuracy by following the movement of the game ball with one's eyes until the timing when the game ball flows into the lower operating port 62a. Therefore, the player's attention is encouraged to be directed to the game ball, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

The above-mentioned predetermined time is specified to be the time including the timing when the game ball detected by the ball detection sensor 850 passes through the lower operating port 62a.

In a configuration in which the ball passage 801 and the ball detection sensor 850 cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine, the player is more likely to recognize that the ball flows into the lower operating port 62a as a winning entry, even though the passing of the detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) is actually the occurrence of a winning entry. In a configuration in which the ball entry is detected by the ball detection sensor 850 attached to the lower operating ball entry section 62, the ball detection sensor 850 can be placed near the lower operating port 62a to realize a configuration that is in line with the player's recognition, but the effect of suppressing unauthorized access to the ball detection sensor 850 is reduced by placing the ball detection sensor 850 near the lower operating port 62a. In addition, for example, it is possible to separately place a ball detection sensor that detects game balls in the lower operating port 62a and perform a ball entry detection at the lower operating port 62a separately, but such a measure is a factor that prevents the lower operating ball entry section 62 from being made smaller/simpler. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by using the existing ball detection sensor 850 as a configuration that calculates backwards from the timing of game ball detection whether or not an operation was performed at the time the lower operating port 62a passed through, it is possible to effectively prevent the emergence of new issues such as placement space when trying to increase attention to the game.

In a configuration in which the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed in conjunction with the acquisition of reserved information, there is a possibility that an action may be taken in which, rather than guessing the timing of the passing of the game ball, an operation is performed at the timing when the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed. If such an operation were to function effectively, the player's attention would be directed to the reserved display area NE rather than to the game ball, which is a concern as it would hinder the effect of increasing attention to the game ball's behavior as described above. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by making the above-mentioned specified time shorter than the time required for the game ball that has passed through the lower operating port 62a to reach the detection sensor 850 (detection position DP), the game ball will no longer be subject to special operations after the reserved icon MP is additionally displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

As described above, when the lower operating port 62a and the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) are separated, the time required for the game ball to reach the ball detection sensor 850 from the lower operating port 62a varies depending on the passing speed (moving speed) of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, changing the time that serves as the judgment standard depending on the passing speed of the game ball can contribute to improving the judgment accuracy.

In order to realize this technical idea, it is possible to monitor the passing speed of the game ball, for example, by providing a separate speed sensor. However, if a separate configuration is required, this will lead to an increase in the size of the lower actuation ball entry section 62, and there is a concern that restrictions on the placement of the lower actuation ball entry section 62 will become stronger. In this regard, if a configuration is used in which the time used as the judgment criterion is changed based on the length of the detection signal (HI level signal) output from the ball detection sensor 850 as shown in this embodiment, it is possible to easily improve the judgment accuracy by using an existing configuration.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the passing speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage 801 (more specifically, the ball detection sensor 850) is estimated based on the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850, but the specific configuration for estimating or measuring the passing speed of the game ball is arbitrary. For example, a sensor similar to the ball detection sensor 850 may be arranged upstream/downstream of the ball detection sensor 850, and the passing speed of the game ball may be estimated based on the detection results of these detection sensors, or a speed sensor may be provided separately.

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the reference range is divided into three stages, the first reference range to the third reference range, but is not limited thereto. In order to further improve the accuracy of the judgment, the reference range may be set finer (for example, five stages, the first reference range to the fifth reference range). However, in consideration of the fact that the ball entry manner of the game ball is roughly divided into three, that is, the drop from the stage part 77, the drop from the exit part 78b of the guide passage 78, and the drop from the game nail 69 (life nail), the configuration divided into the above three stages has a technical significance of being able to favorably contribute to improving the accuracy while suppressing the increase in the amount of data (program).

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, the number of balls held decreases (slightly) as the game progresses. This can be changed to a configuration in which the number of balls held increases as the game progresses, even in the second normal game state. However, in order to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the second normal game state and the third normal game state such that the latter is more advantageous, it is preferable to configure the increase rate of the number of balls held in the second normal game state to be slower than the increase rate of the number of balls held in the third normal game state, for example.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the time-saving feature ends without a jackpot despite a transition to the high probability mode, the game transitions to a third normal game state that is even more advantageous to the player, including as a means of relief. In view of this relief function, it is sufficient that the third normal game state is at least more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and it is also possible to configure the game so that the rate at which the number of balls decreases is slower than in the second normal game state. Note that, when a configuration in which balls increase in the second normal game state is also used as shown in (1) above, the rate at which the number of balls increases in the third normal game state may be configured to be slower than in the second normal game state.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the time period during which the image changes in the second actuation port display section D2 is configured to be shorter in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state, thereby smoothing the progress of the game in the third normal game state, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the time period during which the image changes in the second actuation port display section D2 is longer in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state, or to configure the time period during which the image changes in the second actuation port display section D2 is the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the confirmed display time of the picture on the display section D1 for the first actuating port is shorter than the confirmed display time of the picture on the display section D2 for the second actuating port, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to make the confirmed display time of the picture on the display section D1 for the first actuating port longer than the confirmed display time of the picture on the display section D2 for the second actuating port. It is also possible to make the confirmed display time of the picture on the display section D1 for the first actuating port the same length as the confirmed display time of the picture on the display section D2 for the second actuating port.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when the game round that is mainly executed is the first ball entry section (for example, the first normal game state in the first embodiment), the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 displays a changing pattern corresponding to the first ball entry section, and when the game round that is mainly executed is the second ball entry section (for example, the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the first embodiment), the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 displays a changing pattern corresponding to the first ball entry section. However, in any normal game state, the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 may be configured to display a changing pattern corresponding to each of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section in parallel. In such a configuration, for example, the display screen 75a may be provided with a first variable display area capable of displaying the variable patterns corresponding to the first ball entry section, a second variable display area capable of displaying the variable patterns corresponding to the second ball entry section, and a third variable display area separate from the first and second variable display areas, and the display state may be switched according to the game state between a display state in which the variable pattern display in the first variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the second variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the second variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the second variable display area is linked to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is switched to a display state in which the variable pattern display in the third variable display area is linked ...

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when the main control device 162 performs a lottery based on the pending information, the display of changing patterns in the operating port display sections D1, D2 in the main display section D and the display of changing patterns in the variable display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a are started simultaneously with the lottery (more specifically, immediately after the lottery), but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to start the display of changing patterns in the operating port display sections D1, D2 and the display of changing patterns in the variable display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a prior to the lottery.

(7) In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the color of the reserved icon MP is changed in advance by performing a special operation in accordance with the timing when the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850, but this is not limited to the above. It is sufficient if some action can be generated in accordance with the player's operation, and for example, the background music may be changed or a specified message may be output. Also, in a configuration in which the setting value can be changed as shown in the sixth embodiment, it is also possible to configure the system to notify information about the setting value (suggest the setting value).

(8) The ball detection sensor 850 shown in the eighth to thirteenth embodiments is configured to output a LOW level signal when no game ball is detected and a HI level signal when a game ball is detected, but this may be modified as follows. That is, the ball detection sensor 850 may be configured to output a HI level signal when no game ball is detected and a LOW level signal when a game ball is detected.

(9) In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments described above, the reserved icon MP is changed in a special way when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with a winning entry into the lower actuation ball entry section 62, but the target is not limited to the lower actuation ball entry section 62. It is sufficient to change the reserved icon MP in a special way when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with the timing of the game ball's arrival at a specific location that the game ball can reach, and the specific location can be the right actuation ball entry section 63, the upper variable winning device 64, the through gate 66, etc.

(10) The ball detection sensor 850 is configured to detect the passage of a gaming ball by a change in magnetism when the gaming ball passes through a through hole formed in the sensor itself, but the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as it can detect the passage of a gaming ball. For example, it is also possible to use an optical sensor having a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element as the ball detection sensor.

It is also optional whether or not the ball detection sensor 850 forms part of the ball passage 801. However, a large distance between the detection position and the ball detection sensor can make it difficult to identify the detection position. Therefore, in order to make the ball detection sensor visible and to make it easier to visually identify the positional relationship between the ball detection sensor and the game ball, it is preferable to place the ball detection sensor next to the ball passage 801 and reduce the distance between the detection position DP and the ball detection sensor.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, a difference is provided so that the lottery based on the ball entering the right-side operating ball entry section 63 (second ball entry section 63, 63e) is more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the ball entering the lower operating ball entry section 62 (first ball entry section 62, 63d). However, this may be changed to provide a difference so that the lottery based on the ball entering the right-side operating ball entry section 63 (second ball entry section 63, 63e) is less advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the ball entering the lower operating ball entry section 62 (first ball entry section 62, 63d). Note that the specific configuration for providing a difference in the degree of advantage is not limited to a difference in the rate of a guaranteed jackpot result. For example, a difference in the degree of advantage may be provided by providing a difference in the number of rounds (or the rate of the number of rounds) when a jackpot result is obtained.

(12) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which is equipped with a take-in device and starts the reels spinning by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in a storage section have been taken in by the take-in device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
The following feature A group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature A1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the first actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the first actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a first operating port reservation area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win or the like) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start ball entry section (e.g., the right actuation port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a first operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a second operating port) and capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the open/close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
As the normal game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is shorter than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section, and a second game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is longer than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section are provided;
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when transitioning to the second gaming state;
a normal game state transition means (for example, a function of executing a transition process to a first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a normal game state different from the second game state when the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state reaches the reference number;
a plurality of variable display periods having different lengths (e.g., 60 sec, 120 sec, 180 sec) are provided as the variable display period of the picture of the first display unit in the second gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a period determination means for a first display unit (a function of determining the variable display time of the picture in the first operating port display unit D1 in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) which determines the variable display period of the picture in the first display unit so that it becomes one of the plurality of variable display periods when the second gaming state is entered.

According to feature A1, by transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, the ball entry section and display section that are the main part of the game progress are switched from the first start ball entry section and first display section to the second start ball entry section and second display section. After transitioning to the second game state, the second game state continues until the number of game times related to the first display section reaches a reference number. Here, in the second game state, multiple variable display periods for the image in the first start ball entry section are prepared, and the effective length of the second game state, i.e., the number of game times related to the second start ball entry section, changes depending on which variable display period is set. With this configuration, monotony in the game can be achieved, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the first actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the first actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a first operating port reservation area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win or the like) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start ball entry section (e.g., the second actuation port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a first operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a second operating port) and capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the open/close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
As the normal game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is shorter than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section, and a second game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is longer than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section are provided;
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when transitioning to the second gaming state;
a normal game state transition means for transitioning to a normal game state different from the second game state when the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state reaches the reference number (for example, a function of executing a transition process to a first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a period information setting means for setting any one of period information including first period information (e.g., a variable display time table B1) and second period information (e.g., a variable display time table B2) in which the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is longer or more likely to be longer than the first period information when the game state is shifted to the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a period determination means for a first display unit (a function of determining the variable display period of a pattern in the first operating port display unit D1 by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) which determines, when the second gaming state is entered, the variable display period of a pattern executed in the first display unit based on the period information set by the period information setting means.

According to feature A2, by transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, the ball entry section and display section that are the main part of the game progress are switched from the first start ball entry section and first display section to the second start ball entry section and second display section. After transitioning to the second game state, the second game state continues until the number of game times related to the first display section reaches a reference number. Here, in the second game state, multiple variable display periods for the image in the first start ball entry section are prepared, and the effective length of the second game state, i.e., the number of game times related to the second start ball entry section, changes depending on which variable display period is set. With this configuration, monotony in the game can be achieved, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature A3. When the second gaming state is set, the first display unit has a first variable display period (e.g., 60 sec) and a second variable display period (e.g., 180 sec) longer than the first variable display period, as a variable display period of the image executed on the first display unit;
A gaming machine described in feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that the difference between the first variable display period and the second variable display period is set to be longer than the shortest period of the variable display period of the picture in the second display section when the second gaming state is in effect.

This characteristic configuration can create a clear difference in the number of plays that can be played in the second game state (the number of plays related to the second starting ball entry section).

Feature A4. When the second gaming state is set, the variable display period of the image executed on the first display unit includes a first variable display period (e.g., 60 sec) and a second variable display period (e.g., 180 sec) that is longer than the first variable display period;
A gaming machine described in feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that the difference between the first variable display period and the second variable display period is set to be longer than the maximum period of the variable display period of the image in the second display section when the second gaming state is in effect.

This characteristic configuration can create a clear difference in the number of plays that can be played in the second game state (the number of plays related to the second starting ball entry section).

Feature A5. When the second gaming state is established, the first display unit has a first variable display period (e.g., 60 sec) and a second variable display period (e.g., 180 sec) longer than the first variable display period, as a variable display period of the image executed on the first display unit;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the second variable display period is more easily set when the second gaming state is transitioned to based on a ball entering the second start ball entry section than when the second gaming state is transitioned to based on a ball entering the first start ball entry section.

As shown in feature A1, etc., in the second game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second start ball entry section. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when transitioning to the second game state again based on a ball entry into the second start ball entry section, a relatively long second variable display period is likely to be set, enhancing the excitement of the game.

Feature A6. The first acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of (e.g., four) pieces of the first special information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that in the first gaming state, the variable display period of the image in the first display unit is shortened based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means, and in the second gaming state, the shortening based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is not performed.

As shown in feature A6, when determining the variable display period of the image on the first display unit in the second gaming state, excessive bias in the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be prevented by disabling the function of shortening the variable display period according to the number of special information stored in the first acquired information storage means.

Feature A7. The first acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of (e.g., four) pieces of the first special information,
In the first gaming state, a variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shortened based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means, whereas in the second gaming state, the shortening based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is not performed.
The second acquisition information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the second special information (for example, four pieces of the second special information),
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that it is equipped with a period determination means for a second display unit (a function of determining the variable display time of the picture in the second ball entry section display unit D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that determines the variable display period of the picture in the second display unit, and the period determination means for the second display unit is configured to shorten the variable display period of the picture in the second display unit based on the number of second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means in the second game state.

As shown in feature A6, when determining the variable display period of the image on the first display unit in the second gaming state, excessive bias in the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be prevented by disabling the function of shortening the variable display period according to the number of special information stored in the first acquired information storage means.

As mentioned above, in the second game state, the time for which the image changes in the second display section is shorter than that in the first display section, but the relatively short time for which the image changes in the second display section is shortened based on the number of pieces of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. This makes it possible to optimally exert the function of suppressing monotony in the game while suppressing excessive bias in the degree of advantage as mentioned above.

Feature A8. The first acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of (e.g., four) pieces of the first special information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that in the first gaming state, the greater the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means, the shorter the variable display period of the picture in the first display unit, and in the second gaming state, the greater the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means, the longer the variable display period of the picture in the first display unit.

As shown in feature A1, in the first game state, the game progresses mainly with the game rounds related to the first start ball entry section, and in the second game state, the game progresses mainly with the game rounds related to the second start ball entry section. Here, in the first game state, the more the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, the shorter the variable display period of the image in the first display section, thereby realizing faster game progress. On the other hand, in the second game state, the more the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, the longer the variable display period of the image in the first display section. With this configuration, when the first special information is carried over from the first game state to the second game state, the more the number of first special information, the more advantageous it is for the player. This is a preferable configuration for encouraging the launch of the game ball toward the first start ball entry section in the first game state.

Feature A9: The reference number of times is a first reference number of times, and the reference number setting means is a first reference number setting means;
A second reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for setting a second reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when the game state is shifted to the second game state,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the normal gaming state transition means is configured to transition to a normal gaming state different from the second gaming state when the number of games related to the second display unit executed in the second gaming state reaches the second reference number before the number of games related to the first display unit reaches the first reference number.

As shown in this feature, by setting a second reference number of times as the end condition for the second game state, even if there is variation in the frequency of balls entering the first starting ball entry area, the second game state can be prevented from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, wherein the second reference number is greater than the first reference number.

As shown in feature A1, etc., in a configuration in which the game in the second game state mainly progresses through game rounds related to the second start ball entry section, by setting the second reference number of times to be greater than the first reference number of times, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which game rounds related to the second start ball entry section are repeated during one game round related to the first start ball entry section.

Feature A11. When the second gaming state is set, a variable display period of a picture to be displayed on the second display unit includes a first variable display period and a second variable display period that is longer than the first variable display period;
The predetermined winning results include a first winning result and a second winning result,
The period information setting means
A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A10, characterized in that it is configured to set the first period information when the result of the lottery is the first winning result, and to set the second period information when the result of the lottery is the second winning result.

As shown by this feature, by associating the results of the lottery based on the ball entering the first/second starting ball entry section with the period information, it is possible to prevent the control processing related to the game from becoming excessively complicated.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A11, characterized in that the second selection means is configured to make the second winning result more likely than the first selection means.

As shown in feature A1, etc., in the second game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second start ball entry section. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when transitioning to the second game state again based on a ball entry into the second start ball entry section, a relatively long second variable display period is likely to be set, enhancing the excitement of the game.

Feature A13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A12, characterized in that the lottery by the second lottery means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the transition from the first game state to the second game state allows the player to play to his advantage. By diversifying the number of play times related to the second starting ball entry section that can be executed in this state, the monotony of the game can be effectively prevented.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the first actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the first actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a first operating port reservation area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win or the like) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start ball entry section (e.g., the right actuation port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a first operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a second operating port) and capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the open/close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
As the normal game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is shorter than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section, and a second game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is longer than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section are provided;
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when transitioning to the second gaming state;
a normal game state transition means (for example, a function of executing a transition process to a first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a normal game state different from the second game state when the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state reaches the reference number;
a plurality of variable display periods having different lengths (e.g., 1 sec, 2 sec, 3 sec, 4 sec, 5 sec, 6 sec, 7 sec, 8 sec) are provided as a variable display period of the picture of the second display unit in the second gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a period determination means for a second display section (a function of determining the variable display time of the picture in the second operating port display section D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) which determines the variable display period of the picture in the second display section so that it becomes one of the plurality of variable display periods when the second gaming state is entered.

According to feature B1, by transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, the ball entry section and display section that are the main part of the game progress are switched from the first start ball entry section and first display section to the second start ball entry section and second display section. After transitioning to the second game state, the second game state continues until the number of times the game related to the first display section has been played reaches a reference number. Here, in the second game state, multiple variable display periods for the image in the second start ball entry section are prepared, and the effective length of the second game state, i.e., the number of times the game related to the second start ball entry section has been played, changes depending on which variable display period is set. With this configuration, monotony in the game can be achieved, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the first actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the first actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a first operating port reservation area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win or the like) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start ball entry section (e.g., the second actuation port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a first operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a second operating port) and capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the open/close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
As the normal game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is shorter than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section, and a second game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is longer than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section are provided;
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when transitioning to the second gaming state;
a normal game state transition means for transitioning to a normal game state different from the second game state when the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state reaches the reference number (for example, a function of executing a transition process to a first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A period information group setting means for setting a period information group corresponding to a variable display period of the picture executed on the second display unit when the game state is changed to the second game state (a function for setting a variable display time table for the second operation port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a second display unit period determination means for determining a variable display period of a pattern executed on the second display unit based on the period information group set by the period information group setting means when the second gaming state is established (a function of determining a variable display period of a pattern on the second operating port display unit D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the period information group includes a first period information group (e.g., a variable display time table A1) and a second period information group (e.g., a variable display time table A2) in which the variable display period of the image in the second display section is likely to be shorter than that of the first period information group.

According to feature B2, by transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, the ball entry section and display section that are the main part of the game progress are switched from the first start ball entry section and first display section to the second start ball entry section and second display section. After transitioning to the second game state, the second game state continues until the number of times the game related to the first display section has been played reaches a reference number. Here, in the second game state, multiple period information groups (tables) are prepared for determining the variable display period of the image in the second display section, and the effective length of the second game state, i.e., the number of times the game related to the second start ball entry section has been played, changes depending on which period information group is set. With this configuration, monotony in the game can be achieved, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature B3. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the first actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the first actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a first operating port reservation area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win or the like) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the second actuation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start ball entry section (e.g., the second actuation port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a first operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a second operating port) and capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the first actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the second actuation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the open/close execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
As the normal game states, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is shorter than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section, and a second game state (e.g., a fourth normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture in the first display section is longer than a variable display period of the picture in the second display section are provided;
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when transitioning to the second gaming state;
a normal game state transition means for transitioning to a normal game state different from the second game state when the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state reaches the reference number (for example, a function of executing a transition process to a first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A second display mode setting means for setting a variable display mode for controlling a variable display period of the picture of the second display unit in the second game state when the game state is changed to the second game state (a function for setting a variable display time table for the second operating port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a second display unit period determination means for determining a variable display period of a pattern executed on the second display unit based on the variable display mode set by the second display unit mode setting means when the second game state is in effect (a function of determining a variable display period of a pattern on the second operating port display unit D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as the variable display mode, a plurality of variable display modes are provided in which the variable display period of the picture on the second display portion is different in length.

According to feature B3, by transitioning from the first game state to the second game state, the ball entry section and display section that are the main part of the game progress are switched from the first start ball entry section and first display section to the second start ball entry section and second display section. After transitioning to the second game state, the second game state continues until the number of times the game related to the first display section has been played reaches a reference number. Here, in the second game state, multiple variable display modes (tables) are prepared for determining the variable display period of the image in the second start ball entry section, and the effective length of the second game state, i.e., the number of times the game related to the second start ball entry section is played, changes depending on which variable display mode is set. With this configuration, monotony in the game can be achieved, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

For example, the "variable display mode" may include a first variable display mode and a second variable display mode in which the variable display period of the image on the second display section is shorter than that in the first variable display mode.

Feature B4: The second acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of (e.g., four) pieces of the second special information,
As the variable display mode, a first variable display mode and a second variable display mode are provided,
The gaming machine described in feature B3 is configured such that, in the second variable display mode, when the number of the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is a predetermined number, the variable display period of the picture in the second display unit is shorter than when the number of the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is the predetermined number in the first variable display mode.

According to the configuration shown in feature B4, when the second variable display mode is selected, the variable display period of the image in the second display section is shorter than when the first variable display mode is selected. Therefore, more game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section can be played before the second game state ends. By adopting such a configuration, the effect shown in feature B3 can be preferably exerted.

Feature B5. The gaming machine described in Feature B4, characterized in that the predetermined number is the same as the number of the second special information that can be stored in the second acquired information storage means.

By setting a difference so that the variable display period in the second variable display mode is shortened at least when the number of stored second special information items has reached the upper limit, the player can be encouraged to try to score as many goals as possible in the second starting goal area. This can contribute to speeding up the game progress.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in Feature B4 or Feature B5, characterized in that the difference in the variable display period of the image in the second display section when comparing the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode is configured to be larger as the number of the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means increases.

The configuration shown in feature B6 can encourage the player to score as many goals as possible in the second starting goal area. This can contribute to speeding up the game progress.

Feature B7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B4 to B6, characterized in that the difference between the variable display period of the image in the second display section when comparing the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode is shorter than the shortest period of the variable display period of the image in the second display section determined in the first variable display mode.

This characteristic configuration allows for a difference in the number of times the game is played for the second starting ball entry section in the second game state, while preventing a large change in the game progress speed in the second game state due to this.

Feature B8: The reference number of times is a first reference number of times, and the reference number setting means is a first reference number setting means;
A second reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for setting a second reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when the game state is shifted to the second game state,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features B3 to B7, characterized in that the normal gaming state transition means is configured to transition to a normal gaming state different from the second gaming state when the number of games related to the second display unit executed in the second gaming state reaches the second reference number before the number of games related to the first display unit reaches the first reference number.

As shown in this feature, by setting a second reference number of times as the end condition for the second game state, even if there is variation in the frequency of balls entering the first starting ball entry area, the second game state can be prevented from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B8, wherein the second reference number is greater than the first reference number.

As shown in feature B3, etc., in a configuration in which the game in the second game state mainly progresses through game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section, by setting the second reference number of times to be greater than the first reference number of times, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section are repeated during one game round related to the first starting ball entry section.

Feature B10: When the second gaming state is set, a variable display period of a picture to be displayed on the second display unit includes a first variable display period and a second variable display period that is longer than the first variable display period;
The predetermined winning results include a first winning result and a second winning result,
The period information setting means
A gaming machine described in any one of features B3 to B9, characterized in that it is configured to set the first period information when the result of the lottery is the first winning result, and to set the second period information when the result of the lottery is the second winning result.

As shown by this feature, by associating the results of the lottery based on the ball entering the first/second starting ball entry section with the period information, it is possible to prevent the control processing related to the game from becoming excessively complicated.

Feature B11. The gaming machine described in Feature B10, characterized in that the second selection means is configured to make the second winning result more likely than the first selection means.

As shown in feature B3, etc., in the second game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second start ball entry section. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when transitioning to the second game state again based on a ball entering the second start ball entry section, a relatively long second variable display period is likely to be set, enhancing the excitement of the game.

Feature B12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B3 to B11, characterized in that the lottery by the second lottery means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the transition from the first game state to the second game state allows the player to play to his advantage. By diversifying the number of play times related to the second starting ball entry section that can be executed in this state, the monotony of the game can be effectively prevented.

Feature B13. When transitioning to the second gaming state, a first display mode setting means (a function of setting a variable display time table for the first operating port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for setting a variable display mode for controlling the variable display period of the picture of the first display unit in the second gaming state;
As a variable display mode for controlling a variable display period of the picture in the first display section, a plurality of variable display modes are provided in which the variable display period of the picture in the first display section is different in length and shortness,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B3 to B12, characterized in that when the second gaming state is in effect, it is equipped with a first display unit period determination means (a function of determining the variable display period of the picture in the first operating port display unit D1 by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) which determines the variable display period of the picture executed in the first display unit based on the variable display mode set by the first display unit mode setting means.

By applying the configuration shown in this feature to the configuration shown in feature B3, etc., it is possible to diversify the second game state by combining the variable display mode for the first display unit with the variable display mode for the second display unit. This is preferable in terms of preventing the number of types of variable display modes in the gaming machine from becoming excessively large.

The technical ideas shown in Features B4 to B13 can also be applied to Features B1 to B2.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B13 may be applied to the above Group A of Features.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group was made with a view to solving the problem that the invention aims to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology is as follows: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the lower actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry section (e.g., the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the right operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a lower operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a right operating port), and capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
The normal gaming state includes a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and second gaming states (second normal gaming state to fifth normal gaming state) which are more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state,
The second game state includes a first advantageous game state (second normal game state or fourth normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shorter than a variable display period of the picture on the second display unit, and a second advantageous game state (third normal game state or fifth normal game state) in which a variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is longer than a variable display period of the picture on the second display unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a favorable game state transition means (a function of executing transition processing to the third normal game state or the first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) which transitions from the first favorable game state to the second favorable game state when a predetermined transition condition is met in the first favorable game state.

According to feature C1, when a predetermined transition condition is met in a first advantageous game state in which the variable display period of the image in the first display section is shorter than the variable display period of the image in the second display section, the game state transitions to a second advantageous game state in which the variable display period of the image in the first display section is longer than the variable display period of the image in the second display section. In other words, the main focus of game progress shifts from a game turn related to the first display section (first start ball entry section) to a game turn related to the second display section (second start ball entry section). This can prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the advantageous game state (second game state), and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the lower actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry section (e.g., the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the right operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a lower operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a right operating port), capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
a high probability mode in which the probability of the predetermined winning result being achieved is relatively high and a low probability mode in which the probability of the predetermined winning result being achieved is relatively low are provided as selection modes in a case where the first selection process is performed by the first selection means and a case where the second selection process is performed by the second selection means;
the normal gaming state includes, as gaming states corresponding to the high probability mode, a first high probability gaming state in which a variable display period of a pattern on the first display unit is shorter than a variable display period of a pattern on the second display unit, and a second high probability gaming state in which a variable display period of a pattern on the first display unit is longer than a variable display period of a pattern on the second display unit;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a high-probability gaming state transition means (a function of executing transition processing to a third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that transitions from the first high-probability gaming state to the second high-probability gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is met in the first high-probability gaming state.

According to feature C2, when a predetermined transition condition is met in a first high probability game state in which the variable display period of the image in the first display section is shorter than the variable display period of the image in the second display section, the game state transitions to a second high probability game state in which the variable display period of the image in the first display section is longer than the variable display period of the image in the second display section. In other words, the main focus of game progress shifts from a game round related to the first display section (first start ball entry section) to a game round related to the second display section (second start ball entry section). This can prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the high probability game state and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the lower actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry section (e.g., the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the right operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a lower operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a right operating port), capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
a high probability mode in which the probability of the predetermined winning result being achieved is relatively high and a low probability mode in which the probability of the predetermined winning result being achieved is relatively low are provided as selection modes in a case where the first selection process is performed by the first selection means and a case where the second selection process is performed by the second selection means;
the normal gaming state includes, as gaming states corresponding to the high probability mode, a first high probability gaming state in which a variable display period of a pattern on the first display unit is shorter than a variable display period of a pattern on the second display unit, and a second high probability gaming state in which a variable display period of a pattern on the first display unit is longer than a variable display period of a pattern on the second display unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for setting a reference number of times (time-saving number of times) when transitioning to the first high-probability gaming state; and a high-probability gaming state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to a third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for transitioning from the first high-probability gaming state to the second high-probability gaming state when the number of games executed in the first high-probability gaming state becomes the reference number of times.

According to feature C3, when the number of plays performed in a first high probability play state, in which the variable display period of the image in the first display section is shorter than the variable display period of the image in the second display section, reaches a reference number, the state transitions to a second high probability play state, in which the variable display period of the image in the first display section is longer than the variable display period of the image in the second display section. In other words, the main focus of game progress shifts from the play number related to the first display section (first start ball entry section) to the play number related to the second display section (second start ball entry section). This prevents the play from becoming monotonous in the high probability play state, and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in Feature C3, characterized in that a shot into the first starting shot area is set to be more advantageous to the player than a shot into the second starting shot area.

According to feature C4, by transitioning from the first high probability game state to the second high probability game state, the main focus of game progress shifts from the game round related to the first start entry section, which is relatively unfavorable to the player, to the game round related to the second start entry section, which is relatively favorable. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player's degree of advantage changes in the high probability game state, even if the game progresses without achieving a predetermined winning result despite transitioning to the first high probability game state, the player's expectations can be directed toward transitioning to the second high probability game state. By having such a rescue function, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in the player's motivation to play in the high probability game state.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be "a gaming machine described in feature C3, characterized in that a difference is provided so that the probability of a predetermined winning result corresponding to a transition to a high probability gaming state is higher in the lottery by the second lottery means than in the lottery by the first lottery means."

Feature C5. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, wherein the high probability gaming state transition means transitions from the first high probability gaming state to the second high probability gaming state when the number of plays related to the first starting ball entry section executed in the first high probability gaming state reaches the reference number.

By configuring the transition to the second high probability game state based on the number of plays on the first display section (first start ball entry section) which has a relatively short display time of the changing patterns in the first high probability game state, it is possible to encourage players who are hoping to transition to the second high probability game state to play on the first start ball entry section. In this way, by encouraging balls to enter the side where the game progresses smoothly, unnecessary delays in game progress can be prevented.

In addition, in a configuration in which a transition is made to the second high probability game state when the number of times the game is played in the first starting ball entry section, which is relatively unfavorable to the player, reaches a reference number, the degree of advantage when transitioning from the first high probability game state to the second high probability game state can be significantly changed, enhancing the contrast of the game.

Feature C6. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, characterized in that the high probability gaming state transition means transitions from the first high probability gaming state to the second high probability gaming state when the number of plays related to the second starting ball entry section executed in the first high probability gaming state reaches the reference number.

By configuring the transition to the second high probability game state based on the number of play times related to the second display section (second starting ball entry section) that has a relatively long time for the changing display of the image in the first high probability game state, the rescue function shown in feature C4 can be effectively exerted by continuing to miss the lottery in the advantageous ball entry section.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, characterized in that the high probability gaming state transition means transitions from the first high probability gaming state to the second high probability gaming state when the sum of the number of times of play related to the first start ball entry section executed in the first high probability gaming state and the number of times of play related to the second start ball entry section executed in the first high probability gaming state becomes the reference number.

There is a possibility that a certain degree of bias may occur in the frequency with which game balls flowing down the game area enter the ball entry section. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that a transition to the second high probability game state occurs when the total number of plays related to both ball entry sections reaches a reference number, it is possible to prevent the transition function to the second high probability game state from being improperly performed.

Feature C8. In the first high probability gaming state, the variable display period of the picture in the second display unit is configured so that the variable display of the picture in the second display unit can be executed multiple times while the variable display of the picture is executed once in the second display unit;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C3 to C7, characterized in that in the second high probability gaming state, the variable display period of the picture in the first display unit is configured so that the variable display of the picture in the second display unit can be executed multiple times while the variable display of the picture is executed once in the first display unit.

According to feature C8, if one ball entry section is played multiple times while the other section is played multiple times, the main target of the game progress can be clearly separated. This allows the function of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, as shown in feature C3, to be effectively exerted.

Feature C9. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C3 to C8, characterized in that in the first high probability gaming state, the variable display period of each image on the second display unit is constant, and in the second high probability gaming state, the variable display period of each image on the first display unit is constant.

When diversifying high probability game states by switching between short and long variable display periods for patterns, there is a concern that overly complicated gameplay may confuse players. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the variable display period constant for the variable display on the side that is not the main target of game progress, it is possible to diversify high probability game states while effectively suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences caused by this.

Feature C10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C3 to C9, characterized in that it is equipped with a distribution means for distributing gaming balls that have reached a predetermined location in the gaming area to the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section in a predetermined order.

Feature C10 reduces the chances that a game round related to one of the ball entry sections progresses independently, and can optimally demonstrate the function of diversifying high probability game states through cooperation between the first and second display sections.

Feature C11. The gaming machine described in Feature C10, characterized in that the predetermined allocation order is common to the first high probability gaming state and the second high probability gaming state.

As shown by this feature, even if the distribution order by the distribution means is made common to both high probability game states to simplify the configuration, the high probability game state can be appropriately graded depending on the difference in the length of the variable display period of the image.

Feature C12. A guidance means (electric device 71) that can be switched between a guidance state that guides the ball into the specified location and a non-guidance state that does not guide the ball,
A switching means for switching the guiding means between the guiding state and the non-guiding state (a function for executing a support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the induction state is more likely to be reached than the first switching mode are provided as switching modes of the induction means by the switching means,
A gaming machine described in feature C10 or feature C11, characterized in that in the first high probability gaming state and the second high probability gaming state, the switching mode in the switching means is configured to be the second switching mode.

As shown in feature C10, etc., a configuration in which game balls that reach a predetermined location are distributed to the first start ball entry section/second start ball entry section in a predetermined order is an obstacle to ensuring the number of game balls that enter when viewed from one of the ball entry sections. This is not desirable in terms of realizing diversification of the game by utilizing the simultaneous progression of game rounds. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above problem can be preferably solved by configuring the switching mode of the induction means to be the second switching mode in the first high probability game state and the second high probability game state, thereby compensating for the shortage of the number of balls that enter.

Feature C13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C3 to C12, characterized in that when the first high probability gaming state is transitioned to the second high probability gaming state, and the variable display of the image on the second display unit is continued across the first high probability gaming state and the second high probability gaming state, the gaming machine is provided with a notification means for notifying the transition to the second high probability gaming state until the variable display ends.

In a configuration in which the game is diversified by switching the variable display period of the image as shown in feature C3, there are cases in which the variable display of the image related to the second start ball entry section (second display section) continues across the timing of the transition from the first high probability game state to the second high probability game state. In such cases, there is concern that the discrepancy between the transition timing and the timing of the end of the variable display of the image will cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when such a discrepancy occurs, it is advisable to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort by configuring the system to notify the player of the transition to the second high probability game state until the variable display of the image in the second display section ends.

Feature C14. The high-probability gaming state transition means is a first transition means,
The predetermined selection result includes a special result (special winning result) configured to take over the selection mode before the end of the special game state after the end of the special game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C3 to C13, characterized in that it is equipped with a second transition means (a function of executing transition processing to a third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that transitions from the first high probability gaming state to the second high probability gaming state when the special result occurs in the first high probability gaming state.

According to feature C14, an event occurs in which a game state transitions to a second high probability game state before the number of plays performed in the first high probability game state reaches a reference number. In this way, by diversifying the trigger for transitioning to the second high probability game state, the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of plays can be increased, and diversification of games can be ideally achieved.

The technical ideas shown in Features C4 to C14 may also be applied to Features C1 to C2 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features C1 to C14 may be applied to the above Features A to B.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the lower actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry section (e.g., the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the right operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a lower operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a right operating port), capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
the normal game state includes a first game state in which a variable display period of a pattern in the first display portion is shorter than a variable display period of a pattern in the second display portion, and a second game state in which a variable display period of a pattern in the first display portion is longer than a variable display period of a pattern in the second display portion,
A normal game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the first game state to the second game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the first game state (a function of executing a transition process to the third normal game state or the first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a transition is made from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the variable display of the picture on the second display unit continues across the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming machine further comprises an alarm means for notifying a transition to the second gaming state until the variable display ends.

In a configuration in which the variable display of the patterns in the first display section and the second display section proceeds simultaneously, and the length of the variable display period of the simultaneous proceeding patterns is switched to diversify the game state, when the first game state transitions to the second game state upon the completion of a game round in the first start entry section, an event may occur in which the variable display of the pattern in the second start entry section (second display section) continues across the transition timing. In such a case, there is concern that the discrepancy between the transition timing and the timing at which the variable display of the pattern ends may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. There is concern that such a discrepancy may cause confusion to the player. Therefore, when such a discrepancy occurs, the above-mentioned discomfort can be alleviated by configuring the system to notify the player of the transition to the second game state until the variable display of the pattern in the second display section ends.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower actuation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower actuation port 62a) when a ball enters a first start ball entry section (e.g., the lower actuation port 62a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry section (e.g., the right operating port 63a) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a reserve area Rb for the right operating port of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a first display section (e.g., a display section D1 for a lower operating port) and a second display section (e.g., a display section D2 for a right operating port), capable of variably displaying patterns on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game round control means,
The game round by the first game round control means and the game round by the second game round control means are configured to be able to proceed simultaneously,
the normal game state includes a first game state in which a variable display period of a pattern in the first display portion is shorter than a variable display period of a pattern in the second display portion, and a second game state in which a variable display period of a pattern in the first display portion is longer than a variable display period of a pattern in the second display portion,
A normal game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the first game state to the second game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the first game state (a function of executing a transition process to the third normal game state or the first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a first notification means for notifying, when the game state is the first game state, information indicating a remaining number of games or a remaining period until the game state transitions to the second game state until the end of a game that triggers a transition to the second game state;
a second notification means for notifying information indicating a transition to the second game state at least from the transition to the second game state until the end of the variable display when the first game state is transitioned to the second game state and the variable display on the second display unit is continued across the first game state and the second game state.

In a configuration in which the variable display of the patterns in the first display section and the second display section proceeds simultaneously, and the length of the variable display period of the simultaneous proceeding patterns is switched to diversify the game state, when the first game state transitions to the second game state upon the completion of a game round in the first start entry section, an event may occur in which the variable display of the pattern in the second start entry section (second display section) continues across the transition timing. In such a case, there is concern that the discrepancy between the transition timing and the timing at which the variable display of the pattern ends may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. There is concern that such a discrepancy may cause confusion to the player. Therefore, when such a discrepancy occurs, the above-mentioned discomfort can be alleviated by configuring the system to notify the player of the transition to the second game state until the variable display of the pattern in the second display section ends.

The technical ideas shown in Features D1 and D2 may also be applied to the above Features A to C.

<Features Group E>
The following feature E group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature E1. A gaming machine having a gaming board (game board 60) on which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed, and a first ball entry section (upper variable winning device 64) and a second ball entry section (right general winning port 61R) are provided in a predetermined flow path (right route) of the gaming area,
The first ball entrance section is switchable between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be accepted, and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to accept the game ball than in the acceptance state,
A switching means (a function of executing an opening and closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for alternately switching the first ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) is entered;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a game processing execution means (a function of executing update processing of a lottery counter for setting suggestion in MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that executes a predetermined game processing (update processing of a lottery counter for setting suggestion) on the condition that a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the non-accepting state in the special game state.

In the configuration shown in feature E1, since the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged in the same flow path (predetermined flow path), some of the game balls launched aiming at the first ball entry section will enter the second ball entry section. Here, if the first ball entry section is variable, it is assumed that the game balls will be launched aiming at the period when the first ball entry section is in the receiving state, and the launch of the game balls will be avoided during the period when the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state. In such a configuration, the attention of the player will be directed exclusively to the period when the ball is in the receiving state, and there is a concern that the level of attention will decrease during the non-receiving state. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the receiving state in the special game state, a predetermined game process will not be executed, but when a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state in the special game state, a predetermined game process will be executed. In other words, it is possible to encourage players who expect a specific game process to be executed to continue firing game balls, and it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in attention during the non-receiving state. This type of configuration is also preferable in terms of increasing the freedom to set the non-receiving state period.

Feature E2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entry section (e.g., the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A lottery means for sequentially carrying out lottery processing (lottery for big win, etc.) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing lottery processing based on balls entering the lower operation port 62a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined winning result (e.g., a jackpot result);
A first ball entry section (upper variable entry device 64) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be received and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to receive the game ball than the acceptance state;
A switching means for switching the first ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A second ball entry section (right general winning port 61R) arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area together with the first ball entry section;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a game processing execution means (a function of executing update processing of a lottery counter for setting suggestion in MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that executes a predetermined game processing (update processing of a lottery counter for setting suggestion) on the condition that a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the non-accepting state in the special game state.

In the configuration shown in feature E2, since the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged in the same flow path (predetermined flow path), some of the game balls launched at the first ball entry section will enter the second ball entry section. Here, if the first ball entry section is variable, it is assumed that the game balls will be launched during the period when the first ball entry section is in the receiving state, and the launch of the game balls will be avoided during the period when the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state. In such a configuration, the attention of the player will be directed exclusively to the period when the ball is in the receiving state, and there is a concern that the level of attention will decrease during the non-receiving state. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the receiving state in the special game state, a predetermined game process will not be executed, but when a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state in the special game state, a predetermined game process will be executed. In other words, it is possible to encourage players who expect a specific game process to be executed to continue firing game balls, and it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in attention during the non-receiving state. This type of configuration is also preferable in terms of increasing the freedom to set the non-receiving state period.

Feature E3. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower operating port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entry section (e.g., the lower operating port 62a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A lottery means for sequentially carrying out lottery processing (lottery for big win, etc.) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing lottery processing based on balls entering the lower operation port 62a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined winning result (e.g., a jackpot result);
A first ball entry section (upper variable entry device 64) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be received and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to receive the game ball than the acceptance state;
A switching means for switching the first ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state when the special game state is entered (a function for executing an opening/closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A second ball entry section (right general winning port 61R) arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area together with the first ball entry section;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a game processing execution means (a function of executing update processing of a lottery counter for setting suggestion in MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) which executes a predetermined game processing (update processing of a lottery counter for setting suggestion) when a ball enters the second ball entry section while the first ball entry section is in the non-accepting state in the special game state, and does not execute the predetermined game processing (update processing of a lottery counter for setting suggestion) when a ball enters the second ball entry section while the second ball entry section is in the accepting state in the special game state.

In the configuration shown in feature E3, since the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged in the same flow path (predetermined flow path), some of the game balls launched aiming at the first ball entry section will enter the second ball entry section. Here, if the first ball entry section is variable, it is assumed that the game balls will be launched aiming at the period when the first ball entry section is in the receiving state, and the launch of the game balls will be avoided during the period when the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state. In such a configuration, the attention of the player will be directed exclusively to the period when the ball is in the receiving state, and there is a concern that the level of attention will decrease during the non-receiving state. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the receiving state in the special game state, a predetermined game process will not be executed, but when a ball enters the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state in the special game state, a predetermined game process will be executed. In other words, it is possible to encourage players who expect a specific game process to be executed to continue firing game balls, and it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in attention during the non-receiving state. This type of configuration is also preferable in terms of increasing the freedom to set the non-receiving state period.

Feature E4: A payout means (payout device 222) is provided for paying out game balls to a player when a ball enters the first ball entry section and when a ball enters the second ball entry section,
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, wherein the game process execution means executes a process other than the payout of game balls by the payout means as the predetermined game process.

When a ball enters the second ball entry section while the first ball entry section is in a receiving state in the special game state, both the payout of the game ball and the specified game processing are executed, and when a ball enters the second ball entry section while the first ball entry section is in a non-receiving state in the special game state, only the payout of the game ball is executed. With this configuration, players who expect the specified game processing to be executed can be encouraged to continue firing game balls during the non-receiving state.

Feature E5. A payout means (payout device 222) is provided for paying out game balls to a player when a ball enters the first ball entry section and when a ball enters the second ball entry section,
The switching means is configured to alternately switch the first ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state in the special game state,
The period during which the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state in the special game state (e.g., 3 sec) is shorter than the period during which the first ball entry section is in the receiving state (e.g., 6 sec),
The game processing execution means includes:
a corresponding information storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of balls that enter the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is in the non-accepting state during the special game state, and for retaining the stored information across a number of the non-accepting states;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E4, characterized in that it has an award determination means for determining whether to award a benefit other than the payout of gaming balls to the player based on the information stored in the corresponding information storage means.

If the period of the non-accepting state is shorter than the period of the accepting state, it becomes difficult to earn a number of balls that enter the second ball entry section during the non-accepting state. In particular, if the period of the non-accepting state is short, a bias may occur in which balls do not enter due to variations in the behavior of the game balls, and it would be difficult for the player to decide whether to grant a bonus each time the game is in a non-accepting state. Therefore, if the information corresponding to balls that enter the second ball entry section can be carried over and the decision on whether to grant a bonus is made all at once, the effects of the bias described above can be mitigated.

Feature E6: The correspondence information storage means is a first storage means,
a second storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of balls that enter the first ball entry section when the first ball entry section has entered the first ball entry section during a period in which the first ball entry section is in the receiving state in the special game state;
The gaming machine described in feature E5, wherein the award determination means determines whether to award a benefit other than the payout of gaming balls to the player based on the information stored in the first storage means and the information stored in the second storage means.

When the first ball entry section is in an accepting state, information corresponding to the number of balls that have entered the first ball entry section is stored, and when the first ball entry section is in a non-accepting state, information corresponding to the number of balls that have entered the second ball entry section is stored. A decision on whether to grant a bonus is then made based on this information. With this configuration, players hoping to receive a bonus can be encouraged to fire game balls in both the accepting and non-accepting states, and a decrease in attention to the game due to the transition to the non-accepting state can be effectively prevented.

Feature E7. The gaming machine described in Feature E6, characterized in that the award determination means is configured so that, when determining whether or not to award the bonus, the information stored in the first storage means has a higher contribution rate to the award determination than the information stored in the second storage means.

As shown in feature E6, in a configuration in which the award determination is made by integrating balls entering each entry section, it is expected that an award determination will also be made for a ball entering the first entry section, and there is a possibility that an action such as deliberately not continuing to release game balls in a non-accepting state will be taken. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting a difference so that a ball entering the second entry section in a non-accepting state contributes to the award determination to a greater extent than a ball entering the first entry section in a accepting state, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E7, characterized in that the special game states include a first special game state and a second special game state in which the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state for a longer period than the first special game state.

As shown in this feature, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature E2 etc. to a gaming machine that has multiple special game states with different lengths of time in the accepting state, the difficulty of scoring in the second scoring area during the non-accepting state can be changed depending on the special game state, which contributes to diversifying the game.

Feature E9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E2 to E8, configured such that switching from the accepting state to the non-accepting state is executed multiple times during the special gaming state, and the duration of at least one of the non-accepting states is different from the duration of other non-accepting states.

By mixing multiple non-acceptance states of different durations during special game state 1, it becomes unclear how difficult it will be to score in the second ball entry area until the game ball is actually shot toward the second ball entry area. This helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the special game state.

Feature E10. The gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E9, characterized in that the second ball entry section is disposed on the flow path of the gaming ball toward the first ball entry section, and is configured such that when the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, the first ball entry section prevents the ball from entering the second ball entry section.

According to feature E10, when the first ball entry section is in a receiving state, the first ball entry section blocks the ball from entering the second ball entry section, and in order to aim for the second ball entry section, the first ball entry section must be in a non-receiving state. With this configuration, a player who expects a predetermined game process to be executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry section can be encouraged to continue firing game balls.

Feature E11. The game machine includes a game ball launching mechanism (110) that launches game balls into the game area based on the player's operation.
The gaming machine described in feature E10, characterized in that when the special game state is alternately switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state, the period until the first ball entry section switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state is shorter than the period required for a game ball launched from the game ball launching means to reach the second ball entry section.

As shown by this feature, when the first ball entry section goes into a non-receiving state, even if the launch of game balls is resumed from that timing, the first ball entry section will switch to a receiving state before the launched game balls reach the second ball entry section. In other words, when a so-called stop shot is performed, it becomes difficult to timely launch the game ball into the second ball entry section even if the game ball is launched after visually confirming that the non-receiving state has been reached. This makes it possible to encourage players who expect a predetermined game process to be executed based on a ball entering the second ball entry section during a non-receiving state to continue launching game balls.

The technical ideas shown in Features E4 to E11 may also be applied to Feature E1.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features E1 to E11 may be applied to the above Features A to D.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature F group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature F1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entry section (e.g., the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A lottery means for sequentially carrying out lottery processing (lottery for big win, etc.) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing lottery processing based on balls entering the lower operation port 62a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning the game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined winning result;
A special ball entry section (upper variable winning device 64) is provided in the game area and can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the acceptance state;
A switching means (a function of executing an opening and closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for alternately switching the special ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) is entered;
A display means (pattern display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
a display control means (announcement/performance control device 143 or a display control device 710) for executing a first special display (a first stock icon display area ST1 and a first stock icon SI1) and a second special display (a second stock icon display area ST2 and a second stock icon SI2) on the display screen during an acceptance period (round) during which the special ball entry section is in the acceptance state and a non-acceptance period (interval) during which the special ball entry section is in the non-acceptance state when the special game state is in effect;
The display control means of the gaming machine is characterized in that it has a means for switching the display mode (highlight/darkening) of the first special display between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period when the special game state is in progress, and a means for switching the display mode (highlight/darkening) of the second special display between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period.

During the special game state, the first special display and the second special display are executed throughout both the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period. The first special display and the second special display continue throughout both the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period while switching the display mode between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period, preventing the special display from becoming monotonous. This contributes to increasing attention to the game during the special game state. Also, while the display mode switches, the special display continues from the acceptance period to the non-acceptance period. This configuration is preferable in encouraging continued play during the non-acceptance period, compared to a configuration in which no special display is executed during the non-acceptance period.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, characterized in that the display control means is configured to switch the display mode of the first special display and the display mode of the second special display based on a transition from the acceptance period to the non-acceptance period, and to switch the display mode of the first special display and the display mode of the second special display based on a transition from the non-acceptance period to the acceptance period.

Feature F2 strengthens the coordination between the switching of the display mode of the first special display and the switching of the display mode of the second special display. This reduces the chance that a change in appearance between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period will be overlooked, while still providing a special display across the acceptance period and non-acceptance period. With this configuration, the effect shown in feature F1 can be optimally achieved.

Feature F3. As the display mode of the first special display, a first display mode (darkening) and a second display mode (light emission) in which the first special display is emphasized more than the first display mode are provided;
As a display mode of the second special display, a third display mode (darkening) and a fourth display mode (light emission) in which the second special display is emphasized more than the third display mode are provided,
The gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the display control means changes the display mode of each special display so that during the acceptance period, the display mode of the first special display becomes the second display mode and the display mode of the second special display becomes the third display mode, and during the non-acceptance period, the display mode of the first special display becomes the first display mode and the display mode of the second special display becomes the fourth display mode.

According to feature F3, the first special display is more noticeable during the acceptance period, and the second special display is more noticeable during the non-acceptance period. In this way, by switching the object that the player is likely to pay attention to between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period, it is possible to effectively prevent the display in the special game state from becoming monotonous.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to Feature F3, characterized in that when the first special display is in the second display mode and the second special display is in the third display mode, the first special display is emphasized more than the second special display, and when the first special display is in the first display mode and the second special display is in the fourth display mode, the second special display is emphasized more than the first special display.

According to feature F4, the first special display will be more noticeable than the second special display during the acceptance period, and the second special display will be more noticeable than the first special display during the non-acceptance period. By creating a clear difference in visibility level by switching the display mode, the effect shown in feature F3 can be effectively achieved.

Feature F5. The display control means is
A means for changing the display content of the first special display (the number of first stock icons SI1) based on the fact that a first scoring condition (a scoring condition occurs) is satisfied under a situation in which the first special display is in the second display mode;
A gaming machine described in feature F3 or feature F4, characterized in that it has a means for changing the display content of the second special display (the number of second stock icons SI2) based on the second ball scoring condition (occurrence of a ball scoring) being met when the second special display is in the fourth display mode.

When the first scoring condition is met while the first special display is prominent, the display content of the first special display is changed, and when the second scoring condition is met while the second special display is prominent, the display content of the second special display is changed. This reduces the chance that the change in display content will be overlooked, making it possible to optimally achieve the effects shown in feature F1, etc. Also, games related to the acceptance period can be played during the acceptance period, and games related to the non-acceptance period can be played during the non-acceptance period as well, thereby optimally encouraging continuation of games during the non-acceptance period.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature F3 or feature F4, characterized in that the display control means has a means for changing the display content of the first special display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a ball scoring) when the first special display is in the second display mode, and a means for changing the display content of the second special display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a ball scoring) when the second special display is in the fourth display mode."

Feature F6. The display control means is
a means for maintaining the display content of the first special display when a first goal-scoring condition is met while the first special display is in the first display mode, and for changing the display content of the first special display when the first goal-scoring condition is met while the first special display is in the second display mode;
A gaming machine as described in feature F3 or feature F4, characterized in that it has a means for maintaining the display content of the second special display when a second ball scoring condition is met while the second special display is in the third display mode, and for changing the display content of the second special display when the second ball scoring condition is met while the second special display is in the fourth display mode.

When the first special display is in the first display mode and the first scoring condition is met, the display content is not changed, and when the first special display is in the second display mode and the first scoring condition is met, the display content of the first special display is changed. When the second special display is in the second display mode and the second scoring condition is met, the display content of the second special display is not changed, and when the second special display is in the fourth display mode and the second scoring condition is met, the display content of the second special display is changed. In this way, by configuring the display content to be changed depending on the display mode of the first/second special display when the scoring condition is met, the monotony of the display during the special game state can be suitably suppressed. This is preferable in terms of exerting the attention-increasing effect shown in feature F1, etc.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature F3 or feature F4, characterized in that the display control means has means for maintaining the display content of the first special display when a first condition is met when the first special display is in the first display mode, and changing the display content of the first special display when the first condition is met when the first special display is in the second display mode, and means for maintaining the display content of the second special display when a second condition is met when the second special display is in the third display mode, and changing the display content of the second special display when the second condition is met when the second special display is in the fourth display mode."

Feature F7. A predetermined passage (right route) in the game area is provided with a predetermined entry section (right general entry port 61R) together with the special entry section,
The gaming machine described in feature F3 or feature F4, wherein the display control means is configured to change the display content of the first special display when a ball enters the special entry area when the first special display is in the second display mode and the second special display is in the third display mode, and to change the display content of the second special display when a ball enters the designated entry area when the first special display is in the first display mode and the second special display is in the fourth display mode.

According to feature F7, when a ball enters the special entry area while the first special display is in the second display mode (highlighted) and the second special display is in the third display mode (non-highlighted), the display content of the first special display is changed based on the ball entering. When a ball enters the specified entry area while the first special display is in the first display mode (non-highlighted) and the second special display is in the fourth display mode (highlighted), the display content of the second special display is changed. In this way, by configuring the display content of highlighted items to change depending on the entry destination, it is possible to diversify the display changes in the special game state and effectively exert the attention-increasing effect shown in feature F1, etc.

Feature F8. The gaming machine described in Feature F7, wherein the display control means is configured not to change the display contents of the first special display and the second special display when a ball enters the designated ball entry section under a situation in which the first special display is in the second display mode and the second special display is in the third display mode, and to change the display contents of the first special display and the second special display when a ball enters the special ball entry section under a situation in which the first special display is in the first display mode and the second special display is in the fourth display mode.

As shown by this feature, if a ball is scored into a destination other than the limited destinations during a period other than the specified period, the display contents of both the first special display and the second special display are not changed. By imposing such a restriction, the impact of changing the display contents of the first special display section or the second special display section can be enhanced.

Feature F9. The gaming machine described in Feature F7 or Feature F8, characterized in that the display control means has a means for delaying the switching of the display mode of the first special display and the second special display when the special ball entry section changes from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, and delaying the switching of the display mode of the first special display and the second special display when the special ball entry section changes from the accepting state to the non-accepting state.

When detecting balls entering the special ball entry area or the specified ball entry area, there may be a certain amount of time lag before the game ball that has passed through the entrance is detected. For this reason, if the display mode is immediately switched at the point when the special ball entry area switches between an accepting state and a non-accepting state, the time lag may prevent the ball entry → display change from being performed properly. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by delaying the switching of the display mode, the occurrence of the above inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F10. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entry section (e.g., the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A lottery means for sequentially carrying out lottery processing (lottery for big win, etc.) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing lottery processing based on balls entering the lower operation port 62a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning the game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined winning result;
A special ball entry section (upper variable winning device 64) is provided in the game area and can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the acceptance state;
A switching means (a function of executing an opening and closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for alternately switching the special ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) is entered;
A display means (pattern display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
a display control means (announcement/performance control device 143 or a display control device 710) for executing a first special display (a first stock icon display area ST1 and a first stock icon SI1) and a second special display (a second stock icon display area ST2 and a second stock icon SI2) on the display screen during an acceptance period (round) during which the special ball entry section is in the acceptance state and a non-acceptance period (interval) during which the special ball entry section is in the non-acceptance state when the special game state is in effect;
The display control means of the gaming machine is characterized in that it has a means for changing the display content of the first special display (the number of first stock icons SI1) based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is met during the acceptance period when the special game state is in progress, and a means for changing the display content of the second special display (the number of second stock icons SI2) based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is met during the non-acceptance period.

During the special game state, the first special display and the second special display are executed throughout both the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period. For these first special display and second special display, the display content changes between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period. This configuration prevents the special display from becoming monotonous, which can contribute to increasing attention to the game during the special game state.

Feature F11. The gaming machine described in Feature F10, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means for notifying the player that the display content change target is the first special display during the acceptance period when the special gaming state is in effect, and for notifying the player that the display content change target is the second special display during the non-acceptance period, when the special gaming state is in effect.

As shown in feature F10, diversifying the special displays in the special game state can prevent the game from becoming monotonous, but there is concern that not knowing which special display is the target of the change can be a cause of confusion for the player. As shown in this feature, if the special display whose display content is to be changed is notified, this kind of inconvenience can be prevented, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be effectively achieved.

Feature F12. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., pending information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entry section (e.g., the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A lottery means for sequentially carrying out lottery processing (lottery for big win, etc.) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing lottery processing based on balls entering the lower operation port 62a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning the game state related to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined winning result;
A special ball entry section (upper variable winning device 64) is provided in the game area and can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the acceptance state;
A switching means (a function of executing an opening and closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for alternately switching the special ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) is entered;
A display means (pattern display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 143 or a display control device 710) for executing a special performance on the display screen during an acceptance period (round) during which the special ball entry section is in the acceptance state and during a non-acceptance period (interval) during which the special ball entry section is in the non-acceptance state when the special game state is in the special game state,
The display control means is configured to execute a first special effect as the special effect based on a first ball entry condition being satisfied during the acceptance period in the special game state, and to execute a second special effect as the special effect based on a second ball entry condition being satisfied during the non-acceptance period.

According to feature F12, the special effects that are executed differ depending on the accepting/non-accepting period in the special game state and the timing at which each ball entry condition is met. With this configuration, monotony in gameplay in the special game state can be effectively prevented.

Feature F13. The gaming machine described in Feature F12, characterized in that when the second ball entry condition is met during the receiving period in the special game state, the display control means does not execute the first special effect and the second special effect in response to the second ball entry condition being met, and when the first ball entry condition is met during the non-receiving period in the special game state, the display control means does not execute the first special effect and the second special effect in response to the first ball entry condition being met.

As shown in feature F13, if the second ball scoring condition is met during the receiving period and if the first ball scoring condition is met during the non-receiving period, each special effect is avoided. By limiting the conditions for executing the first special effect and the second special effect, it becomes possible to execute effects unique to the receiving period/non-receiving period, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous in the special game state.

The technical ideas shown in Features F1 to F13 may also be applied to the above Features A to E.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature G1. A gaming machine having a gaming board (game board 60) on which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., a lower operating ball entry section 62) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The ball entry section has a ball passage (ball passage 801) through which game balls that flow into the entrance portion of the ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) pass, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided adjacent to the ball passage and is capable of detecting game balls that pass through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage, and is configured so that the game balls passing through the ball passage and the ball detection means are visible from the front of the gaming machine.
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by a player;
A period setting means for setting an acceptance period for accepting operations of the operation means based on the detection of a game ball by the ball detection means (a function for setting a timer counter for special operations in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an operation response processing execution means (a function of executing forced change processing in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that executes a predetermined operation response processing corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means during the acceptance period.

According to the configuration shown in feature G1, a predetermined operation response process is executed by operating the operation means in accordance with the timing when the gaming ball passes a predetermined position (ball detection means). With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage players who expect the operation response process to pay attention to the movement of the gaming ball. This can contribute to increasing the attention paid to the game.

It is also possible to define the configuration shown in this characteristic as "a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 60) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., lower operating ball entry section 62) is provided in the gaming area where a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter, the ball entry section having a ball passage (ball passage 801) that guides the gaming ball that has flowed into the entrance section of the ball entry section, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided in the ball passage and can detect the gaming ball passing through the ball passage, and configured so that the gaming ball passing through the ball passage and the ball detection means are visible from the front of the gaming machine, and characterized in that the gaming machine has an operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player, and a control unit (notification/performance control device 143) that executes control processing corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the gaming ball passes through the ball detection means."

Feature G2. A gaming machine having a gaming board (game board 60) on which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., a lower operating ball entry section 62) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The ball entry section has a ball passage (ball passage 801) through which game balls that flow into the entrance portion of the ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) pass, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided adjacent to the ball passage and is capable of detecting game balls that pass through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage, and is configured so that the game balls passing through the ball passage and the ball detection means are visible from the front of the gaming machine.
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by a player;
a period setting means for starting to accept operations of the operation means based on the detection of a game ball by the ball detection means, and setting a period for accepting operations so that the acceptance of operations continues from the start of the acceptance until a predetermined acceptance period has elapsed (a function for setting a timer counter for special operations in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an operation response processing execution means (a function of executing forced change processing in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that executes a predetermined operation response processing (first forced change processing or second forced change processing) corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means during the acceptance period set by the period setting means.

According to the configuration shown in feature G2, a predetermined operation response process is executed by operating the operation means in accordance with the timing when the gaming ball passes a predetermined position (ball detection means). With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage players who expect the operation response process to pay attention to the movement of the gaming ball. This can contribute to increasing the attention paid to the game.

Feature G3: The spherical passage is formed with a first passage portion (upstream passage portion 802) extending vertically from the inlet portion, and a second passage portion (communication passage portion 803) located downstream of the first passage portion and extending substantially horizontally;
A gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the specified position is located in the second passage portion.

The game ball that flows into the entrance portion is detected by the ball detection means after moving from the first passage portion extending vertically to the second passage portion extending substantially horizontally. By guiding the game ball that flows into the entrance portion quickly to the second passage portion by the first passage portion extending vertically, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of congestion of game balls near the entrance. Since the second passage portion extends substantially horizontally, the acceleration of the game ball is reduced compared to the first passage portion. With this configuration, the game ball passes through a predetermined position with reduced acceleration, and it is possible to prevent operations aimed at the timing of passing a predetermined position from becoming excessively difficult. Therefore, the attention-increasing effect shown in feature G1 etc. can be preferably exerted.

Feature G4. The second passage portion extends forward and backward;
The gaming machine described in feature G3 is characterized in that the acceptance period set by the period setting means is specified to be equal in length to the period required for a gaming ball to pass through a specified section in the second passage section that includes the specified position and the downstream side of the specified position.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a predetermined operation response process is executed by operating the operating means while the game ball is passing through a predetermined section in the second passage section, including the predetermined position and its downstream side. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the operation from becoming overly strict. Here, if a configuration is assumed in which the acceptance period is simply lengthened, there is a concern that the difference in distance between the predetermined position and the game ball when the operation is accepted will become larger, making it easier for an unnatural appearance to occur. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the second passage section is configured to extend forward and backward and the acceptance period is lengthened, it becomes difficult to accurately determine where the game ball is located in the depth direction, and this unnaturalness can be suitably alleviated.

Feature G5: The ball passage is located downstream of the second passage portion and has a third passage portion (downstream passage portion 804) continuing from the second passage portion;
The second passage portion extends forward and backward, and the game ball that passes through the second passage portion hits the rear wall portion (rear wall portion 821) and changes direction to move to the third passage portion.
The gaming machine described in feature G3 is characterized in that the period set by the period setting means is specified to be equal in length to the period required for a gaming ball to pass through the section from the specified position to the rear wall portion in the second passage portion.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a predetermined operation response process is executed by operating the operating means while the gaming ball is passing through the section from the predetermined position to the back wall in the second passage section. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the operation from becoming overly strict. If a configuration were to be envisaged in which the acceptance period was simply lengthened, there would be a greater gap in the distance between the predetermined position and the gaming ball when the operation was accepted, which would be a concern as this would be more likely to create an unnatural appearance. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the second passage section is configured to extend forward and backward and the acceptance period is lengthened, this makes it difficult to accurately determine where the gaming ball is located in the depth direction, and therefore the unnaturalness described above can be suitably alleviated.

Feature G6. The third passage portion extends in a vertical direction;
The gaming machine described in feature G5, wherein the first passage portion, the second passage portion, and the third passage portion are arranged in a vertical line when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In the configuration shown in this characteristic, the ball passage can be made to look as if it were a single vertically long passage when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the moving speed of the gaming ball appears to slow down when passing through the second passage section, and the moving speed increases again when moving to the third passage section. In this way, by slowing down the apparent moving speed of the gaming ball in the second passage section, it is possible to ensure a smooth flow of the gaming ball that has flowed into the ball entry section while preventing it from becoming excessively difficult to operate the operating means to time the ball passing through the ball detection means.

Feature G7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G4 to G6, characterized in that the predetermined position is set at a position in the second passage section that is closer to the boundary with the first passage section.

As shown in feature G1, etc., in a configuration in which acceptance of an operation begins based on the game ball passing through the ball detection means (detection position), if the operation means is operated immediately before the ball passes through the ball detection means, the operation will not be accepted. In a configuration in which the operation timing is relaxed by devising a passage structure as shown in feature G4, etc., there is a high possibility that the operation will be performed immediately before the passage timing. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the specified position closer to the boundary with the first passage section (closer to the upstream end of the second passage section), it is possible to prevent the operation from being performed outside the acceptance period and being wasted.

Feature G8. A special information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the game ball being detected by the ball detection means;
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a lottery means for sequentially carrying out lottery processing (lottery for big win, etc.) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing lottery processing based on balls entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G7, characterized in that the operation response processing execution means is configured to suggest information regarding the special information to the player by executing the operation response processing.

As shown in feature G1, if the configuration is such that information related to the targeted ball being scored is suggested by performing an operation in accordance with the timing of the game ball passing (detection timing), it becomes possible to assign a correspondence between the suggested content and the ball being scored.

Feature G9. A special information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the game ball being detected by the ball detection means;
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a lottery means for sequentially carrying out lottery processing (lottery for big win, etc.) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing lottery processing based on balls entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that the operation response processing execution means is configured to execute a first response processing (first forced change processing by MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) as the specified operation response processing when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached a specified number, and to execute a second response processing (second forced change processing by MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) as the specified operation response processing when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached the specified number.

As shown in feature G9, by configuring the processing to differ depending on the number of special information stored, it is possible to effectively prevent the reaction to an operation from becoming monotonous. For example, it is possible to execute different processing (display processing, etc.) depending on whether the number of special information stored has reached an upper limit or not.

In particular, in combination with feature G8, if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached a predetermined number, a first response process is executed as a predetermined operation response process to suggest to the player information related to the currently acquired special information, and if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached a predetermined number, a second response process is executed as a predetermined operation response process to suggest to the player information related to at least some of the special information previously acquired.

Feature G10. A prompting means for prompting the player to operate the operation means (a function for executing a process for operation suggestion in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to an operation when the operation means is operated under a situation where the prompting means is performing a prompting operation (a function for executing a reach display corresponding to an operation in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G9, characterized in that when the operation means is operated while the prompting means is issuing a prompt and during the acceptance period, the operation-responsive performance is executed by the performance execution means, while a delay means (a function of delaying forced changes in MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) is provided for delaying the operation-responsive processing by the operation-responsive processing execution means.

By configuring the game machine to perform the operations shown in feature G1, etc., using an operation means for the operation-responsive presentation, it is possible to prevent the game machine from becoming overly complicated in order to increase attention to the game. However, when the operation means is used for both purposes in this way, the following inconveniences may occur. That is, the timing of the ball entering the ball entry area is irregular, and there is a possibility that the prompt related to the operation-responsive presentation will coincide with the timing of the ball entering. There is a concern that the simultaneous execution of the operation-responsive presentation and the display based on the operation-responsive processing by one operation may cause one to be overlooked. Therefore, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably prevented by configuring the game machine to execute the operation-responsive presentation, which is less flexible in terms of game progress, with priority, and delaying the operation-responsive processing.

The technical ideas shown in Features G1 to G10 may also be applied to the above Features A to F.

<Feature H Group>
The following feature group H was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature H1. A gaming machine having a gaming board (60) on which a gaming area (PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., a lower operating ball entry section 62) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The ball entry section has a ball passage (ball passage 801) through which game balls that flow into the entrance portion of the ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) pass, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided next to the ball passage and can detect game balls that pass through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage, and is configured so that at least the ball detection means cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine.
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by a player;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an operation response processing execution means (a function of executing forced change processing in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) which executes a predetermined operation response processing corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means when the gaming ball passes through the detection position.

In a configuration in which the ball detection means cannot be seen as shown in feature H1, it is difficult to operate the operation means while visually checking the movement of the gaming ball passing through a predetermined position. This makes it possible to encourage players who expect operation-responsive processing to guess the timing at which the gaming ball will pass through a predetermined position (ball detection means). When making such a guess, it is possible to increase the accuracy of the guess by following the movement of the gaming ball with one's eyes until the timing at which the gaming ball flows into the entrance of the ball entry section. This therefore encourages the player to pay attention to the gaming ball, contributing to increased interest in the game.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 60) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., lower operating ball entry section 62) into which gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can enter, the ball entry section comprising a ball passage (ball passage 801) through which gaming balls that flow into the entrance portion (lower operating port 62a) of the ball entry section pass, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided adjacent to the ball passage and is capable of detecting gaming balls that pass through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage." It is also possible to make it a gaming machine that is configured so that at least the ball detection means and the predetermined position are not visible from the front of the gaming machine, and is equipped with an operation means (operation button 35) operated by a player, and an operation response processing execution means (a function of executing a forced change process in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that executes a predetermined operation response processing corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means when the gaming ball passes the detection position.

Feature H2. A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a) when a ball enters the entry ball section (e.g., the lower operating port 62a);
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a hold display control means (a function of executing a process for hold display in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) for displaying a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) and sequentially moving the hold images from the hold display area to a judgment display area (execution target display area Db);
The gaming machine described in feature H1 is characterized in that after the reserved image is additionally displayed in the reserved display area, the operation response processing targeting the passage of the gaming ball that triggered the additional display is not performed.

As shown in this feature, in a configuration in which a reserved image is additionally displayed in conjunction with the acquisition of special information, there is a possibility that an action may be taken in which an operation is performed at the timing when the reserved image is additionally displayed, rather than guessing the timing of the passing of the gaming ball. If such an operation were effective, there is a concern that the player's attention would be directed to the reserved display area rather than the gaming ball, which would be an obstacle to achieving the effect shown in feature H1. Therefore, by configuring in such a way that no operation response processing is performed on the corresponding gaming ball after an additional reserved image is displayed, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature H3. The ball passage has a first passage portion (upstream passage portion 802) extending vertically along the front surface of the game board, and a second passage portion (connecting passage portion 803) located downstream of the first passage portion and extending in the thickness direction of the game board;
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the predetermined position is a position in the second passage portion closer to the boundary with the first passage portion.

If a ball detection means (predetermined position) is set at the entrance of the ball entry section or in its vicinity, it is expected that the function of encouraging inference shown in feature H1 etc. will not be fully realized. This is because it may be possible to follow the movement of the game ball after it enters by looking into the entrance section (opening). On the other hand, if the distance from the entrance section to the predetermined position is large, there is a concern that the responsiveness to a ball entry will decrease. In light of these circumstances, applying a configuration in which a predetermined position is set at the upstream part of the second passage section extending in the thickness direction of the game board, as shown in this feature, can overcome these issues with a simple configuration.

Feature H4. A gaming machine having a gaming board (60) on which a gaming area (PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., a lower operating ball entry section 62) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The ball entry section has a ball passage (ball passage 801) through which game balls that flow into the entrance portion of the ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) pass, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided next to the ball passage and can detect game balls that pass through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage, and at least the ball detection means is configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine,
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by a player;
A period setting means for setting a waiting period (a winning waiting time) for the ball detection means to detect the passage of the ball when the operation means is operated (a function for setting a winning waiting counter in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an operation response processing execution means (a function of executing forced change processing in MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) which executes a predetermined operation response processing corresponding to the operation of the operating means when a gaming ball passing through the predetermined position is detected by the ball detection means during the waiting period.

In the configuration shown in this characteristic, a waiting period is set based on the operation of the operating means, and if a gaming ball is detected during that waiting period, a predetermined operation response process is executed. Here, in a configuration in which the ball detection means is not visible from the front of the gaming machine, it is difficult to operate the operating means while visually checking the movement of the gaming ball passing a predetermined position. For this reason, it is possible to encourage a player who expects the operation response process to guess the timing when the gaming ball will pass a predetermined position (ball detection means). In making such a guess, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the guess by following the movement of the gaming ball with one's eyes until the timing when the gaming ball flows into the entrance part of the ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player's attention to be directed to the gaming ball, contributing to an increase in the level of interest in the game.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to Feature H4, wherein when the predetermined operation response process is executed by the operation response process execution means, the waiting period set by the period setting means is cleared.

When the operating means is operated in accordance with the timing of the game ball passing and a specified operation response process is executed, the waiting period set by the period setting means is reset, thereby preventing a single operation from being accepted as an operation corresponding to multiple balls entering the game, making it difficult to understand the relationship between the operation and the target. This prevents the player from becoming confused when trying to guess the timing.

Feature H6. A gaming machine according to Feature H4 or Feature H5, characterized in that the waiting period is set to be shorter than the period required for the gaming ball to reach the predetermined position after passing through the entrance of the ball entry section.

Feature H6 makes it possible to prevent the operating means from being operated just before the ball passes through the entrance of the ball entry area, i.e., to prevent the above-mentioned prediction from being made.

Feature H7: A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a) when a ball enters the entry ball section (e.g., the lower operating port 62a);
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a hold display control means (a function of executing processing for hold display in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) that displays a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) and sequentially moves the hold images from the hold display area to a judgment display area (execution target display area Db);
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H4 to H6, characterized in that when the operation response processing execution means executes the specified operation response processing, a reserved image corresponding to the gaming ball that triggered the operation is suggested or clearly displayed.

As shown by this feature, when the operating means is operated at the right time, the target pending image is suggested or clearly indicated, which can contribute to improving the accuracy of the subsequent guesses.

The technical ideas shown in Features H4 to H7 can also be applied to Features H1 to H3 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features H1 to H7 may be applied to the above Features A to G.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following group of features I was made with a view to solving the problem that the invention aims to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology is as follows: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature I1. A gaming machine having a gaming board (game board 60) on which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., a lower operating ball entry section 62) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The ball entry section has a ball passage (ball passage 801) through which game balls that flow into the entrance portion of the ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) pass, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided adjacent to the ball passage and is capable of detecting game balls that pass through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage, and is configured so that the ball passage and the ball detection means are not visible from the front of the gaming machine.
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by a player;
When the ball detection means detects a game ball passing through the predetermined position, an operation timing determination means (a function of determining whether or not the operation means has been operated during a predetermined period (a period including the timing of passing through the lower operation port 62a) before the game ball is detected by the ball detection means (the function of determining whether or not a special operation has been performed by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an operation response processing execution means (a function of executing forced change processing in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) which, when it is determined by the operation timing determination means that the operation means has been operated during the specified period, executes a specified operation response processing corresponding to the operation.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when a gaming ball passes through the ball detection means (detection position), it is determined whether or not the operating means has been operated during a specified period prior to that, and if it has been operated during that specified period, a specified operation response process is executed. This makes it possible to encourage players who expect the operation response process to perform the operation at a specified period. When aiming for a specified period, it is possible to improve the accuracy by following the movement of the gaming ball with one's eyes until the timing when the gaming ball flows into the entrance part of the ball entry section. This encourages the player to pay attention to the gaming ball, contributing to an increase in interest in the game.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, characterized in that the predetermined period is defined to be a period including the timing when the gaming ball detected by the ball detection means passes through the entrance portion of the ball entry section.

In a configuration in which the ball passage and ball detection means cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine as shown in feature I1, the player is more likely to perceive an entry into the entrance as meaning a win, even though passing through a specified position is actually the occurrence of a win. In a configuration in which an entry ball is detected by a ball detection means attached to the entry ball section, a configuration that is in line with the player's perception can be realized by locating the ball detection means at the entry ball section, but locating the ball detection means near the entry ball section reduces the effect of suppressing unauthorized access to the ball detection means. In addition, for example, it is possible to configure a configuration in which a ball detection means for detecting game balls is separately located at the entry ball section and ball entry detection is performed separately at the entry ball section, but such measures are a factor that prevents the entry ball section from being made smaller and simpler.

As a result, as shown in this feature, by utilizing an existing ball detection means as a configuration that calculates backwards from the timing of game ball detection whether or not an operation was performed at the time of passing through the entrance, it is possible to effectively prevent the emergence of new issues such as placement space when trying to increase attention to the game.

Feature I3. A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (e.g., reserved information related to the lower operating port 62a) when a ball enters the entry ball section (e.g., the lower operating port 62a);
An acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a hold display control means (a function of executing a process for hold display in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) for displaying a number of hold images (hold icons MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area (hold number display area Da) and sequentially moving the hold images from the hold display area to a judgment display area (execution target display area Db);
A gaming machine described in feature I1 or feature I2, characterized in that the specified period is defined to be shorter than the period required for a gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the ball entry section to reach the specified position.

As shown in this feature, in a configuration in which a reserved image is additionally displayed in conjunction with the acquisition of special information, there is a possibility that an action may be taken in which an operation is performed at the timing when the reserved image is additionally displayed, rather than guessing the timing of the passing of the game ball. If such an operation were effective, it is feared that the player's attention would be directed to the reserved display area rather than the game ball, which would hinder the realization of the effect shown in feature I1. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the specified period shorter than the period required for the game ball to pass through the entrance part of the ball entry section and reach the specified position, it is possible to avoid performing an operation response process for the corresponding game ball after the reserved image is additionally displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature I4. A period measurement means is provided for measuring the period from when the operation means is operated to when the game ball is detected by the ball detection means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the operation timing determination means is configured to determine whether or not the operation means was operated during the specified period before the corresponding gaming ball was detected by comparing the period measured by the period measurement means with a predetermined reference period.

The configuration shown in feature I4 allows the technical ideas shown in features I1, etc. to be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4, characterized in that the operation timing determination means has a means for changing the reference period according to the passing speed of the gaming ball passing through the ball passage.

As shown in feature I1, etc., when the entrance of the ball entry section is far from the predetermined position (ball detection means), the time required for the game ball to reach the predetermined position from the entrance varies depending on the passing speed (moving speed) of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, changing the reference period according to the passing speed of the game ball can contribute to improving the accuracy of the judgment.

Feature I6. The ball detection means is configured to output a detection signal when the ball passes through the predetermined position,
The gaming machine described in feature I4 is characterized in that the operation timing determination means has a means for changing the reference period based on the length of the detection signal (HI level signal) output from the ball detection means.

As shown in feature I1, etc., when the entrance of the ball entry section and the predetermined position (ball detection means) are separated, the time required for the game ball to reach the predetermined position from the entrance section will differ depending on the passing speed (moving speed). Therefore, changing the reference period according to the passing speed of the game ball can contribute to improving the accuracy of the judgment. In realizing such a technical idea, it is possible to monitor the passing speed of the game ball by separately providing a speed sensor, for example. However, if a separate configuration is required, it is concerned that this will lead to the enlargement of the ball entry section, and the restrictions on the placement of the ball entry section will become stronger. In this regard, if the reference period is changed based on the length of the detection signal output from the ball detection means as shown in this feature, it is possible to easily improve the accuracy of the judgment by using an existing configuration.

Feature I7. A gaming machine having a gaming board (game board 60) on which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry section (e.g., a lower operating ball entry section 62) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The ball entry section has a ball passage (ball passage 801) through which game balls that flow into the entrance portion of the ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) pass, and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is provided adjacent to the ball passage and is capable of detecting game balls that pass through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage, and is configured so that the ball passage and the ball detection means are not visible from the front of the gaming machine.
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by a player;
an estimation means for estimating a timing at which the game ball entered the entrance portion when the ball detection means detects a game ball passing through the predetermined position;
a determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated during the timing estimated by the estimation means and during a predetermined period of time after the estimated timing;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an operation response processing execution means (a function of executing forced change processing in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) which executes a specified operation response processing corresponding to the operation when the operation means is operated at the estimated timing or during the specified period.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when a gaming ball passes through the ball detection means (detection position), the timing at which the gaming ball flowed into the entrance of the ball entry section is estimated, and it is determined whether the operating means was operated at the estimated timing and during a specified period thereafter. If it was operated during this period, a specified operation response process is executed. For this reason, players who expect the operation response process can be encouraged to perform an operation aimed at the timing at which the gaming ball flows into the entrance section. This can therefore be used to encourage players to turn their attention to the gaming ball, contributing to increased interest in the game.

Here, in a configuration where the ball passage and ball detection means are not visible from the front of the gaming machine, the player is more likely to perceive the ball entering the entrance as the occurrence of a win, even though passing through a predetermined position is actually the occurrence of a win. In a configuration where the ball is detected by a ball detection means attached to the ball entry section, the ball detection means can be placed at the entrance section to realize a configuration that is in line with the player's perception, but the effect of suppressing unauthorized access to the ball detection means is reduced by placing the ball detection means near the entrance section. In addition, for example, it is possible to separately place a detection means for detecting game balls at the entrance section and perform a separate configuration for detecting the ball entry at the entrance section, but such a measure becomes a factor that prevents the size and simplification of the ball entry section. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by using an existing ball detection means as a configuration that calculates backward from the timing of the game ball detection whether or not an operation was performed at the timing of passing through the entrance, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of new issues such as placement space in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature I8. The gaming machine described in Feature I7, wherein the estimation means performs the estimation based on the passing speed of the gaming ball passing the predetermined position.

As shown in feature I7, when the entrance of the ball entry section is far from the predetermined position (ball detection means), the time required for the game ball to reach the predetermined position from the entrance varies depending on the passing speed (moving speed) of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, making an estimation taking into account the passing speed of the game ball can contribute to improving the estimation accuracy.

The technical ideas shown in Features F1 to F6 can also be applied to Features F7 to F8.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features I1 to I8 may be applied to the above Features A to H.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (such as the guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 61, etc.) of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that changes and displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols, and then displays the series of symbols at its final stop; the change in symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the change in symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41... Game ball launching handle, 60... Game board, 62... Lower operating ball entry section or first ball entry section, 62a... Lower operating port or first operating port, 63... Right side operating ball entry section or second ball entry section, 63a... Right operating port or second operating port, 64... Upper variable winning device, 65... Lower variable winning device, 70... Ball entry unit, 75... Pattern display device, 75a... Display screen, 81... Main display unit, 110... Game ball launching mechanism, 143... Notification and performance control device, 162... Main control device, 191... Power supply and launch control device, 222... Payout device, 311...upper large winning port, 602...MPU, 604...RAM, 632...reserved ball storage area, 801...ball passage, 802...upstream passage section, 803...connecting passage section, 804...downstream passage section, 821...rear wall section, 850...ball detection sensor, D...main display section, D1...display section for first operating port, D2...display section for second operating port, DP...detection position, DS...display section for through gate, ME...variable display area, MP...reserved icon, PE...play area, ST...stock icon display area, SI...stock icon, VDP...715.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a ball entry means for allowing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area,
A detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means;
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information when the game ball is detected by the detection means;
A storage means capable of storing the predetermined information;
A means for executing a determination as to whether to grant a privilege to a player based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means;
a destination specifying means for specifying information when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes a target of the grant determination before the predetermined information becomes a target of the grant determination;
a specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification based on a result of the identification by the previous identification means;
An operation means operated by a player;
a means for executing a specific notification in a first manner regarding predetermined information acquired based on the detection when a game ball is detected by the detection means and a predetermined operation of the operation means is not performed during a predetermined period before the game ball is detected;
a means for executing a specific notification in a second manner different from the first manner regarding predetermined information acquired based on the detection of a gaming ball when the detection means detects the gaming ball and the predetermined operation is performed during the predetermined period before the detection of the gaming ball;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified operation of the operating means is performed after a gaming ball is detected by the detection means, a specific notification regarding the specified information obtained based on the detection is executed in a manner similar to when the specified operation of the operating means is not performed .

Images